diff options
Diffstat (limited to '21753.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 21753.txt | 10428 |
1 files changed, 10428 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/21753.txt b/21753.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d93dcfb --- /dev/null +++ b/21753.txt @@ -0,0 +1,10428 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Norsemen in the West, by R.M. Ballantyne + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Norsemen in the West + +Author: R.M. Ballantyne + +Release Date: June 7, 2007 [EBook #21753] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE NORSEMEN IN THE WEST *** + + + + +Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England + + + + +THE NORSEMEN IN THE WEST, BY R.M. BALLANTYNE. + + + +CHAPTER ONE. + +THE NORSEMEN IN THE WEST; OR AMERICA BEFORE COLUMBUS. + +THE CURTAIN RISES AND THE PLAY BEGINS. + +One fine autumn evening, between eight and nine hundred years ago, two +large hairy creatures, bearing some resemblance to polar bears, might +have been seen creeping slowly, and with much caution, toward the summit +of a ridge that formed a spur to one of the ice-clad mountains of +Greenland. The creatures went on all-fours. They had long bodies, +short legs, shorter tails, and large round heads. + +Having gained the top of the ridge they peeped over and beheld a hamlet +nestled at the foot of a frowning cliff; and at the head of a smiling +inlet. We use these terms advisedly, because the cliff, being in deep +shadow, looked unusually black and forbidding, while the inlet, besides +being under the influence of a profound calm, was lit up on all its +dimples by the rays of the setting sun. + +The hamlet consisted of one large cottage and half a dozen small cots, +besides several sheds and enclosures wherein were a few sleepy-looking +sheep, some lean cattle, and several half-starved horses. There was +active life there also. Smoke issued from the chimneys; fresh-looking +women busied themselves about household work; rosy children tumbled in +and out at the doors, while men in rough garments and with ruddy +countenances mended nets or repaired boats on the shore. On a bench in +front of the principal cottage sat a sturdy man, scarcely middle-aged, +with shaggy fair and flowing locks. His right foot served as a horse to +a rapturous little boy, whose locks and looks were so like to those of +the man that their kinship was obvious--only the man was rugged and +rough in exterior; the boy was round and smooth. Tow typified the hair +of the man; floss silk that of the boy. + +Everything in and around the hamlet bore evidence of peace and thrift. +It was a settlement of Norsemen--the _first_ Greenland settlement, +established by Eric the Red of Iceland about the year 986--nearly twenty +years before the date of the opening of our tale--and the hairy +creatures above referred to had gone there to look at it. + +Having gazed very intently over the ridge for a considerable time, they +crept backwards with extreme caution, and, on getting sufficiently far +down the hill-side to be safe from observation, rose on their hind-legs +and began to talk; from which circumstance it may be concluded that they +were human beings. After talking, grinning, and glaring at each other +for a few minutes, with gestures to correspond, as though on the point +of engaging in mortal combat, they suddenly wheeled about and walked off +at a rapid pace in the direction of a gorge in the mountains, the head +of which was shut in by and filled up with cliffs and masses and fields +of ice that overtopped the everlasting hills, and rested like a white +crest on the blue sky. Vast though it seemed, this was merely a tongue +of those great glaciers of the mysterious North which have done, and are +still doing, so much to modify the earth's economy and puzzle +antiquarian philosophy; which form the fountain-head of influences that +promote the circulation of the great deep, and constitute the cradle of +those ponderous icebergs that cover the arctic seas. + +From out that gloomy gorge a band of more than a hundred hairy creatures +issued with wild shouts and upraised arms to welcome back the +adventurous two. They surrounded them, and forthwith the nation--for +the entire nation was evidently there--held a general assembly or +parliament on the spot. There was a good deal of uproar and confusion +in that parliament, with occasional attempts on the part of several +speakers to obtain a hearing at one and the same time--in which respects +this parliament bore some resemblance to civilised assemblies of the +present day. There was also an immense amount of gesticulation and +excitement. + +At last there uprose a man clad in garments that had once belonged to a +seal, and with a face that was quite as round and nearly as flat as a +frying-pan. He stood fully half a foot higher than the tallest of his +fellows. Like the adventurous two he had a tail--a very short tail--to +his coat; but indeed this might be said of all the men of the tribe. +The women's tails, however, were long. Perhaps this was meant as a mark +of distinction, for their costume was so very similar to that of the men +that their smaller size and longer tails alone marked the difference. +To be sure there was additional presumptive evidence of their sex in the +fact that most of them carried babies in their hoods; which hoods were +made preposterously large for the express purpose of containing the +babies. + +To the tall man with the flat face the assembly listened with eager +looks, bated breath, and open mouths. What he said--who can tell? His +language was unintelligible to civilised ears. Not so, however, his +actions, which were vigorous and full of meaning, and comprehensible by +all nations. If there be any significance in signs at all he began by +saying, "Hold your stupid tongues and _I_ will speak." This drew forth +loud and prolonged applause--as consummate impudence usually does. When +he pointed with both hands to the women and children, and spoke in +tender tones, instantly thereafter growling in his speech, gnashing his +teeth, glaring fiercely, waving one hand at the surrounding hills and +shaking the other, clenched, at the unoffending sea--he was obviously +stating his grievances, namely, that the white men had come there to +wrest from him his native hills and glaciers, and rob him of his wife +and children, and that he defied them to come on and do their worst, +seeing that, in regard to the whole assembled white world in arms he did +not care a button--or a walrus-tusk, for buttons were unknown to these +creatures at that time. When, suddenly changing his manner and tone, he +seized a spear, hissed his sentiments through his teeth with great +volubility, and made a furious plunge that caused the assembly to gasp, +and the man nearest the spear point to shrivel up--what _could_ be his +meaning save that nothing short of a hole right through the body of a +Norseman could appease the spirit of indignation that caused his blood +to boil? And when, finally, he pointed to the setting sun, traced a +line with his finger from it downward to the centre of the earth under +his feet, then shook his spear wrathfully toward the sea and wound up +with a tremendous Ho! that would have startled the echoes of the place +had there been any there, it was plain to the meanest capacity that an +attack--impetuous and overwhelming--was to be made on the strangers at +midnight. + +Whatever were his sentiments, the assembly heartily appreciated, +applauded, and approved them. They cheered and shouted "Hear, hear," +after their own fashion, and then the whole band rushed back into the +mountain gorge,--doubtless with the intent to gorge themselves with raw +blubber, prepare their weapons, and snatch a little repose before +issuing forth to battle. + +But let us return to the Norsemen, over whose innocent heads such awful +prospects were impending. + +The sturdy man with the fair shaggy locks was Leif, the son of Eric the +Red of Iceland. The boy with the silken curls, who rode on his foot so +joyously, was his son Olaf. + +Eric had died several years before the date on which our tale opens, and +Leif inherited his cottage and property at Brattalid in Ericsfiord, on +the west coast of Greenland--the hamlet which we have already described. + +"Come now, Olaf," said Leif, flinging the child from his foot to his +knee, and thence to the ground, "give me your hand; we shall go see how +the boats and nets get on.--Hey! there goes a puff of wind. We shall +have more presently." He paused and scanned the seaward horizon with +that intent abstracted gaze which is peculiar to seafaring men. So long +did he gaze, and so earnestly, that the child looked up in his face with +an expression of surprise, and then at the horizon, where a dark blue +line indicated the approach of a breeze. + +"What do you see, father?" asked Olaf. + +"Methinks I see two ships," replied Leif. + +At this there came a sweet musical voice from the cottage:--"Ships, +brother! Did I not tell you that I had a dream about two ships, and +said I not that I was sure something was going to happen?" + +The speaker appeared in the doorway, drying her hands and arms on a +towel,--for she had been washing dishes. She was a fair comely young +woman, with exceedingly deep blue eyes, and a bright colour in her +cheeks,--for women of the richer class were remarkably healthy and +well-made in those days. They did a great deal of hard work with their +hands, hence their arms were strong and well developed without losing +anything of their elegance. + +"You are always dreaming, widow Gudrid," said Leif, with a quiet +smile,--for he was no believer in dreams or superstitions, in which +respect he differed much from the men and women of his time; +"nevertheless, I am bound to admit that you did tell me that `something' +was going to happen, and no one can deny that something _is_ about to +occur just now. But your dream happened a month or six weeks ago, and +the `something,' which you are pleased to assume is these two ships, is +only happening to-day. See, now, I can be a more definite prophet than +thou: I will prophesy that Yule is coming,--and it will surely come if +you only wait long enough!" + +"You are an unbeliever, brother-in-law," retorted Gudrid, with a laugh; +"but I have not time to reason with you. These ships will bring +strangers, and I must prepare to show them hospitality.--Come, Olaf, +help me to put the house in order." + +Thus summoned, Olaf followed Gudrid into the house with alacrity, for he +was passionately fond of his pretty aunt, who stood in the place of a +mother to him, his own mother having died when he was an infant. + +"But, aunt," said Olaf, checking himself in the doorway and looking +wistfully back, "I want to see the ships come in." + +"You shall see that, my son; I will not keep you too long." + +This was quite sufficient. Olaf thoroughly believed in his aunt's +truthfulness and wisdom. He set to work to assist in clearing away the +confusion--part of which, in the shape of toys and chips--was of his own +creating--and became so busy that he almost forgot the ships--at least +if he did remember them they did not weigh heavily on his mind. + +"Now, Olaf," said Gudrid, going to the window when the preparations were +nearly completed, "you may run down to the shore, for the ships will +soon be on the strand." + +The boy waited no second bidding, you may be sure. He flew out of the +house, and to his great surprise beheld the two ships--which so lately +had appeared like sea-birds on the horizon--coming grandly up the fiord, +their great square sails bulging out before a smart breeze. + +All the men of the little colony were assembled on the shore--all, at +least, who chanced to be at home at the time; but many of the +inhabitants were absent--some fishing, some gone to Iceland, and others +on viking-cruise. There were probably about thirty men on the sands, +besides a good many women and children. + +It must not be supposed, however, that this was the whole of that +Greenland colony. It was only the part of it that had settled at +Brattalid in Ericsfiord. There was another portion, a few miles +distant, named Heriulfness, nearly as large as that of Ericsfiord, which +had been founded by Heriulf a friend and companion of Eric the Red. +Heriulf had soon followed his friend Eric to the grave, leaving the +management of the colony of Heriulfness to his son Biarne. + +Biarne had not been present when the two sails were first observed, but +he chanced to come over to Brattalid just before their arrival. + +"What, ho! Biarne," shouted Leif, as the son of Heriulf went down to +the beach, "come up hither." + +Leif stood on an elevated rock apart, and Biarne, a good deal excited, +went up to him. + +"Why, what ails thee?" asked Leif. + +"Nothing," replied Biarne, "but I think I know whose ship that first one +is." + +"Ay! is it the ship of a friend or a foe?" + +"A friend," replied Biarne--"at least he was a friend when I knew him in +Norway, nigh twenty summers past, and I did not think him changeable. +You and I, Leif, have often sailed these northern seas together and +apart, but I do not think that in all our wanderings either of us has +met before or since a finer man than Karlsefin, though he was a mere +stripling when I knew him." + +The Norseman's eyes flashed as he spoke of his friend, for, besides +being a strong and handsome man, he possessed a warm enthusiastic heart. +Indeed, he had been noted in the settlement for the strength of his +affection for his father Heriulf, and his dutiful conduct towards him as +long as the old man lived. + +"Karlsefin," repeated Leif, musing; "I know him not." + +"Yet he knows you," said Biarne; "when I met him in Norway I told him +all about your discovery of Vinland." + +"Nay, thine own discovery of it," said Leif. + +"Not so," replied the other, with a blush, in which a frown mingled; "I +did but look upon the land--you went ashore and took possession." + +"Well, if I did so I have not retained it," replied Leif, with a laugh; +"but say, how know you that this is Karlsefin's ship?" + +"I know by the cut of her figure-head and the colour of her sails. +Karlsefin was always partial to stripes of white and blue." + +"Well, it may be as you say; we shall soon know." Thus saying, Leif +descended to the beach as the vessels approached and ran their keels +straight on the sandy shores of the bay. There was great bustle on +board, and there were many men, besides some women, who could be seen +looking over the bulwarks with keen interest, while Leif's men brought +planks with which to make a gangway from the ship to the shore. + +The ships which had thus come to Greenland were of the quaint build +peculiar to the Norse vessels of those days--a peculiarity of build, by +the way, which has not altogether disappeared, for to this day the great +central mast, huge square sail, and high prow may be seen in the fiords +of Norway. + +Each of the vessels which now lay beached in Ericsfiord had a high +forecastle and poop, with figure-heads on stem and stern-posts that +towered higher still. The ships were only half-decked, with benches for +numerous rowers, and each had a crew of sixty men. + +When the gangway was laid to the leading ship the first man who +descended to the shore was of striking appearance. It was not so much +that he was tall and strong enough to have been a worthy foeman to the +stoutest colonist in Ericsfiord, as that his demeanour was bland and +courtly, while there was great intellectuality in his dark handsome +countenance. Unlike most Norsemen, his hair and beard were black and +close-curling, and his costume, though simple, was rich in quality. + +The moment he landed, Biarne stepped forward, exclaiming, "Karlsefin!" + +The stranger's face lighted up with surprise and pleasure. + +"Biarne!" he said, seizing his hand, "I thought you were in Iceland." + +"So I was, but now I am in Greenland, and right glad to be the first to +welcome my friend." + +Hereupon the two shook hands fervently; but, not content with this, they +seized each other in an embrace, and their bearded mouths met with a +hearty masculine smack that did credit to their hearts, and which it +might have gratified the feelings of an affectionate walrus to behold. + + + +CHAPTER TWO. + +STRONG EMOTIONS ARE SUCCEEDED BY SUPPER, AND FOLLOWED BY DISCUSSIONS ON +DISCOVERY, WHICH END IN A WILD ALARM! + +When Karlsefin had been introduced to Leif Ericsson, the former turned +round and presented to him and Biarne his friend Thorward, the captain +of the other ship. Thorward was not a tall man, but was very broad and +stout, and had a firm yet pleasing cast of countenance. Both Thorward +and Karlsefin were men of about thirty-five years of age. + +"Are you not on viking-cruise?" asked Leif as they walked up to the +house together, while the male members of his household and the men of +the settlement assisted the crews to moor the ships. + +"No; my friend Thorward and I are not men of war. We prefer the +peaceful occupation of the merchant, and, to say truth, it is not +unprofitable." + +"I would that more were of your way of thinking," said Leif. "I do not +love the bloody game of war, and glad am I that we have got into a quiet +corner here in Greenland, where there is small occasion for it. Biarne, +too, is of our way of thinking, as no doubt you already know." + +"He has often told me so, and, if I mistake not, has feathered his nest +well by merchanting." + +"He has," answered Biarne for himself, with a laugh. + +While they thus advanced, talking, little Olaf had kept walking in front +of the tall stranger, looking up into his face with unbounded +admiration. He had never before seen any man so magnificent. His +father and Biarne, whom he had hitherto regarded as perfect specimens of +mankind, were quite eclipsed. Looking backward and walking forward is +an unsafe process at any time. So Olaf found it on the present +occasion, for he tripped over a stone and in falling hit his little nose +with such violence that it soon became a big nose, and bled profusely. + +Karlsefin picked him up and set him on his legs. "My poor boy, don't +cry," he said. + +"No fear of _him_ crying," observed Leif; "he never cries,--save when +his feelings are hurt. When you touch these he _is_ addicted to +blubbering.--Run, lad, and Gudrid will wash you." + +Olaf bounded into the house, where he was carried off to a sleeping-room +and there carefully sponged by the sympathetic Gudrid. "Oh!--" he +exclaimed, while his face was being washed. + +"Does it pain you much, dear?" said the pretty aunt, interrupting him. + +"Oh!" he continued, enthusiastically, "I never did see such a splendid +man before." + +"What splendid man, child?" + +"Why, Karlsefin." + +"And who is Karlsefin?" + +"The stranger who has come across the sea from Norway." + +"Indeed," said Gudrid. + +Whether it was the sound of the stranger's voice in the adjoining room, +or anxiety to complete her hospitable preparations, that caused Gudrid +to bring her operations on Olaf to an abrupt termination, we cannot +tell, but certain it is that she dried him rather quickly and hastened +into the outer hall, where she was introduced to the two strangers in +due form as widow Gudrid. + +She had no difficulty in distinguishing which was Olaf's "splendid man!" +She looked at Karlsefin and fell in love with him on the spot, but +Gudrid was modest, and not sentimental. It is only your mawkishly +sentimental people who are perpetually tumbling into love, and out of +it, and can't help showing it. Cupid shot her right through the heart +with one powerful dart, and took her unawares too, but she did not show +the smallest symptom of having been even grazed. She neither blushed +nor stammered, nor looked conscious, nor affected to look unconscious. +She was charmingly natural! + +But this was not all: Karlsefin also fell in love on the spot,--over +head and ears and hair, and hat to boot; neither did he show sign of it! +After the trifling ceremonies usual on an introduction were over, he +turned to continue his conversation with Leif and paid no further +attention to Gudrid, while she busied herself in preparing supper. It +is true that he looked at her now and then, but of course he looked at +everybody, now and then, in the course of the evening. Besides, it is +well-known what is said about the rights of the feline species in +reference to royalty. At supper Gudrid waited on the guests, Karlsefin +therefore, necessarily paid her somewhat more attention in accepting her +civilities, but Thorward was quite as attentive as he, so that the most +sharp-witted match-maker in the world would have failed to note any +symptom of anything whatever in regard to either of them. + +Gudrid felt this a little, for she was accustomed to admiration from the +young men of Ericsfiord and Heriulfness, and, you know, people don't +like to want what they are accustomed to. What Karlsefin thought, he +did not show and never mentioned, therefore we cannot tell. + +Now, good reader, pray do not run away with the notion that this love +affair is the plot on which the story is to hinge! Nothing of the kind. +It ran its course much more rapidly, and terminated much more abruptly, +than you probably suppose--as the sequel will show. + +During supper there was not much conversation, for all were hungry, but +afterwards, when cans of home-brewed ale were handed round, the tongues +began to move. Leif soon observed that Karlsefin merely sipped his +beer, but never once drank. + +"You do not drink," he said, pushing a large silver tankard towards him; +"come, fill up." + +"Thanks, I drink but sparingly," said Karlsefin, taking up the large +tankard and admiring the workmanship. + +"In good sooth ye do," cried Biarne, with a laugh; "a mouse could hardly +slake his thirst with all that you have yet imbibed." + +"I have been so long at sea," rejoined Karlsefin, smiling, "that I have +lost my relish for beer. We had nothing but water with us. Where got +you this tankard, Leif, it is very massive and the workmanship such as +one seldom meets with save in kings' houses?" + +"It belonged to a king!" replied Leif, with a look of pride. "Good King +Olaf Tryggvisson gave it to me on an occasion when I chanced to do him +some small service. Many winters have passed since then." + +"Indeed, Leif! then you must be a favourite with King Olaf," exclaimed +Karlsefin, "for I am the bearer of another gift to you from his royal +hand." + +"To me?" + +"Ay. Hearing that I meant to sail over to Greenland this summer, he +asked me to bear you his remembrances, and gave me two slaves to present +to you in token of his continued friendship." + +Leif's face beamed with satisfaction, and he immediately filled and +quaffed a bumper of ale to King Olaf's health, which example was +followed by Biarne and the guests, as well as by the house-carls who sat +on benches in various parts of the hall drinking their ale and listening +to the conversation. Even little Olaf--who had been named after the +king of Norway--filled his tankard to the brim with milk, and quaffed it +off with a swagger that was worthy of a descendant of a long line of +sea-kings, who could trace their lineage back to Odin himself. + +"The slaves," continued Karlsefin, "are from the land of the Scots. +Wouldst like to see a Scotsman, Gudrid?" he added, turning to the widow +who sat near him. + +"I should like it much. I have heard of the Scots in Iceland. 'Tis +said they are a well-favoured race, stout warriors, and somewhat fond of +trading." + +Leif and Biarne both laughed loud and long at this. + +"In good truth they are a stout race, and fight like very wild-cats, as +Biarne and I can testify; as to their being well-favoured, there can be +no question about that; though they are rather more rugged than the +people farther south, and--yes, they _are_ good traders, and exceedingly +cautious men. They think well before they speak, and they speak +slowly--sometimes they won't speak at all. Ha! ha! Here, I drink to +the land of the Scot. It is a grand good land, like our own dear old +Norway." + +"Brother-in-law," exclaimed Gudrid, reproachfully, "do you forget that +you are an Icelander?" + +"Forget!" exclaimed Leif, tossing back his yellow locks, and raising the +tankard again to pledge his native land; "no, I shall only forget +Iceland when I forget to live; but I don't forget, also, that it is only +about 130 years since my great-grandfather and his companions came over +from Norway to Iceland. Before that it was an unpeopled rock in the +Northern Sea, without name or history. [Iceland was colonised by +Norsemen about the year 874.] 'Twas as little known then as Vinland is +known now." + +"By the way, Biarne," said Karlsefin, turning to his friend, "the +mention of Vinland reminds me that, when you and I met last, you did not +give me a full account of that discovery, seeing that you omitted to +mention your own share in it. Tell me how was it, and when and where +was it? Nay, have I unintentionally touched on a sore point?" he added, +on observing a slight shade of annoyance pass over Biarne's usually +cheerful countenance. + +"He _is_ a little sore about it," said Leif, laughing. "Come, Biarne, +don't be thin-skinned. You know the saying, A dutiful son makes a glad +father. You had the best of reasons for acting as you did." + +"Ay, but people don't believe in these best of reasons," retorted +Biarne, still annoyed, though somewhat mollified by Leif's remarks. + +"Never mind, 'tis long past now. Come, give us the saga. 'Tis a good +one, and will bear re-telling." + +"Oh yes," exclaimed Olaf, with sparkling eyes, for the boy dearly loved +anything that bore the faintest resemblance to a saga or story, "tell +it, Biarne." + +"Not I," said Biarne; "Leif can tell it as well as I, if he chooses." + +"Well, I'll try," said Leif, laying his huge hand on the table and +looking earnestly at Karlsefin and Thorward. The latter was a very +silent man, and had scarcely uttered a word all the evening, but he +appeared to take peculiar interest in Vinland, and backed up the request +that Leif would give an account of its discovery. + +"About twenty summers ago," said Leif, "my father, Eric the Red, and his +friend Heriulf, Biarne's father, came over here from Iceland. [A.D. +986.] Biarne was a very young man at the time--little more than a boy-- +but he was a man of enterprise, and fond of going abroad, and possessed +a merchant-ship of his own with which he gathered wealth, and, I will +say it, reputation also--though perhaps I should not say that to his +face. + +"He was a good son, and used to be by turns a year abroad and a year +with his father. He chanced to be away in Norway when Heriulf and my +father Eric came over to Greenland. On returning to Iceland he was so +much disappointed to hear of his father's departure that he would not +unload his ship, but resolved to follow his old custom and take up his +winter abode with his father. `Who will go with me to Greenland?' said +he to his men. `We will all go,' replied the men. `Our expedition,' +said Biarne, `will be thought foolish, as none of us have ever been on +the Greenland sea before.' `We mind not that,' said the men--so away +they sailed for three days and lost sight of Iceland. Then the wind +failed; after that a north wind and a fog set in, and they knew not +where they were sailing to; and this lasted many days. At length the +sun appeared. Then they knew the quarters of the sky, and, after +sailing a day and a night, made the land. + +"They saw that it was without mountains, was covered with wood, and that +there were small hills inland. Biarne saw that this did not answer to +the description of Greenland; he knew he was too far south, so he left +the land on the larboard side, and sailed two days and nights before +they got sight of land again. The men asked Biarne if this was +Greenland, but he said it was not, `For on Greenland,' he says, `there +are great snowy mountains, but this is flat and covered with trees.' +Here the wind fell and the men wanted to go ashore, `Because,' said +they, `we have need of wood and water.' Biarne replied, `Ye are not in +want of either;' and the men blamed him for this,--but the season was +far spent, he knew not how long it might take him to find Greenland, so +he had no time to spare.--Was it not so?" said Leif, appealing to his +friend. + +"It was so," replied Biarne, nodding gravely. + +"Well then," continued Leif, "it must be told that he ordered them to +hoist the sail, which they did, and, turning the bow from the land, kept +the sea for three days and nights, with a fine breeze from the +south-west, when a third time land was seen, with high snowy mountains. +Still Biarne would not land, for it was not like what had been reported +of Greenland. They soon found it to be an island, and, turning from it, +stood out to sea, when the breeze increased to a gale, forcing them to +take in a reef; so they sailed for three days and nights more, and made +land the fourth time. This turned out to be Greenland, and quite close +to Heriulf's dwelling at Heriulfness. Biarne then gave up seafaring, +and dwelt with his old father as long as he lived; but since his death +he has been sometimes at sea and sometimes at home. Now, these lands +which Biarne discovered, were what I have since called Vinland." + +"Yes," exclaimed Biarne, with a look of indignation; "and when I +afterwards fared to Norway they blamed me for not going on shore and +exploring these lands--as if I, at the end of autumn, could afford to +put off time in explorations, when it was all I could do to make my port +before the winter set in!" He finished off by striking the table with +his fist, seizing his tankard, and draining it to the bottom. + +"I have often observed," said Karlsefin, quietly, "that people who sit +by their firesides at home, and do nothing, are usually very severe and +noisy in their remarks on those who fare abroad and do great things; but +that arises not so much from ill-will as ignorance." + +"But what of your own doings, Leif?" said Thorward, breaking in here +impatiently. + +"Well, I didn't do much," replied Leif. "I only took possession, and +didn't keep it. This was the way of it. Fourteen years after this +voyage of Biarne, [about the year A.D. 1000] I was seized with a desire +to see these new lands. I bought Biarne's ship from him, set sail with +a good crew, and found the lands, just as Biarne had described them, far +away to the south of Greenland. I landed and gave names to some places. +At the farthest south point we built huts and spent the winter, but +returned home in spring. I called this part Vinland, and this is the +reason why: We had a German with us named Tyrker, who is with me here +still. One day Tyrker was lost; I was very anxious about him, fearing +that he had been killed by wild beasts or Skraelingers, [Esquimaux or +savages, probably Indians,] so I sent out parties to search. In the +evening we found him coming home in a state of great excitement, having +found fruit which, he said, was grapes. The sight and taste of the +fruit, to which he was used in his own land, had excited him to such an +extent that we thought he was drunk, and for some time he would do +nothing but laugh and devour grapes, and talk German, which none of us +understood. At last he spoke Norse, and told us that he had found vines +and grapes in great abundance. We found that this was true--at least we +found a berry which was quite new to us. We went off next day, and, +gathering enough to load our boat, brought them away with us. From this +circumstance I called it Vinland. Two years after that my brother +Thorwald went to Vinland, wintered three years there, was killed by the +Skraelingers, and his men returned to Greenland. Then my youngest +brother, Thorstein, who was Gudrid's husband, went off to Vinland to +fetch home the body of our brother Thorwald, but was driven back by +stress of weather. He was taken ill soon after that, and died. Since +then Gudrid has dwelt with my household, and glad we are to have her. +This is the whole story of Vinland; so if you want to know more about it +you must e'en go on a voyage of discovery for yourself." + +"I should like nothing better," replied Karlsefin, "if I could only--" + +At that moment the door was burst violently open, and a man with +bloodshot eyes and labouring breath rushed in exclaiming, "The +Skraelinger! the Skraelinger are upon us!" + + + +CHAPTER THREE. + +DARK WAR-CLOUDS LOWER, BUT CLEAR AWAY WITHOUT A SHOWER--VOICES AND LEGS +DO GOOD SERVICE. + +"Up, carls, buckle on your war-gear!" cried Leif, rising hastily on +hearing the announcement with which the last chapter ended. + +"Run, Thorward, call out our men," whispered Karlsefin; "I will stay to +learn what Leif means to do. Bring them all up to the door." + +Thorward was gone almost before the sentence was finished. Leif and his +house-carls, of whom there were ten present at the time, did not take +long to busk them for the fight. The Norse of old were born, bred, and +buried--if they escaped being killed and cut to pieces--in the midst of +alarms. Their armour was easily donned, and not very cumbrous. Even +while Leif was giving the first order to his men, Gudrid had run to the +peg on which hung his sword and helmet, and brought him these implements +of war. + +"My men and I shall be able to render you some service, Leif," said +Karlsefin; "what do you intend to do?" + +"Do!" exclaimed Leif with a grim laugh, as he buckled on his sword, +"why, I shall give the Skraelingers a tremendous fright, that is all. +The rascals! They knew well that we were short-handed just now, and +thought to take advantage of us; but hah! they do not seem to be aware +that we chance to have stout visitors with us to-night. So, lads, +follow me." + +Biarne, meanwhile, had darted out on the first alarm, and assembled all +the men in the settlement, so that when Leif, Karlsefin, and the +housemen issued out of the cottage they found about a dozen men +assembled, and others running up every moment to join them. Before +these were put in array most of the men of Karlsefin's ship, numbering +forty, and those belonging to Thorward, numbering thirty, came up, so +that when all were mustered they were little if at all short of one +hundred stout warriors. + +The moon came out brightly at the time, and Leif chuckled as he watched +Biarne put the men hastily into marching order. + +"Methought you said that war was distasteful," observed Karlsefin, in +some surprise. + +"So it is, so it is, friend," replied Leif, still laughing in a low +tone; "but there will be no war to-night. Leave your bows behind you, +lads," he added, addressing the men; "you won't want them; shield and +sword will be enough. For the matter of that, we might do without both. +Now, lads, follow my leading, and do as I bid you; advance with as +little noise as may be." + +So saying, Leif led the way out of the little hamlet towards the +extremity of the ridge or spur of the mountains that sheltered +Ericsfiord from the north-west. + +Towards that same extremity another band of men were hastening on the +other side of the ridge. It was a band of our hairy friends whom the +Norsemen called Skraelingers. + +Truly there was something grand in the look and bearing of the tall man +with the flat face, as he led his band to attack the warlike Norsemen, +and there was something almost sublime in the savage, resolute aspect of +the men who followed him--each being armed with a large walrus spear, +and each being, moreover, an adept in the use of it. + +Flatface (in default of a better, let that name stick to him) had +ascertained beyond a doubt that the entire available force of Norsemen +in Ericsfiord had, in consequence of fishing and other expeditions, been +reduced to barely thirty fighting men. He himself could muster a band +of at least one hundred and fifty good men and true--not to mention +hairy, a hundred and fifty seals having unwillingly contributed their +coats to cover these bloodthirsty Skraelingers. The Norsemen, Flatface +knew, were strong men and bold, besides being large, but he resolved to +take them by surprise, and surely (he argued with himself) a hundred and +fifty brave men with spears will be more than a match for thirty sleepy +men unarmed and in bed! + +Flatface had screwed himself up with such considerations; made a few +more inflammatory speeches to his men, by way of screwing them up also, +and then, a little before midnight, set forth on his expedition. + +Now it chanced that there was a man among the Norsemen who was a great +hunter and trapper. His name was Tyrker--the same Tyrker mentioned by +Leif as being the man who had found grapes in Vinland. Leif said he was +a German, but he said so on no better authority than the fact that he +had originally come to Norway from the south of Europe. It is much more +probable that he was a Turk, for, whereas the Germans are known to be a +well-sized handsome race of fair men, this Tyrker was an ugly little +dark wiry fellow, with a high forehead, sharp eyes, and a small face; +but he was extremely active, and, although an elderly man, few of the +youths in Ericsfiord could beat him at feats requiring dexterity. + +But, whether German or Turk, Tyrker was an enthusiastic trapper of +white, or arctic foxes. These creatures being very numerous in that +part of Greenland, he was wont to go out at all hours, late and early, +to visit his traps. Hence it happened that, on the night in question, +Tyrker found himself in company with two captured arctic foxes at, the +extremity of the mountain spur before referred to. + +He could see round the corner of the spur into the country beyond, but +as the country there was not attractive, even at its best, he paid no +attention to it. He chanced, however, to cast upon it one glance after +setting his traps, just as he was about to return home. That glance +called forth a steady look, which was followed by a stare of surprise, +and the deep guttural utterance of the word "zz-grandimaghowl!" which, +no doubt, was Turkish, at that ancient date, for "hallo!" + +It was the band of hairy creatures that had met his astonished sight. +Tyrker shrank behind the spur and peeped round it for a few seconds to +make quite sure. Then, turning and creeping fairly out of sight, he +rose and bounded back to the hamlet, as though he had been a youth of +twenty. As we have seen, he arrived, gasping, in time to warn his +friends. + +Between the hamlet and the spur where Tyrker's traps were set there were +several promontories, or projections from the cliffs, all of which had +to be passed before the spur came in view. Leif led his men past the +first and second of these at a run. Then, believing that he had gone +far enough, he ordered his band to draw close up under the cliffs, where +the shadow was deepest, saying that he would go alone in advance to +reconnoitre. + +"And mark me, lads," he said, "when I give a loud sneeze, do you give +vent to a roar that will only stop short of splitting your lungs; then +give chase, and yell to your hearts' content as you run; but see to it +that ye keep together and that no man runs past _me_. There is plenty +of moonlight to let you see what you're about. If any man tries to +overshoot me in the race I'll hew off his head." + +This last remark was no figure of speech. In those days men were but +too well accustomed to hewing off heads. Leif meant to have his orders +attended to, and the men understood him. + +On reaching the second projection of cliff after leaving his men, Leif +peeped round cautiously and beheld the advancing Skraelingers several +hundred yards off. He returned at once to his men and took up a +position at their head in the deep shadow of the cliffs. + +Although absolutely invisible themselves, the Norsemen could see the +Skraelingers quite plainly in the moonlight, as they came slowly and +with great caution round each turn of the footpath that led to the +hamlet. There was something quite awe-inspiring in the manner of their +approach. Evidently Flatface dreaded a surprise, for he put each leg +very slowly in advance of the other, and went on tiptoe, glancing +quickly on either side between each step. His followers--in a compact +body, in deep silence and with bated breath--followed his steps and his +example. + +When they came to the place where the men crouched in ambush, Leif took +up a large stone and cast it high over their heads. So quietly was this +done that none even of his own party heard him move or saw the stone, +though they heard it fall with a _thud_ on the sand beyond. + +The Skraelingers heard it too, and stopped abruptly--each man on one +leg, with the other leg and his arms more or less extended, just as if +he had been suddenly petrified. So in truth he had been--with horror! + +To meet an open enemy, however powerful, would have been a pleasure +compared with that slow nervous advance in the midst of such dead +silence! As nothing followed the sound, however, the suspended legs +began to descend slowly again towards the ground, when Leif sneezed! + +If Greenland's icy mountains had become one monstrous polar bear, whose +powers of voice, frozen for prolonged ages, had at last found vent that +night in one concentrated roar, the noise could scarcely have excelled +that which instantly exploded from the Norsemen. + +The effect on the Skraelingers was almost miraculous. A bomb-shell +bursting in the midst of a hundred and fifty Kilkenny cats could not +have been more effective, and the result would certainly have borne some +marks of resemblance. Each hairy creature sprang nearly his own height +into the air, and wriggled while there, as if impatient to turn and fly +before reaching the ground. Earth regained, the more active among them +overshot and overturned the clumsy, whereby fifty or sixty were +instantly cast down, but these rose again like spring-jacks and fled, +followed by a roar of laughter from their foes, which, mingled as it was +with howls and yells, did infinitely more to appal the Skraelingers than +the most savage war-cry could have done. + +But they were followed by more than laughter. The Norsemen immediately +gave chase--still yelling and roaring as they ran, for Leif set the +example, and his followers remembered his threat. + +Karlsefin and Biarne kept one on each side of Leif, about a pace behind +him. + +"If they fight as well as they run," observed the former, "they must be +troublesome neighbours." + +"They are not bad fighters," replied Leif; "but sometimes they deem it +wise to run." + +"Not unlike to other people in that respect," said Biarne; "but it seems +to me that we might overhaul them if we were to push on." + +He shot up to Leif as he spoke, but the latter checked him. + +"Hold back, Biarne; I mean them no harm, and wish no bloodshed--only +they must have a good fright. The lads, no doubt, would like to run in +and make short work of them; but I intend to breathe the lads, which +will in the end do just as well as fighting to relieve their feelings.-- +Enough. It is ill talking and running." + +They were silent after that, and ran thus for fully an hour, at nearly +the top of their speed. But Leif sometimes checked his men, and +sometimes urged them on, so that they fancied he was chasing with full +intent to run the Skraelingers down. When the fugitives showed signs of +flagging, he uttered a tremendous roar, and his men echoed it, sending +such a thrill to the hearts of the Skraelingers that they seemed to +recover fresh wind and strength; then he pushed after them harder than +ever, and so managed that, without catching or killing one, he terrified +them almost out of their wits, and ran them nearly to death. + +At last they came to a place where there was an abrupt bend in the +mountains. Here Leif resolved to let them go. When they were pretty +near the cliff round which the path turned, he put on what, in modern +sporting phraseology, is termed a spurt, and came up so close with the +flying band that those in rear began to glance despairingly over their +shoulders. Suddenly Leif gave vent to a roar, into which he threw all +his remaining strength. It was taken up and prolonged by his men. The +horror-struck Skraelingers shrieked in reply, swept like a torrent round +the projecting cliff, and disappeared! + +Leif stopped at once, and held up his hand. All his men stopped short +also, and though they heard the Skraelingers still howling as they fled, +no one followed them any farther. Indeed, most of the Norsemen were +panting vehemently, and rather glad than otherwise to be allowed to +halt. + +There were, however, two young men among them--tall, strong-boned, and +thin, but with broad shoulders, and grave, earnest, though not exactly +handsome countenances--who appeared to be perfectly cool and in good +wind after their long run. Leif noticed them at once. + +"Yonder youths seem to think little of this sort of thing," he said to +Karlsefin. + +"You are right, Leif; it is mere child's play to them. These are the +two Scots--the famous runners--whom I was charged by King Olaf to +present to you. Why, these men, I'll engage to say, could overtake the +Skraelingers even yet, if they chose." + +"Say you so?" cried Leif. "Do they speak Norse?" + +"Yes; excellently well." + +"Their names?" + +"The one is Heika, the other Hake." + +"Ho! Hake and Heika, come hither," cried Leif, beckoning to the men, +and hastening round the point, where the Skraelingers could be seen +nearly a mile off, and still running as if all the evil spirits of the +North were after them. + +"See there, carls; think you that ye could overtake these rascals?" + +The Scots looked at each other, nodded, smiled, and said they thought +they could. + +"Do it, then. Let them see how you can use your legs, and give them a +shout as you draw near; but have a care: do them no hurt, and see that +they do no injury to you. Take no arms; your legs must suffice on this +occasion." + +The Scots looked again at each other, and laughed, as if they enjoyed +the joke; then they started off like a couple of deer at a pace which no +Norseman legs had ever before equalled, or even approached. + +Leif, Biarne, and the men gazed in speechless wonder, much to the +amusement of Karlsefin and Thorward, while Hake and Heika made straight +for the flying band and came up with them. They shouted wildly as they +drew near. The Skraelingers looked back, and seeing only two unarmed +men, stopped to receive them. + +"As the saying goes," remarked Biarne, "a stern chase is a long one; but +to-night proves the truth of that other saying, that there is no rule +without an exception." + +"What are they doing now?" cried Leif, laughing. "See--they are mad!" + +Truly it seemed as if they were; for, after separating and coursing +twice completely round the astonished natives, the two Scots performed a +species of war-dance before them, which had a sort of fling about it, +more easily conceived than described. In the middle of this they made a +dart at the group so sudden and swift that Hake managed to overturn +Flatface with a tremendous buffet, and Heika did the same to his second +in command with an energetic cuff. The Skraelingers were taken so +thoroughly by surprise that the Scots had sheered off and got out of +reach before a spear could be thrown. + +Of course a furious rush was made at them, but the hairy men might as +well have chased the wind. After tormenting and tantalising them a +little longer, the Scots returned at full speed to their friends, and +the Skraelingers, glad to be rid of them, hastened to seek the shelter +of the gloomy gorge from which they had originally issued, "like a wolf +on the fold." + + + +CHAPTER FOUR. + +IMPORTANT EVENTS TRANSPIRE, WHICH END IN A VOYAGE OF DISCOVERY. + +Some weeks afterwards, Karlsefin and Gudrid went down to walk together +on the sea-beach. It would appear that lovers were as fond of rambling +together in those olden times as they are in these modern days. It was +evening when they went to ramble thus--another evidence of similarity in +taste between the moderns and ancients. + +"Karlsefin," said Gudrid, stopping at the margin of the fiord, and +looking pensively towards the horizon, where golden clouds and air and +sea appeared to mingle harmoniously, "I wonder that you, with good ships +and many stout men and plenty of means, should choose to remain in this +barren spot, instead of searching out the famous Vinland and making a +settlement there." + +"This barren spot is very bright to me, Gudrid; I have no desire to +leave it yet a while. Since you and I were betrothed the ocean has lost +its attractions. Besides, would you have me set out on a voyage of +discovery at the beginning of winter." + +"Nay; but you do not even talk about going when spring comes round." + +"Because I have other things to talk of, Gudrid." + +"I fear me that you are a lazy man," returned the widow, with a smile, +"and will prove but a sorry husband. Just think," she added, with +sudden animation, "what a splendid country it must be; and what a +desirable change for all of us. Thick and leafy woods like those of old +Norway, instead of these rugged cliffs and snow-clad hills. Fields of +waving grass and rye, instead of moss-covered rocks and sandy soil. +Trees large enough to build houses and merchant-ships, instead of willow +bushes that are fit for nothing except to save our poor cattle from +starvation when the hay crop runs out; besides, longer sunshine in +winter and more genial warmth all the year round, instead of howling +winds and ice and snow. Truly I think our adopted home here has been +woefully misnamed." + +"And yet I love it, Gudrid, for I find the atmosphere genial and the +sunshine very bright." + +"Foolish man!" said Gudrid, with a little laugh. "And then," she added, +recurring to her theme, "there are grapes,--though, to be sure, I know +not what these are, never having tasted them. Biarne says they are very +good--do you think so too?" + +"They are magnificent," answered Karlsefin. "In southern lands, where +Tyrker comes from, they have a process whereby they can make a drink +from grapes, which maddens youth and quickens the pulse of age,-- +something like our own beer." + +"It does not please me to hear that," replied Gudrid gravely; "some of +our carls are too fond of beer. When old Heriulf was sick, a little of +it did him good, and when Eric the Red was in his last days he seemed to +gather a little strength and comfort from beer; but I never could +perceive that it ever did anything to young men except make them boast, +and talk nonsense, and look foolish,--or, what is worse, quarrel and +fight." + +"Right, Gudrid, right," said Karlsefin; "my opinion at least is the same +as yours, whether it be right or wrong. There is some reason in +applying heat to cold, but it seems to me unnecessary to add heat to +warmth, artificial strength to natural vigour, and it is dangerous +sometimes to add fuel to fire. I am glad you think as I think on this +point, for it is well that man and wife should be agreed in matters of +importance.--But to return to Vinland: I have been thinking much about +it since I came here, though saying little,--for it becomes a man to be +silent and circumspect in regard to unformed plans. My mind is to go +thither next spring, but only on one condition." + +"And what may that be?" asked Gudrid, looking up with a little surprise, +and some interest. + +"That you shall go with me, Gudrid; for which end it will be needful +that you and I should wed this winter." + +Gudrid could not help blushing a little and looking down, for Karlsefin, +despite his suavity, had a way with him, when thoroughly in earnest, +that was very impressive. She did not hesitate, however, but answered +with straightforward candour, "I will not say nay to that if my brother +Leif is willing." + +"It is settled then," replied Karlsefin decisively, "for Leif has +already told me that he is willing if you are, and so--" + +At this interesting point in the conversation they were interrupted by a +loud merry laugh not very far from them, and next moment little Olaf, +starting out from behind a bush, ran shouting into Gudrid's extended +arms. "Oh, what do you think?" he exclaimed, "aunt Freydissa has come +over from Heriulfness, and is in _such_ a rage because Biarne has told +her that Thorward has been making love to his cousin Astrid, and--" + +"Hush, boy," said Gudrid, covering his mouth with her hand, "you should +not talk so of your aunt. Besides, you know that it is an evil thing to +get the name of a tale-bearer." + +"I did not think it was tale-bearing," replied the lad, somewhat +abashed, "for it is no secret. Leif was there, and Astrid herself, and +all the house-carls in the hall must have heard her, for she spoke very +loud. And oh! you should have seen her give Thorward the cold shoulder +when he came in!" + +"Well, well, Olaf, hold your noisy tongue," said Gudrid, laughing, "and +come, tell me how would you like to go to Vinland?" + +"Like to go to Vinland!" echoed the boy, turning an ardent gaze full on +Karlsefin, "are you going there, sir? Will you take _me_?" + +Karlsefin laughed, and said, "You are too quick in jumping to +conclusions, child. Perhaps I may go there; but you have not yet +answered Gudrid's question--would you like to go?" + +"I would like it well," replied Olaf, with a bright look of hopeful +expectation that said far more than words could have expressed. + +Just then Thorward was seen approaching along the beach. His brows were +knit, his lips pursed, and his eyes fixed on the ground. He was so +engrossed with his thoughts that he did not perceive his friends. + +"Here he comes," said Karlsefin--"in the blues evidently, for he does +not see us." + +"We had better leave you to his company," said Gudrid, laughing; "a man +i' the blues is no pleasure to a woman.--Come, Olaf, you and I shall to +the dairy and see how the cattle fare." + +Olaf's capacity for imbibing milk and cream being unlimited, he gladly +accepted this invitation, and followed his aunt, while Karlsefin +advanced to meet his friend. + +"How now, Thorward, methinks an evil spirit doth possess thee!" + +"An evil spirit!" echoed Thorward, with a wrathful look; "nay, a legion +of evil spirits possess me! A plague on that fellow Biarne: he has +poisoned the ears of Freydissa with lies about that girl Astrid, to whom +I have never whispered a sweet word since we landed." + +"I trust you have not whispered sour words to her," said Karlsefin, +smiling. + +"And Freydissa, forsooth, gives me the cold shoulder," continued the +exasperated Norseman, not noticing the interruption, "as if I were +proved guilty by the mere assertion." + +"It is my advice to you, Thorward, that you return the compliment, and +give the cold shoulder to Freydissa. The woman has a shrewish temper; +she is a very vixen, and will lead you the life of a dog if you marry +her." + +"I had rather," said Thorward between his teeth, and stamping, "live a +dog's life with Freydissa than live the life of a king without her!" + +Karlsefin laughed at this, and Thorward, taking offence, said fierily, +and with some scorn--"Thinkest thou that because thy Gudrid is so +smooth-tongued she is an angel?" + +"That is what I am inclined to think," answered Karlsefin, with a smile +that still further exasperated his friend. + +"Perchance you may find yourself mistaken," said Thorward. "Since you +are so free with your warnings, let me remind you that although the +course of your courtship runs smooth, there is an old proverb--descended +from Odin himself, I believe--which assures us that _true_ love never +did so run." + +"Then I recall my words, Thorward, and congratulate you on your true +love--for assuredly your courtship runs in an uncommonly rugged course." + +At this Thorward turned on his heel and walked away in a towering +passion. + +It so happened that, on drawing near to Brattalid, he met Biarne coming +in the opposite direction. Nothing could have pleased him better--for +in the state of his mind at the time he would have turned savagely on +himself, had that been possible, in order to relieve his feelings. + +"So!" he cried, confronting Biarne, "well met! Tell me, Biarne, didst +thou poison the ears of Freydissa by telling her that I had been +courting thy cousin Astrid?" + +Biarne, who was not aware of the consequences of what he had said in +jest, felt inclined to laugh, but he checked himself and flushed +somewhat, not being accustomed to be addressed in such haughty tones. +Instead of explaining the matter, as he might otherwise have done, he +merely said, "I did." + +"Liar!" exclaimed Thorward fiercely, for he was a very resolute man when +roused; "go, tell her that the assertion was a falsehood. Go _now_, and +come back to tell me thou hast done it, else will I chop thy carcase +into mince-meat. Go; I will await thee here." + +He laid his hand upon his sword, but Biarne said quietly, "I go, sir;" +and, turning round, hastened up to the hamlet. + +Thorward could scarcely believe his eyes, for Biarne was fully as stout +as himself, and somewhat taller, besides having the look of a courageous +man. He had issued his imperative mandate more as a defiance and +challenge than anything else, so that he gazed after the retreating +Biarne with mingled feelings of surprise, contempt, and pity; but +surprise predominated. He had not long to wait, however, for in about +ten minutes Biarne returned. + +"Well, have you told her?" + +"I have," replied Biarne. + +"Hah!" exclaimed Thorward, very much perplexed, and not knowing what to +say next. + +"But, Thorward," said Biarne, after a momentary pause, "methinks that +you and I must fight now." + +"With all my heart," answered Thorward, much relieved, and again +grasping his sword. + +"Nay, not with such weapons," said Biarne, stepping up to him, "but with +the weapons of friendship." + +With that he bestowed such a hearty buffet on Thorward's left ear that +it turned the irascible man head over heels, and laid him at full length +on the sand. + +Thorward rose slowly, being somewhat stunned, with a confused impression +that there was something wrong with his head. Before he had quite +recovered, Biarne burst into a laugh and seized him by the hand. + +"Freydissa bids me tell you--" he said, and paused. + +The pause was intentional. He saw that Thorward was on the point of +snatching away his hand and returning the blow or drawing his sword; but +he restrained himself in order to hear Freydissa's message. + +"She bids me tell you," repeated Biarne, "that you are a goose." + +This was not calculated to soothe an angry man, but Thorward reflected +that the epithet was figurative, and bore a peculiar signification when +uttered by a woman; he therefore continued his self-restraint and waited +for more. + +"She also said," added Biarne, "that she never for a moment believed my +statement (which, by the way, was only made in jest), and that she +thinks you deserve a good buffet on the ear for taking the thing up so +hotly. Agreeing with her entirely in this, I have fulfilled her wish +and given you your deserts. Moreover, she expects you to accompany her +to Heriulfness to-night. So now," said Biarne, releasing Thorward's +hand and touching his sword-hilt, "if you are still inclined--." + +"Well, well," said Thorward, whose visage, while his friend was +speaking, had undergone a series of contortions indicative of a wild +conflict of feelings in his breast, "well, well, I am a goose, and +deserved the buffet. After all, I did call you a liar, so we are quits, +Biarne--tit for tat. Come, let us shake hands and go up to Leif's +cottage. You said Freydissa was there, I think." + +During that winter Karlsefin married Gudrid and Thorward Freydissa, and, +in the following spring, they embarked in Karlsefin's ship--with a large +party of men, women, children, and cattle--and set sail for Vinland. + + + +CHAPTER FIVE. + +FREYDISSA SHOWS HER TEMPER AND A WHALE CHECKS IT--POETICAL AND OTHER +TOUCHES. + +The expedition which now set out for Vinland was on a much larger scale +than any of the expeditions which had preceded it. Biarne and Leif had +acted the part of discoverers only--not colonisers--and although +previous parties had passed several winters in Vinland, they had not +intended to take up a permanent abode there--as was plain from the fact +that they brought neither women nor flocks nor herds with them. +Karlsefin, on the contrary, went forth fully equipped for colonisation. + +His ship, as we have said, was a large one, with a decked poop and +forecastle, fitted to brave the most tempestuous weather--at least as +well fitted to do so as were the ships of Columbus--and capable of +accommodating more than a hundred people. He took sixty men with him +and five women, besides his own wife and Thorward's. Thorward himself, +and Biarne, accompanied the expedition, and also Olaf--to his +inexpressible joy, but Leif preferred to remain at home, and promised to +take good care of Thorward's ship, which was left behind. Astrid was +one of the five women who went with this expedition; the other four were +Gunhild, Thora, Sigrid, and Bertha. Gunhild and Sigrid were wives to +two of Biarne's men. Thora was handmaiden to Gudrid; Bertha handmaid to +Freydissa. Of all the women Bertha was the sweetest and most beautiful, +and she was also very modest and good-tempered, which was a fortunate +circumstance, because her mistress Freydissa had temper enough, as +Biarne used to remark, for a dozen women. Biarne was fond of teasing +Freydissa; but she liked Biarne, and sometimes took his pleasantries +well--sometimes ill. + +It was intended that, when the colony was fairly established, the ship +should be sent back to Greenland to fetch more of the men's wives and +children. + +A number of cattle, horses, and sheep were also carried on this occasion +to Vinland. These were stowed in the waist or middle of the vessel, +between the benches where the rowers sat when at work. The rowers did +not labour much at sea, as the vessel was at most times able to advance +under sail. During calms, however, and when going into creeks, or on +landing--also in doubling capes when the wind was not suitable--the oars +were of the greatest value. Karlsefin and the principal people slept +under the high poop. A number of the men slept under the forecastle, +and the rest lay in the waist near the cattle--sheltered from the +weather by tents or awnings which were called tilts. + +It may perhaps surprise some readers to learn that men could venture in +such vessels to cross the northern seas from Norway to Iceland, and +thence to Greenland; but it is not so surprising when we consider the +small size of the vessels in which Columbus afterwards crossed the +Atlantic in safety, and when we reflect that those Norsemen had been +long accustomed, in such vessels, to traverse the ocean around the +coasts of Europe in all directions--round the shores of Britain, up the +Baltic, away to the Faroe Islands, and up the Mediterranean even as far +as the Black Sea. In short, the Norsemen of old were magnificent +seamen, and there can be no question that much of the ultimate success +of Britain on the sea is due, not only to our insular position, but also +to the insufficiently appreciated fact that the blood of the hardy and +adventurous vikings of Norway still flows in our veins. + +It was a splendid spring morning when Karlsefin hoisted his +white-and-blue sail, and dropped down Ericsfiord with a favouring +breeze, while Leif and his people stood on the stone jetty at Brattalid, +and waved hats and shawls to their departing friends. + +For Olaf, Thora, and Bertha it was a first voyage, and as the vessel +gradually left the land behind, the latter stood at the stern gazing +wistfully towards the shore, while tears flowed from her pretty blue +eyes and chased each other over her fair round face--for Bertha left an +old father behind her in Greenland. + +"Don't cry, Bertha," said Olaf, putting his fat little hand softly into +that of the young girl. + +"Oh! I shall perhaps _never_ see him again," cried Bertha, with another +burst of tears. + +"Yes, you will," said Olaf, cheerily. "You know that when we get +comfortably settled in Vinland we shall send the ship back for your +father, and mine too, and for everybody in Ericsfiord and Heriulfness. +Why, we're going to forsake Greenland altogether and never go back to it +any more. Oh! I am _so_ glad." + +"I wish, I _wish_ I had never come," said Bertha, with a renewed flow of +tears, for Olaf's consolations were thrown away on her. + +It chanced that Freydissa came at that moment upon the poop, where +Karlsefin stood at the helm, and Gudrid with some others were still +gazing at the distant shore. + +Freydissa was one of those women who appear to have been born women by +mistake--who are always chafing at their unfortunate fate, and +endeavouring to emulate--even to overwhelm--men; in which latter effort +they are too frequently successful. She was a tall elegant woman of +about thirty years of age, with a decidedly handsome face, though +somewhat sharp of feature. She possessed a powerful will, a shrill +voice and a vigorous frame, and was afflicted with a short, violent +temper. She was decidedly a masculine woman. We know not which is the +more disagreeable of the two--a masculine woman or an effeminate man. + +But perhaps the most prominent feature in her character was her +volubility when enraged,--the copiousness of her vocabulary and the +tremendous force with which she shot forth her ideas and abuse in short +abrupt sentences. + +Now, if there was one thing more than another that roused the ire of +Freydissa, it was the exhibition of feminine weakness in the shape of +tears. She appeared to think that the credit of her sex in reference to +firmness and self-command was compromised by such weakness. She herself +never wept by any chance, and she was always enraged when she saw any +other woman relieve her feelings in that way. When, therefore, she came +on deck and found her own handmaid with her pretty little face swelled, +or, as she expressed it, "begrutten," and heard her express a wish that +she had never left home, she lost command of herself--a loss that she +always found it easy to come by--and, seizing Bertha by the shoulder, +ordered her down into the cabin instantly. + +Bertha sobbingly obeyed, and Freydissa followed. "Don't be hard on her, +poor soul," murmured Thorward. + +Foolish fellow! How difficult it is for man--ancient or modern--to +learn when to hold his tongue! That suggestion would have fixed +Freydissa's determination if it had not been fixed before, and poor +Bertha would certainly have received "a hearing," or a "blowing-up," or +a "setting down," such as she had not enjoyed since the date of +Freydissa's marriage, had it not been for the fortunate circumstance +that a whale took it into its great thick head to come up, just then, +and spout magnificently quite close to the vessel. + +The sight was received with a shout by the men, a shriller shout by the +women, and a screech of surprise and delight by little Olaf, who would +certainly have gone over the side in his eagerness, had not Biarne +caught him by the skirts of his tunic. + +This incident happily diverted the course of Freydissa's thoughts. +Curiosity overcame indignation, and Bertha was reprieved for the time +being. Both mistress and maid hastened to the side of the ship; the +anger of the one evaporated and the tears of the other dried up when +they saw the whale rise not more than a hundred yards from the ship. It +continued to do this for a considerable time, sometimes appearing on one +side, sometimes on the other; now at the stern, anon at the bow. In +short it seemed as if the whale had taken the ship for a companion, and +were anxious to make its acquaintance. At last it went down and +remained under water so long that the voyagers began to think it had +left them, when Olaf suddenly gave a shriek of delight and +surprise:--"Oh! Oh! OH!" he exclaimed, looking and pointing straight +down into the water, "here is the whale--right under the ship!" + +And sure enough there it was, swimming slowly under the vessel, not two +fathoms below the keel--its immense bulk being impressively visible, +owing to the position of the observers, and its round eyes staring as if +in astonishment at the strange creature above. [The author has seen a +whale in precisely similar circumstances in a Norwegian fiord.] It +expressed this astonishment, or whatever feeling it might be, by coming +up suddenly to the surface, thrusting its big blunt head, like the bow +of a boat, out of the sea, and spouting forth a column of water and +spray with a deep snort or snore--to the great admiration of the whole +ship's crew, for, although most of the men were familiar enough with +whales, alive and dead, they had never, in all probability, seen one in +such circumstances before. + +Four or five times did the whale dive under the vessel in this fashion, +and then it sheered off with a contemptuous flourish of its tail, as if +disgusted with the stolid unsociable character of the ship, which seen +from a submarine point of view must have looked uncommonly like a whale, +and quite as big! + +This episode, occurring so early in the voyage, and trifling though it +was, tended to create in the minds of all--especially of the women and +the younger people--a feeling of interest in the ocean, and an +expectation of coming adventure, which, though not well defined, was +slightly exciting and agreeable. Bertha, in particular, was very +grateful to that whale, for it had not only diverted her thoughts a +little from home-leaving and given her something new to think and talk +about, but it had saved her from Freydissa and a severe scold. + +The first night at sea was fine, with bright moonlight, and a soft wind +on the quarter that carried them pleasantly over the rippling sea, and +everything was so tranquil and captivating that no one felt inclined to +go to rest. Karlsefin sat beside the helm, guiding the ship and telling +sagas to the group of friends who stood, sat, or reclined on the deck +and against the bulwarks of the high poop. He repeated long pieces of +poetry, descriptive of the battles and adventures of their viking +forefathers, and also gave them occasional pieces of his own composing, +in reference to surrounding circumstances and the enterprise in which +they were then embarked,--for Karlsefin was himself a skald or poet, +although he pretended not to great attainments in that way. + +From where they sat the party on the poop could see that the men on the +high forecastle were similarly engaged, for they had gathered together +in a group, and their heads were laid together as if listening intently +to one of their number who sat in the centre of the circle. Below, in +the waist of the ship, some humorous character appeared to be holding +his mates enchained, for long periods of comparative silence--in which +could be heard the monotonous tones of a single voice mingled with +occasional soft lowing from the cattle--were suddenly broken by bursts +of uproarious laughter, which, however, quickly subsided again, leaving +prominent the occasional lowing and the prolonged monotone. Everything +in and around the ship, that night, breathed of harmony and peace-- +though there was little knowledge among them of Him who is the Prince of +Peace. We say "little" knowledge, because Christianity had only just +begun to dawn among the Norsemen at that time, and there were some on +board of that discovery-ship who were tinged with the first rays of that +sweet light which, in the person of the Son of God, was sent to lighten +the world and to shine more and more unto the perfect day. + +"Now," said Karlsefin, at the conclusion of one of his stories, "that is +the saga of Halfdan the Black--at least it is part of his saga; but, +friends, it seems to me that we must begin a saga of our own, for it is +evident that if we are successful in this venture we shall have +something to relate when we return to Greenland, and we must all learn +to tell our saga in the same words, for that is the only way in which +_truth_ can be handed down to future generations, seeing that when men +are careless in learning the truth they are apt to distort it so that +honest men are led into telling lies unwittingly. They say that the +nations of the south have invented a process whereby with a +sharp-pointed tool they fashion marks on skins to represent words, so +that once put down in this way a saga never changes. Would that we +Norsemen understood that process!" said Karlsefin meditatively. + +"It seems to me," said Biarne, who reclined on the deck, leaning against +the weather-bulwarks and running his fingers playfully through Olaf's +fair curls, "It seems to me that it were better to bestow the craft of +the skald on the record of our voyage, for then the measure and the +rhyme would chain men to the words, and so to the truth--that is, +supposing they get truth to start with! Come, Karlsefin, begin our +voyage for us." + +All present seemed to agree to that proposal, and urged Karlsefin to +begin at once. + +The skipper--for such indeed was his position in the ship--though a +modest man, was by no means bashful, therefore, after looking round upon +the moonlit sea for a few minutes, he began as follows:-- + + "When western waves were all unknown, + And western fields were all unsown, + When Iceland was the outmost bound + That roving viking-keels had found-- + Gunbiorn then--Ulf Kraka's son-- + Still farther west was forced to run + By furious gales, and there saw land + Stretching abroad on either hand. + Eric of Iceland, called the Red, + Heard of the news and straightway said-- + `This western land I'll go and see; + Three summers hence look out for me.' + He went; he landed; stayed awhile, + And wintered first on `Eric's Isle;' + Then searched the coast both far and wide, + Then back to Iceland o'er the tide. + `A wondrous land is this,' said he, + And called it Greenland of the sea. + Twenty and five great ships sailed west + To claim this gem on Ocean's breast. + With man and woman, horn and hoof, + And bigging for the homestead roof. + Some turned back--in heart but mice-- + Some sank amid the Northern ice. + Half reached the land, in much distress, + At Ericsfiord and Heriulfness. + Next, Biarne--Heriulf's doughty son-- + Sought to trace out the aged one. [His father.] + From Norway sailed, but missed his mark; + Passed snow-topped Greenland in the dark; + And came then to a new-found land-- + But did not touch the tempting strand; + For winter winds oppressed him sore + And kept him from his father's shore. + Then Leif, the son of Eric, rose + And straightway off to Biarne goes, + Buys up his ship, takes all his men, + Fares forth to seek that land again. + Leif found the land; discovered more, + And spent a winter on the shore; + Cut trees and grain to load the ship, + And pay them for the lengthened trip. + Named `Hella-land' and `Markland' too, + And saw an island sweet with dew! + And grapes in great abundance found, + So named it Vinland all around. + But after that forsook the shore, + And north again for Greenland bore. + And now--we cross the moonlit seas + To search this land of grapes and trees + Biarne, Thorward, Karlsefin-- + Go forth this better land to win, + With men and cattle not a few, + And household gear and weapons too; + And, best of all, with women dear, + To comfort, counsel, check, and cheer. + Thus far we've made a prosp'rous way, + God speed us onward every day!" + +They all agreed that this was a true account of the discovery of Vinland +and of their own expedition as far as it had gone, though Gudrid said it +was short, and Freydissa was of opinion that there was very little in +it. + +"But hold!" exclaimed Biarne, suddenly raising himself on his elbows; +"Karlsefin, you are but a sorry skald after all." + +"How so?" asked the skipper. + +"Why, because you have made no mention of the chief part of our voyage." + +"And pray what may that be?" + +"Stay, I too am a skald; I will tell you." + +Biarne, whose poetical powers were not of the highest type, here +stretched forth his hand and said:-- + + "When Biarne, Thorward, Karlsefin, + This famous voyage did begin, + They stood upon the deck one night, + And there beheld a moving sight. + It made the very men grow pale, + Their shudder almost rent the sail! + For lo! they saw a mighty whale! + It drew a shriek from Olaf brave, + Then plunged beneath the briny wave, + And, while the women loudly shouted, + Up came its blundering nose and spouted. + Then underneath our keel it went, + And glared with savage fury pent, + And round about the ship it swum, + Striking each man and woman dumb. + Stay--one there was who found a tongue + And still retained her strength of lung. + Freydissa, beauteous matron bold, + Resolved to give that whale a scold! + But little cared that monster fish + To gratify Freydissa's wish; + He shook his tail, that naughty whale, + And flourished it like any flail, + And, ho! for Vinland he made sail!" + +"Now, friends, was not that a great omission on the part of Karlsefin?" + +"If the whale had brought his flail down on your pate it would have +served you right, Biarne," said Freydissa, flushing, yet smiling in +spite of herself. + +"I think it is capital," cried Olaf, clapping his hands--"quite as good +as the other poem." + +Some agreed with Olaf, and some thought that it was not quite in keeping +with Karlsefin's composition, but, after much debate, it was finally +ruled that it should be added thereto as part and parcel of the great +Vinland poem. Hence it appears in this chronicle, and forms an +interesting instance of the way in which men, for the sake of humorous +effect, mingle little pieces of fiction with veritable history. + +By the time this important matter was settled it was getting so late +that even the most enthusiastic admirer among them of moonlight on a +calm sea became irresistibly desirous of going to sleep. They therefore +broke up for the night; the women retired to their cabin, and none were +left on deck except the steersman and the watch. Long before this the +saga-tellers on the forecastle had retired; the monotone and the soft +lowing of the cattle had ceased; man and beast had sought and found +repose, and nothing was heard save the ripple of the water on the ship's +sides as she glided slowly but steadily over the sleeping sea. + + + +CHAPTER SIX. + +CHANGES IN WIND AND WEATHER PRODUCE CHANGES IN TEMPER AND FEELING--LAND +DISCOVERED, AND FREYDISSA BECOMES INQUISITIVE. + +There are few things that impress one more at sea than the rapidity of +the transitions which frequently take place in the aspect and the +condition of vessel, sea, and sky. At one time all may be profoundly +tranquil on board; then, perhaps, the necessity for going "about ship" +arises, and all is bustle; ropes rattle, blocks clatter and chirp, yards +creak, and seamen's feet stamp on the deck, while their voices aid their +hands in the hauling of ropes; and soon all is quiet as before. Or, +perhaps, the transition is effected by a squall, and it becomes more +thorough and lasting. One moment everything in nature is hushed under +the influence of what is appropriately enough termed a "dead calm." In +a few seconds a cloud-bank appears on the horizon and one or two +cats-paws are seen shooting over the water. A few minutes more and the +sky is clouded, the glassy sea is ruffled, the pleasant light sinks into +a dull leaden grey, the wind whistles over the ocean, and we are--as far +as feeling is concerned--transported into another, but by no means a +better, world. + +Thus it was with our adventurers. The beautiful night merged into a +"dirty" morning, the calm into a breeze so stiff as to be almost a gale, +and when Olaf came out of the cabin, holding tight to the +weather-bulwarks to prevent himself from being thrown into the +lee-scuppers, his inexperienced heart sank within him at the dreary +prospect of the grey sky and the black heaving sea. + +But young Olaf came of a hardy seafaring race. He kept his feelings to +himself; and staggered toward Karlsefin, who still stood at his post. +Olaf thought he had been there all night, but the truth was that he had +been relieved by Biarne, had taken a short nap, and returned to the +helm. + +Karlsefin was now clad in a rough-weather suit. He wore a pair of +untanned sealskin boots and a cap of the same material, that bore a +strong resemblance in shape and colour to the sou'-westers of the +present day, and his rough heavy coat, closed up to the chin, was in +texture and form not unlike to the pilot-cloth jackets of modern +seamen--only it had tags and loops instead of buttons and button-holes. +With his legs wide apart, he stood at the tiller, round which there was +a single turn of a rope from the weather-bulwarks to steady it and +himself. The boy was clad in miniature costume of much the same cut and +kind, and proud was he to stagger about the deck with his little legs +ridiculously wide apart, in imitation of Thorward and Biarne, both of +whom were there, and had, he observed, a tendency to straddle. + +"Come hither, Olaf; and learn a little seamanship," said Karlsefin, with +a good-humoured smile. + +Olaf said he would be glad to do that, and made a run towards the +tiller, but a heavy plunge of the ship caused him to sheer off in quite +a different direction, and another lurch would have sent him +head-foremost against the lee-bulwarks had not Biarne, with a laugh, +caught him by the nape of the neck and set him against Karlsefin's left +leg, to which he clung with remarkable tenacity. + +"Ay, hold on tight to that, boy," said the leg's owner, "and you'll be +safe. A few days will put you on your sea-legs, lad, and then you won't +want to hold on." + +"Always hold your head up, Olaf, when you move about aboard ship in +rough weather," said Biarne, pausing a minute in his perambulation of +the deck to give the advice, "and look overboard, or up, or away at the +horizon--anywhere except at your feet. You can't see how the ship's +going to roll, you know, if you keep looking down at the deck." + +Olaf acted on this advice at once, and then began to question Karlsefin +in regard to many nautical matters which it is not necessary to set down +here, while Biarne and Thorward leaned on the bulwarks and looked +somewhat anxiously to windward. + +Already two reefs of the huge sail had been taken in, and Biarne now +suggested that it would be wise to take in another. + +"Let it be done," said Karlsefin. + +Thorward ordered the men to reef; and the head of the ship was brought +up to the wind so as to empty the sail while this was being done. + +Before it was quite accomplished some of the women had assembled on the +poop. + +"This is not pleasant weather," observed Gudrid, as she stood holding on +to her husband. + +"We must not expect to have it all plain sailing in these seas," replied +Karlsefin; "but the dark days will make the bright ones seem all the +brighter." + +Gudrid smiled languidly at this, but made no reply. + +Freydissa, who scorned to receive help from man, had vigorously laid +hold of the bulwarks and gradually worked her way aft. She appeared to +be very much out of sorts--as indeed all the women were. There was a +greenish colour about the parts of their cheeks that ought to have been +rosy, and a whitey blue or frosted appearance at the points of their +noses, which damaged the beauty of the prettiest among them. Freydissa +became positively plain--and she knew it, which did not improve her +temper. Astrid, though fair and exceedingly pretty by nature, had +become alarmingly white; and Thora, who was dark, had become painfully +yellow. Poor Bertha, too, had a washed-out appearance, though nothing +in the way of lost colour or otherwise could in the least detract from +the innocent sweetness of her countenance. She did not absolutely weep, +but, being cold, sick, and in a state of utter wretchedness, she had +fallen into a condition of chronic whimpering, which exceedingly +exasperated Freydissa. Bertha was one of those girls who are regarded +by _some_ of their own sex with a species of mild contempt, but who are +nevertheless looked upon with much tenderness by men, which perhaps +makes up to them for this to some extent. Gudrid was the least affected +among them all by that dire malady, which appears to have been as +virulent in the tenth as it is in the nineteenth century, and must have +come in with the Flood, if not before it. + +"Why don't you go below," said Freydissa testily, "instead of shivering +up here?" + +"I get so sick below," answered Bertha, endeavouring to brighten up, +"that I thought it better to try what fresh air would do for me." + +"H'm! it doesn't appear to do much for you," retorted Freydissa. + +As she spoke a little spray broke over the side of the ship and fell on +the deck near them. Karlsefin had great difficulty in preventing this, +for a short cross-sea was running, and it was only by dint of extremely +good and careful steering that he kept the poop-deck dry. In a few +minutes a little more spray flew inboard, and some of it striking Bertha +on the head ran down her shoulders. Karlsefin was much grieved at this, +but Freydissa laughed heartily. + +Instead of making Bertha worse, however, the shock had the effect of +doing her a little good, and she laughed in a half-pitiful way as she +ran down below to dry herself. + +"It serves you right," cried Freydissa as she passed; "I wish you had +got more of it." + +Now Karlsefin was a man whose temper was not easily affected, and he +seldom or never took offence at anything done or said to himself; but +the unkindness of Freydissa's speech to poor Bertha nettled him greatly. + +"Get behind me, Gudrid," he said quickly. + +Gudrid obeyed, wondering at the stern order, and Karlsefin gave a push +to the tiller with his leg. Next moment a heavy sea struck the side of +the ship, burst over the bulwarks, completely overwhelmed Freydissa, and +swept the deck fore and aft--wetting every one more or less except +Gudrid, who had been almost completely sheltered behind her husband. A +sail which had been spread over the waist of the ship prevented much +damage being done to the men, and of course all the water that fell on +the forecastle and poop ran out at the scupper-holes. + +This unexpected shower-bath at once cleared the poop of the women. +Fortunately Thora and Astrid had been standing to leeward of Biarne and +Thorward, and had received comparatively little of the shower, but +Freydissa went below with streaming hair and garments,--as Biarne +remarked,--like an elderly mermaid! + +"You must have been asleep when that happened," said Thorward to +Karlsefin in surprise. + +"He must have been sleeping, then, with his eyes open," said Biarne, +with an amused look. + +Karlsefin gazed sternly towards the ship's head, and appeared to be +attending with great care to the helm, but there was a slight twinkle in +his eye as he said--"Well, it _was_ my intention to wash the decks a +little, but more spray came inboard than I counted on. 'Tis as +dangerous to play with water, sometimes, as with fire." + +"There is truth in that," said Biarne, laughing; "and I fear that this +time water will be found to have kindled fire, for when Freydissa went +below she looked like the smoking mountain of Iceland--as if there was +something hot inside and about to boil up." + +Karlsefin smiled, but made no reply, for the gale was increasing every +moment, and the management of the ship soon required the earnest +attention of all the seamen on board. + +Fortunately it was a short-lived gale. When it had passed away and the +sea had returned to something like its former quiescent state, and the +sun had burst through and dissipated the grey clouds, our female +voyagers returned to the deck and to their wonted condition of health. + +Soon after that they came in sight of land. + +"Now, Biarne," said Karlsefin, after the look-out on the forecastle had +shouted "Land ho!" "come, give me your opinion of this new land that we +have made.--Do you mind the helm, Thorward, while we go to the ship's +head." + +The two went forward, and on the forecastle they found Olaf; flushed +with excitement, and looking as if something had annoyed him. + +"Ho, Olaf! you're not sorry to see land, are you?" said Biarne. + +"Sorry! no, not I; but I'm sorry to be cheated of my due." + +"How so, boy?" + +"Why, _I_ discovered the land first, and that fellow there," pointing to +the man on look-out, "shouted before me." + +"But why did you not shout before _him_?" asked Karlsefin, as he and +Biarne surveyed the distant land with keen interest. + +"Just because he took me unawares," replied the boy indignantly. "When +I saw it I did not wish to be hasty. It might have turned out to be a +cloud, or a fog-bank, and I might have given a false alarm; so I pointed +it out to him, and asked what he thought; but instead of answering me he +gaped with his ugly mouth and shouted `Land ho!' I could have kicked +him." + +"Nay, Olaf; that is not well said," observed Karlsefin, very gravely; +"if you _could_ have kicked him you _would_ have kicked him. Why did +you not do it?" + +"Because he is too big for me," answered the boy promptly. + +"So, then, thy courage is only sufficient to make thee kick those who +are small enough," returned Karlsefin, with a frown. "Perhaps if you +were as big as he you would be afraid to kick him." + +"That would not I," retorted Olaf. + +"It is easy for you to say that, boy, when you know that he _would_ not +strike you now, and that there is small chance of your meeting again +after you have grown up to prove the truth of what you say. It is mere +boasting, Olaf; and, mark me, you will never be a brave man if you begin +by being a boastful boy. A truly brave and modest man--for modesty and +bravery are wont to consort together--never says he will strike until he +sees it to be right to do so. Sometimes he does not even go the length +of speaking at all, but, in any case, having made up his mind to strike, +he strikes at once, without more ado, let the consequences be what they +will. But in my opinion it is best not to strike at all. Do you know, +Olaf; my boy, some of the bravest men I ever knew have never struck a +blow since they came to manhood, excepting, of course, when compelled to +do so in battle; and _then_ they struck such blows as made shields and +helmets fly, and strewed the plain with their foes." + +"Did these men never boast when they were boys?" asked Olaf; with a +troubled air. + +Karlsefin relaxed into a smile as he said, "Only when they were very +little boys, and very foolish; but they soon came to see how +contemptible it is to threaten and not perform; so they gave up +threatening, and when performance came to be necessary they found that +threats were needless. Now, Olaf, I want you to be a bold, brave man, +and I must lull you through the foolish boasting period as quickly as +possible, therefore I tell you these things. Think on them, my boy." + +Olaf was evidently much relieved by the concluding remarks. While +Karlsefin was speaking he had felt ashamed of himself; because he was +filled with admiration of the magnificent skipper, and wanted to stand +well in his opinion. It was therefore no small comfort to find that his +boasting had been set down to his foolishness, and that there was good +reason to hope he might ultimately grow out of it. + +But Olaf had much more of the true metal in him than he himself was +aware of. Without saying a word about it, he resolved not to wait for +the result of this slow process of growth, but to jump, vault, or fly +out of the boastful period of life, by hook or by crook, and that +without delay. And he succeeded! Not all at once, of course. He had +many a slip; but he persevered, and finally got out of it much sooner +than would have been the case if he had not taken any trouble to think +about the matter, or to _try_. + +Meanwhile, however, he looked somewhat crestfallen. This being observed +by the look-out, that worthy was prompted to say--"I'm sure, Olaf; you +are welcome to kick me if that will comfort you, but there is no +occasion to do so, because I claim not the honour of first _seeing_ the +land--and if I had known the state of your mind I would willingly have +let you give the hail." + +"You may have been first to discover it at this time, Olaf;" said +Biarne, turning round after he had made up his mind about it, "and no +doubt you were, since the look-out admits it; nevertheless this is the +land that I discovered twenty years ago. But we shall make it out more +certainly in an hour or two if this breeze holds." + +The breeze did hold, and soon they were close under the land. + +"Now am I quite certain of it," said Biarne, as he stood on the poop, +surrounded by all his friends, who gazed eagerly at the shore, to which +they had approached so close that the rocks and bushes were distinctly +visible; "that is the very same land which I saw before." + +"What, Vinland?" asked Freydissa. + +"Nay, not Vinland. Are you so eager to get at the grapes that ye think +the first land we meet is Vinland?" + +"A truce to your jesting, Biarne; what land is it?" + +"It is the land I saw _last_ when leaving this coast in search of +Greenland, so that it seems not unnatural to find it _first_ on coming +back to it. Leif; on his voyage, went on shore here. He named it +Helloland, which, methinks, was a fitting name, for it is, as you see, a +naked land of rocks." + +"Now, then," said Karlsefin, "lower the sail, heave out the anchor, and +let two men cast loose the little boat. Some of us will land and see +what we shall see; for it must not be said of us, Biarne, as it was +unfairly said of you, that we took no interest in these new regions." + +The little boat was got ready. The Scottish brothers, Hake and Heika, +were appointed to row. Karlsefin, Biarne, Thorward, Gudrid, Freydissa, +and Olaf embarked and proceeded to the shore. + +This land, on which the party soon stood, was not of an inviting aspect. +It was sterile, naked, and very rocky, as Biarne had described it, and +not a blade of grass was to be seen. There was a range of high +snow-capped mountains in the interior, and all the way from the coast up +to these mountains the land was covered with snow. In truth, a more +forbidding spot could not easily have been found, even in Greenland. + +"It seems to me," said Freydissa, "that your new land is but a sorry +place--worse than that we have left. I wonder at your landing here. It +is plain that men see with flushed eyes when they look upon their own +discoveries. Cold comfort is all we shall get in this place. I counsel +that we return on board immediately." + +"You are too hasty, sister," said Gudrid. + +"Oh! of course, always too hasty," retorted Freydissa sharply. + +"And somewhat too bitter," growled Thorward, with a frown. + +Thorward was not an ill-natured man, but his wife's sharp temper tried +him a good deal. + +"Your interrupting me before you heard all I had to say _proves_ you to +be too hasty, sister," said Gudrid, with a playful laugh. "I was about +to add that it seems we have come here rather early in the spring. Who +knows but the land may wear a prettier dress when the mantle of winter +is gone? Even Greenland looks green and bright in summer." + +"Not in those places where the snow lies _all_ the summer," objected +Olaf. + +"That's right, Olaf;" said Biarne; "stick up for your sweet aunt. She +often takes a stick up for you, lad, and deserves your gratitude.--But +come, let's scatter and survey the land, for, be it good or bad, we must +know what it is, and carry with us some report such as Karlsefin may +weave into his rhymes." + +"This land would be more suitable for your rhymes, Biarne, than for +mine," said Karlsefin, as they started off together, "because it is most +dismal." + +After that the whole party scattered. The three leaders ascended the +nearest heights in different directions, and Gudrid with Olaf went +searching among the rocks and pools to ascertain what sort of creatures +were to be found there, while Freydissa sat down and sulked upon a rock. +She soon grew tired of sulking, however, and, looking about her, +observed the brothers, who had been left in charge of the boat, standing +as if engaged in earnest conversation. + +She had not before this paid much attention to these brothers, and was +somewhat struck with their appearance, for, as we have said before, they +were good specimens of men. Hake, the younger of the two, had +close-curling auburn hair, and bright blue eyes. His features were not +exactly handsome, but the expression of his countenance was so winning +that people were irresistibly attracted by it. The elder brother, +Heika, was very like him, but not so attractive in his appearance. Both +were fully six feet high, and though thin, as has been said, their limbs +were beautifully moulded, and they possessed much greater strength than +most people gave them credit for. In aspect, thought, and conversation, +they were naturally grave, and very earnest; nevertheless, they could be +easily roused to mirth. + +Going up to them, Freydissa said--"Ye seem to have earnest talk +together." + +"We have," answered Heika. "Our talk is about home." + +"I am told that your home is in the Scottish land," said Freydissa. + +"It is," answered Hake, with a kindling eye. + +"How come you to be so far from home?" asked Freydissa. + +"We were taken prisoners two years ago by vikings from Norway, when +visiting our father in a village near the Forth fiord." + +"How did that happen? Come, tell me the story; but, first, who is your +father?" + +"He is an earl of Scotland," said Heika. + +"Ha! and I suppose ye think a Scottish earl is better than a Norse +king?" + +Heika smiled as he replied, "I have never thought of making a comparison +between them." + +"Well--how were you taken?" + +"We were, as I have said, on a visit to our father, who dwelt sometimes +in a small village on the shores of the Forth, for the sake of bathing +in the sea--for he is sickly. One night, while we slept, a Norse +long-ship came to land. Those who should have been watching slumbered. +The Norsemen surrounded my father's house without awaking anyone, and, +entering by a window which had not been securely fastened, overpowered +Hake and me before we knew where we were. We struggled hard, but what +could two unarmed men do among fifty? The noise we made, however, +roused the village and prevented the vikings from discovering our +father's room, which was on the upper floor. They had to fight their +way back to the ship, and lost many men on the road, but they succeeded +in carrying us two on board, bound with cords. They took us over the +sea to Norway. There we became slaves to King Olaf Tryggvisson, by +whom, as you know, we were sent to Leif Ericsson." + +"No doubt ye think," said Freydissa, "that if you had not been caught +sleeping ye would have given the Norsemen some trouble to secure you." + +They both laughed at this. + +"We have had some thoughts of that kind," said Hake brightly, "but truly +we did give them some trouble even as it was." + +"I knew it," cried the dame rather sharply; "the conceit of you men goes +beyond all bounds! Ye always boast of what valiant deeds you _would_ +have done _if_ something or other had been in your favour." + +"We made no boast," replied Heika gravely. + +"If you did not speak it, ye thought it, I doubt not.--But, tell me, is +your land as good a land as Norway?" + +"We love it better," replied Heika. + +"But _is_ it better?" asked Freydissa. + +"We would rather dwell in it than in Norway," said Hake. + +"We hope not. But we would prefer to be in our own land," replied the +elder brother, sadly, "for there is no place like home." + +At this point Karlsefin and the rest of the party came back to the shore +and put an end to the conversation. Returning on board they drew up the +anchor, hoisted sail, and again put out to sea. + + + +CHAPTER SEVEN. + +SONGS AND SAGAS--VINLAND AT LAST! + +In days of old, just as in modern times, tars, when at sea, were wont to +assemble on the "fo'c'sle," or forecastle, and spin yarns--as we have +seen--when the weather was fine and their work was done. + +One sunny afternoon, on the forecastle of Karlsefin's ship--which, by +the way, was called "_The Snake_," and had a snake's head and neck for a +figure-head--there was assembled a group of seamen, among whom were +Tyrker the Turk, one of Thorward's men named Swend, who was very stout +and heavy, and one of Karlsefin's men called Krake, who was a wild +jocular man with a peculiar twang in his speech, the result of having +been long a prisoner in Ireland. We mention these men particularly, +because it was they who took the chief part in conversations and in +story-telling. The two Scots were also there, but they were very quiet, +and talked little; nevertheless, they were interested and attentive +listeners. Olaf was there also, all eyes and ears,--for Olaf drank in +stories, and songs, and jests, as the sea-sand drinks water--so said +Tyrker; but Krake immediately contradicted him, saying that when the +sea-sand was full of water it drank no more, as was plain from the fact +that it did not drink up the sea, whereas Olaf went on drinking and was +_never_ satisfied. + +"Come, sing us a song, Krake," cried Tyrker, giving the former a slap on +the shoulder; "let us hear how the Danish kings were served by the Irish +boys." + +"Not I," said Krake, firmly. "I've told ye two stories already. It's +Hake's turn now to give us a song, or what else he pleases." + +"But you'll sing it after Hake has sung, won't you, Krake?" pleaded +several of the men. + +"I'll not say `No' to that." + +Hake, who possessed a soft and deep bass voice of very fine quality, at +once acceded to the request for a song. Crossing his arms on his chest, +and looking, as if in meditation, towards the eastern horizon, he sang, +to one of his national airs, "The Land across the Sea." + +The deep pathos of Hake's voice, more than the words, melted these hardy +Norsemen almost to tears, and for a few minutes effectually put to +flight the spirit of fun that had prevailed. + +"That's your own composin', I'll be bound," said Krake, "an' sure it's +not bad. It's Scotland you mean, no doubt, by the land across the sea. +Ah! I've heard much of that land. The natives are very fond of it, +they say. It must be a fine country. I've heard Irishmen, who have +been there, say that if it wasn't for Ireland they'd think it the finest +country in the world." + +"No doubt," answered Hake with a laugh, "and I dare say Swend, there, +would think it the finest country in the world after Norway." + +"Ha! Gamle Norge," [Old Norway] said Swend with enthusiasm, "there is +no country like _that_ under the sun." + +"Except Greenland," said Olaf, stoutly. + +"Or Iceland," observed Biarne, who had joined the group. "Where can you +show such mountains--spouting fire, and smoke, and melted stones,--or +such boiling fountains, ten feet thick and a hundred feet high, as we +have in Iceland?" + +"That's true," observed Krake, who was an Icelander. + +"Oh!" exclaimed Tyrker, with a peculiar twist of his ugly countenance, +"Turkey is the land that beats all others completely." + +At this there was a general laugh. + +"Why, how can that be?" cried Swend, who was inclined to take up the +question rather hotly. "What have you to boast of in Turkey?" + +"Eh! What have we _not_, is the question. What shall I say? Ha! we +have _grapes_ there; and we do make _such_ a drink of them--Oh!--" + +Here Tyrker screwed his face and figure into what was meant for a +condition of ecstasy. + +"'Twere well that they had no grapes there, Tyrker," said Biarne, "for +if all be true that Karlsefin tells us of that drink, they would be +better without it." + +"I wish I had it!" remarked Tyrker, pathetically. + +"Well, it is said that we shall find grapes in Vinland," observed Swend, +"and as we are told there is everything else there that man can desire, +our new country will beat all the others put together,--so hurrah for +Vinland!" + +The cheer was given with right good-will, and then Tyrker reminded Krake +of his promise to sing a song. Krake, whose jovial spirits made him +always ready for anything, at once struck up to a rattling ditty:-- + + THE DANISH KINGS. + + One night when one o' the Irish Kings + Was sleeping in his bed, + Six Danish Kings--so Sigvat sings-- + Came an' cut off his head. + The Irish boys they heard the noise, + And flocked unto the shore; + They caught the kings, and put out their eyes, + And left them in their gore. + + _Chorus_--Oh! this is the way we served the kings, + An' spoiled their pleasure, the dirty things, + When they came to harry and flap their wings + Upon the Irish shore-ore, + Upon the Irish shore. + + Next year the Danes took terrible pains + To wipe that stain away; + They came with a fleet, their foes to meet, + Across the stormy say. + Each Irish carl great stones did hurl + In such a mighty rain, + The Danes went down, with a horrible stoun, + An' never came up again! + + Oh! this is the way, etcetera. + +The men were still laughing and applauding Krake's song when Olaf, who +chanced to look over the bow of the vessel, started up and shouted +"Land, ho!" in a shrill voice, that rang through the whole ship. + +Instantly, the poop and forecastle were crowded, and there, on the +starboard bow, they saw a faint blue line of hills far away on the +horizon. Olaf got full credit for having discovered the land first on +this occasion; and for some time everything else was forgotten in +speculations as to what this new land would turn out to be; but the +wind, which had been getting lighter every hour that day, died away +almost to a calm, so that, as there was no prospect of reaching the land +for some hours, the men gradually fell back to their old places and +occupation. + +"Now, then, Krake," said Tyrker, "tell us the story about that king you +were talking of the other day; which was it? Harald--" + +"Ay, King Harald," said Krake, "and how he came to get the name of +Greyskin. Well, you must know that it's not many years ago since my +father, Sigurd, was a trader between Iceland and Norway. He went to +other places too, sometimes--and once to Ireland, on which occasion it +was that I was taken prisoner and kept so long in the country, that I +became an Irishman. But after escaping and getting home I managed to +change back into an Icelander, as ye may see! Well, in my father's +younger days, before I was born--which was a pity! for he needed help +sorely at that time, and I would have been just the man to turn myself +handy to any sort of work; however, it wasn't _my_ fault,--in his +younger days, my father one summer went over from Iceland to Norway,-- +his ship loaded till she could hardly float, with skins and peltry, +chiefly grey wolves. It's my opinion that the reason she didn't go down +was that they had packed her so tight there was no room for the water to +get in and sink her. Anyway, over the sea she went and got safe to +Norway. + +"At that time King Harald, one of the sons of Eric, reigned in Norway, +after the death of King Hakon the Good. He and my father were great +friends, but they had not met for some time; and not since Harald had +come to his dignity. My father sailed to Hardanger, intending to +dispose of his pelts there if he could. Now, King Harald generally had +his seat in Hordaland and Bogaland, and some of his brothers were +usually with him; but it chanced that year that they went to Hardanger, +so my father and the king met, and had great doings, drinking beer and +talking about old times when they were boys together. + +"My father then went to the place where the greatest number of people +were met in the fiord, but nobody would buy any of his skins. He +couldn't understand this at all, and was very much annoyed at it, and at +night when he was at supper with the king he tells him about it. The +king was in a funny humour that night. He had dashed his beard with +beer to a great extent, and laughed heartily sometimes without my father +being able to see what was the joke. But my father was a knowing man. +He knew well enough that people are sometimes given to hearty laughter +without troubling themselves much about the joke--especially when they +are beery,--so he laughed too, out of friendliness, and was very +sociable. + +"When my father went away the king promised to pay him a visit on board +of his ship next day, which he did, sure enough; and my father took care +to let it be known that he was coming, so there was no lack of the +principal people thereabouts. They had all come down together, by the +merest chance, to the place where the ship lay, just to enjoy the fresh +air--being fresher there that day than at most other places on the +fiord, no doubt! + +"King Harald came with a fully-manned boat, and a number of followers. +He was very condescending and full of fun, as he had been the night +before. When he was going away he looked at the skins, and said to my +father, `Wilt thou give me a present of one of these wolf-skins?' + +"`Willingly,' says my father, `and as many more as you please.' + +"On this, the king wrapped himself up in a wolf-skin and went back to +his boat and rowed away. Immediately after, all the boats in his suite +came alongside and looked at the wolf-skins with great admiration, and +every man bought just such another wolf-skin as the king had got. In a +few days so many people came to buy skins, that not half of them could +be served with what they wanted, and the upshot was that my father's +vessel was cleared out down to the keel, and thereafter the king went, +as you know, by the name of Harald Greyskin. + +"But here we are, comrades," continued Krake, rising, "drawing near to +the land,--I'll have a look at it." + +The country off which they soon cast anchor was flat and overgrown with +wood; and the strand far around consisted of white sand, and was very +low towards the sea. Biarne said that it was the country to which Leif +had given the name of Markland, because it was well-wooded; they +therefore went ashore in the small boat, but finding nothing in +particular to attract their interest, they soon returned on board and +again put to sea with an onshore wind from the north-east. [Some +antiquaries appear to be of opinion that Helloland must have been +Newfoundland, and Markland some part of Nova Scotia.] + +For two days they continued their voyage with the same wind, and then +made land for the third time and found it to be an island. It was +blowing hard at the time, and Biarne advised that they should take +shelter there and wait for good weather. This they did, and, as before, +a few of them landed to explore the country, but there was not much to +take note of. Little Olaf, who was one of the explorers, observed dew +on the grass, and, remembering that Leif had said that the dew on one of +the islands which he met with was _sweet_, he shook some into the hollow +of his hand and tasted it, but looked disappointed. + +"Are you thirsty, Olaf?" asked Karlsefin, who, with Biarne, walked +beside him. + +"No, but I wondered if the dew would be sweet. My father said it was, +on one of the islands he came to." + +"Foolish boy," said Biarne, laughing; "Leif did but speak in a figure. +He was very hot and tired at the time, and found the dew sweet to his +thirsty spirit as well as refreshing to his tongue." + +"Thus you see, Olaf," observed Karlsefin, with a sly look at Biarne, +"whenever you chance to observe your father getting angry, and hear him +say that his beer is sour, you are not to suppose that it is really +sour, but must understand that it is only sour to his cross spirit as +well as disagreeable to his tongue." + +Olaf received this with a loud laugh, for, though he was puzzled for a +moment by Biarne's explanation, he saw through the jest at once. + +"Well, Biarne," returned Olaf; "whether the dew was sweet to my father's +tongue or to his spirit I cannot tell, but I remember that when he told +us about the sweet dew, he said it was near to the island where he found +it that the country he called Vinland lay. So, if this be the sweet-dew +island, Vinland cannot be far off." + +"The boy is sharp beyond his years," said Karlsefin, stopping abruptly +and looking at Biarne; "what thinkest thou of that?" + +"I think," replied the other, "that Olaf will be a great discoverer some +day, for it seems to me not unlikely that he may be right." + +"Come, we shall soon see," said Karlsefin, turning round and hastening +back to the boat. + +Biarne either had not seen this particular spot on his former visit to +these shores, which is quite probable, or he may have forgotten it, for +he did not recognise it as he had done the first land they made; but +before they left Ericsfiord, Leif had given them a very minute and +careful description of the appearance of the coast of Vinland, +especially of that part of it where he had made good his landing and set +up his booths, so that the explorers might be in a position to judge +correctly when they should approach it. Nevertheless, as every one +knows, regions, even when well defined, may wear very different aspects +when seen by different people, for the first time, from different points +of view. So it was on this occasion. The voyagers had hit the island a +short distance further south than the spot where Leif came upon it, and +did not recognise it in the least. Indeed they had begun to doubt +whether it really was an island at all. But now that Olaf had awakened +their suspicions, they hastened eagerly on board the "_Snake_," and +sailed round the coast until they came into a sound which lay between +the Island and a cape that jutted out northward from the land. + +"'Tis Vinland!" cried Biarne in an excited tone. + +"Don't be too sure of that," said Thorward, as a sudden burst of +sunshine lit up land and sea. + +"I cannot be too sure," cried Biarne, pointing to the land. "See, there +is the ness that Leif spoke of going out northwards from the land; there +is the island; here, between it and the ness, is the sound, and yonder, +doubtless, is the mouth of the river which comes out of the lake where +the son of Eric built his booths. Ho! Vinland! hurrah!" he shouted, +enthusiastically waving his cap above his head. + +The men were not slow to echo his cheer, and they gave it forth not a +whit less heartily. + +"'Tis a noble land to look upon," said Gudrid, who with the other +females of the party had been for some time gazing silently and +wistfully towards it. + +"Perchance it may be a _great_ land some day," observed Karlsefin. + +"Who knows?" murmured Thorward in a contemplative tone. + +"Ay, who knows?" echoed Biarne; "time and luck can work wonders." + +"God's blessing can work wonders," said Karlsefin, impressively; "may He +grant it to us while we sojourn here!" + +With that he gave orders to prepare to let go the anchor, but the sound, +over which they were gliding slowly before a light wind, was very +shallow, and he had scarcely ceased speaking when the ship struck with +considerable violence, and remained fast upon the sand. + + + +CHAPTER EIGHT. + +A CHAPTER OF INCIDENTS AND EXPLORATION, IN WHICH A BEAR AND A WHALE PLAY +PROMINENT PARTS. + +Although arrested thus suddenly and unexpectedly in their progress +toward the shore, these resolute Norsemen were not to be balked in their +intention of reaching the land that forenoon--for it was morning when +the vessel stuck fast on the shallows. + +The tide was ebbing at the time, so that Karlsefin knew it would be +impossible to get the ship off again until the next flood-tide. He +therefore waited till the water was low enough, and then waded to the +land accompanied by a large band of men. We need scarcely say that they +were well-armed. In those days men never went abroad either by land or +sea without their armour, which consisted of swords, axes, spears and +bows for offence, with helmets and shields for defence. Some of the men +of wealth and position also wore defensive armour on their breasts, +thighs, and shins, but most of the fighting men were content to trust to +the partial protection afforded by tunics of thick skin. + +They were not long of reaching the mouth of the river which Biarne had +pointed out, and, after proceeding up its banks for a short distance, +were convinced that this must be the very spot they were in search of. + +"Now, Biarne," said Karlsefin, stopping and sitting down on a large +stone, "I have no doubt that this is Leif's river, for it is broad and +deep as he told us, therefore we will take our ship up here. +Nevertheless, before doing so, it would be a satisfaction to make +positively certain that we are in the right way, and this we may do by +sending one or two of our men up into the land, who, by following the +river, will come to the lake where Leif built his booths, and so bring +us back the news of them. Meanwhile we can explore the country here +till they return." + +Biarne and Thorward thought this advice good, and both offered to lead +the party to be sent there. + +"For," said Thorward, "they may meet with natives, and if the natives +here bear any resemblance to the Skraelingers, methinks they won't +receive us with much civility." + +"I have thought of that," returned Karlsefin with a smile, "but I like +not your proposal. What good would it do that either you or Biarne +should lead so small a party if ye were assaulted by a hundred or more +savages, as might well be the case?" + +"Why, we could at all events retreat fighting," retorted Thorward in a +slightly offended tone. + +"With fifty, perhaps, in front, to keep you in play, and fifty detached +to tickle you in rear." + +Thorward laughed at this, and so did Biarne. "Well, if the worst came +to the worst," said the latter, "we could at any rate sell our lives +dearly." + +"And, pray, what good would that do to _us_?" demanded Karlsefin. + +"Well, well, have it your own way, skipper," said Biarne; "it seems to +me, nevertheless, that if we were to advance with the whole of the men +we have brought on shore with us, we should be in the same predicament, +for twenty men could not easily save themselves from a hundred--or, as +it might be, a thousand--if surrounded in the way you speak of." + +"Besides that," added Thorward, "it seems to me a mean thing to send out +only one or two of our men without a leader to cope with such possible +dangers, unless indeed they were possessed of more than mortal powers." + +"Why, what has become of your memories, my friends?" exclaimed +Karlsefin. "Are there none of our men possessed of powers that are, at +all events, more than those of _ordinary_ mortals?" + +"O-ho! Hake and Heika! I forgot them," cried Biarne; "the very men for +the work, to be sure!" + +"No doubt of it," said Karlsefin. "If they meet with natives who are +friendly, well and good; if they meet with no natives at all,--better. +If they meet with unfriendly natives, they can show them their heels; +and I warrant you that, unless the natives here be different from most +other men, the best pair of savage legs in Vinland will fail to overtake +the Scottish brothers." + +Thorward agreed that this was a good plan, but cautioned Karlsefin to +give the brothers strict injunctions to fly, and not upon any account to +fight; "for," said he, "these doughty Scots are fiery and fierce when +roused, and from what I have seen of them will, I think, be much more +disposed to use their legs in running after their foes than in running +away from them." + +This having been settled, the brothers were called, and instructed to +proceed into the woods and up the bank of the river as quickly as +possible, until they should come to a lake on the margin of which they +would probably see a few small huts. On discovering these they were to +turn immediately and hasten back. They were also particularly cautioned +as to their behaviour in the event of meeting with natives, and strictly +forbidden to fight, if these should be evil disposed, but to run back at +full speed to warn their friends, so that they might be prepared for any +emergency. + +"Nevertheless," said Karlsefin, in conclusion, "ye may carry weapons +with you if ye will." + +"Thanks," replied Heika. "As, however, you appear to doubt our powers +of self-restraint, we will relieve your mind by going without them." + +Thus instructed and warned, the brothers tightened their belts, and, +leaping nimbly into the neighbouring brake, disappeared from view. + +"A pair of proper men," said Karlsefin.--"And now, comrades, we will +explore the neighbourhood together, for it is advisable to ascertain all +we can of the nature of our new country, and that as quickly as may be. +It is needful, also, to do so without scattering, lest we be set upon +unexpectedly by any lurking foe. This land is not easily surveyed like +Iceland or Greenland, being, as you see, covered with shrubs and trees, +which somewhat curtail our vision, and render caution the more +necessary." + +While the Norsemen were engaged in examining the woods near the coast, +the two Scots held on their way into the interior. There was something +absolutely exhilarating, as Krake once remarked, in the mere beholding +of these brothers' movements. They had been famed for agility and +endurance even in their own country. They did not run, but trotted +lightly, and appeared to be going at a moderate pace, when in reality it +would have compelled an ordinary runner to do his best to keep up with +them. Yet they did not pant or show any other symptom of distress. On +the contrary, they conversed occasionally in quiet tones, as men do when +walking. They ran abreast as often as the nature of the ground would +allow them to do so, taking their leaps together when they came to small +obstructions, such as fallen trees or brooks of a few feet wide; but +when they came to creeks of considerable width, the one usually paused +to see the other spring over, and then followed him. + +Just after having taken a leap of this kind, and while they were running +silently side by side along the margin of the river, they heard a crash +among the bushes, and next instant a fine deer sprang into an open space +in front of them. The brothers bent forward, and, flying like the wind, +or like arrows from a bow, followed for a hundred yards or so--then +stopped abruptly and burst into a hearty fit of laughter. + +"Ah! Heika," exclaimed the younger, "that fellow would be more than a +match for us if we could double our speed. We have no chance with +four-legged runners." + +While he was speaking they resumed the jog-trot pace, and soon +afterwards came to a rocky ridge, that seemed to traverse the country +for some distance. Here they were compelled to walk, and in some places +even to clamber, the ground being very rugged. + +Here also they came to a small branch or fork of the river that appeared +to find its way to the sea through another channel. It was deep, and +although narrow in comparison with the parent stream, was much too broad +to be leaped over. The pioneers were therefore obliged to swim. Being +almost as much at home in the water as otters, they plunged in, clothes +and all, without halting, and in a few seconds had gained the other +side. + +When they reached the top of the ridge they stopped and gazed in silent +admiration, for there lay stretched out before them a vast woodland +scene of most exquisite beauty. Just at their feet was the lake of +which they were in search; some parts of it bright as the blue sky which +its unruffled breast reflected; other parts dark almost to blackness +with the images of rocks and trees. Everywhere around lay a primeval +wilderness of wood and water which it is beyond the power of mortal pen +adequately to describe; and while all was suffused with the golden light +of an early summer sun, and steeped in the repose of an absolutely calm +day, the soft and plaintive cries of innumerable wild-fowl enlivened, +without disturbing, the profound tranquillity of the scene. + +"Does it not remind you of our own dear land?" said Heika in a low soft +voice. + +"Ay, like the lowlands on the shores of the Forth fiord," replied Hake, +in the same low tone, as if he feared to break the pleasing stillness; +"and there, surely, are the booths we were to search for--see, in the +hollow, at the head of yonder bay, with the gravelly beach and the +birch-trees hanging from the rocks as if they wished to view themselves +in the watery mirror." + +"True--there are three of them visible. Let us descend and examine." + +"Hist! Some one appears to have got there before us," said Hake, laying +his hand on his brother's shoulder and pointing in the direction of the +huts. + +"It is not a human visitor, methinks," observed Heika. + +"More like a bear," returned Hake. + +In order to set the question at rest the brothers hastened round by the +woods to a spot immediately behind the huts. There was a hill there so +steep as to be almost a precipice. It overlooked the shores of the lake +immediately below where the huts were, and when the pioneers came to the +crest of it and peeped cautiously over, they beheld a large brown bear +not far from the hut that stood nearest to the hill, busily engaged in +devouring something. + +"Now it is a pity," whispered Heika, "that we brought no arms with us. +Truly, little cause have we men to be proud of our strength, for yonder +beast could match fifty of us if we had nothing to depend on save our +fists and feet and fingers." + +"Why not include the teeth in your list, brother?" asked Hake, with a +quiet laugh; "but it is a pity, as you say. What shall--" + +He stopped abruptly, for a large boulder, or mass of rock, against which +he leaned, gave way under him, made a sudden lurch forward and then +stuck fast. + +"Ha! a dangerous support," said Hake, starting back; "but, hist! suppose +we shove it down on the bear?" + +"A good thought," replied Heika, "if we can move the mass, which seems +doubtful; but let us try. Something may be gained by trying--nothing +lost." + +The boulder, which had been so balanced on the edge of the steep hill +that a gentle pressure moved it, was a mass of rock weighing several +tons, the moving of which would have been a hopeless task for twenty men +to attempt, but it stood balanced on the extreme edge of the turn of the +hill, and the little slip it had just made rendered its position still +more critical; so that, when the young men lay down with their backs +against a rock, placed their feet upon it and pushed with all their +might, it slowly yielded, toppled over, and rolled with a tremendous +surge through a copse which lay immediately below it. + +The brothers leaped up and gazed in breathless eagerness to observe the +result. The bear, hearing the crash, looked up with as much surprise as +the visage of that stupid creature is capable of expressing. The thing +was so suddenly done that the bear seemed to have no time to form an +opinion or get alarmed, for it stood perfectly still, while the boulder, +bounding from the copse, went crashing down the hill, cutting a clear +path wherever it touched, attaining terrific velocity, and drawing an +immense amount of debris after it. The direction it took happened to be +not quite straight for the animal, whose snout it passed within six or +eight feet--causing him to shrink back and growl--as it rushed smoking +onward over the level bit of sward beneath, through the mass of willows +beyond, across the gravelly strand and out to the lake, into which it +plunged and disappeared amid a magnificent spout of foam. But the +avalanche of earth and stones which its mad descent had created did not +let Bruin off so easily. One after another these latter, small and +large, went pattering and dashing against him,--some on his flank, some +on his ribs, and others on his head. He growled of course, yet stood +the fire nobly for a few seconds, but when, at last, a large boulder hit +him fairly on the nose, he gave vent to a squeal which terminated in a +passionate roar as he turned about and made for the open shore, along +which for some distance he ran with the agility of a monstrous wild-cat, +and finally leaped out of sight into his forest home! + +The brothers looked at each other with sparkling eyes, and next moment +the woods resounded with their merriment, as they held their sides and +leaned for support against a neighbouring cliff. + +Heika was first to recover himself. + +"Hold, brother," he exclaimed, "we laugh loud enough to let Bruin know +who it was that injured him, or to bring all the savages in these woods +down upon us. Peace, man, peace, and let us return to our friends." + +"As soon as ye please, brother," said Hake, still laughing as he +tightened his belt, "but was it not rare fun to see Bruin stand that +stony rain so manfully until his tender point was touched? And then how +he ran! 'Twas worth coming here to see a bear leave off his rolling +gait so and run like a very wild-cat.--Now I'm ready." + +Without staying to make further examination of Leif's old huts--for from +the place where they stood all the six of them could be clearly seen-- +the young pioneers started on their return to the coast. They ran back +with much greater speed than they had pushed forward--fearing that their +companions might be getting impatient or alarmed about them. They did +not even converse, but with heads up, chests forward, and elbows bent, +addressed themselves to a quick steady run, which soon brought them to +the branch of the river previously mentioned. Here they stopped for a +moment before plunging in. + +"Suppose that we run down its bank," suggested Hake, "and see whether +there be not a shallow crossing." + +"Surely ye have not grown afraid of water, Hake?" + +"No, not I, but I should like to see whither this branch trends, and +what it is like; besides, the divergence will not cost us much time, as +we can cross at any point we have a mind to, and come at the main river +again through the woods." + +"Well, I will not balk you--come on." + +They accordingly descended the smaller streams and found it to be broken +by various little cascades and rapids, with here and there a longish +reach of pebbly ground where the stream widened into a shallow rippling +river with one or two small islands in it. At one of these places they +crossed where it was only knee-deep in the centre, and finally stopped +at the end of a reach, where a sudden narrowing of the banks produced a +brawling rapid. Below this there was a deep pool caused by a great +eddy. + +"Now, we go no further," said Heika. "Here we shall cross through the +woods to the main branch." + +"'Tis a pretty stream," observed Hake when they were about to leave it. + +As he spoke a large salmon leaped high out of the pool below, flashed +for one moment in the sunshine like a bar of living silver, and fell +back into the water with a sounding splash. Hake caught his breath and +opened wide his eyes! + +"Truly that is a good sight to the eyes of a Scotsman," said Heika, +gazing with interest at the place where the fish had disappeared; "it +reminds me of my native land." + +"Ay, and me of my dinner," observed Hake, smacking his lips. + +"Out upon thee, man!" cried Heika, "how can ye couple our native land +with such a matter-o'-fact thought as dinner?" + +"Why, it would be hard to uncouple the thought of dinner from our native +land," returned Hake, with a laugh, as they entered the forest; "for +every man--not to mention woman--within its circling coast-line is a +diner, and so by hook or crook must daily have his dinner.--But say, +brother, is it not matter of satisfaction, as well as matter of fact, +that the waters of this Vinland shall provide us with abundance of food +not less surely than the land? If things go on as they have begun I +shall be well content to stay here." + +"Ye do not deserve the name of Scot, Hake," said the other gravely. "My +heart is in Scotland; it is not here." + +"True, I know it," replied Hake, with a touch of feeling; "in a double +sense, too, for your betrothed is there. Nevertheless, as _I_ did not +leave my heart behind me; surely there is no sin in taking some pleasure +in this new land. But heed not my idle talk, brother. You and I shall +yet live to see the bonny hills of--. Ha! here we are on the big stream +once more, sooner than I had expected, and, if I mistake not, within +hail of our comrades." + +Hake was right. The moment they emerged from the woods upon the open +bank of the large river they saw a party of men in the distance +approaching them, and, an instant later, a loud halloo assured them that +these were their friends. + +When the pioneers had related all that they had seen and done, the whole +party returned to the shore and hailed the ship, for, the tide having +risen, they could not now reach it by wading. A boat was immediately +sent for them, and great was the interest manifested by all on board to +learn the news of Vinland. They had time to give an account of all that +had been done and seen, because it still wanted an hour of flood-tide, +and the ship still lay immoveable. + +While they were thus engaged, Gudrid happened to cast her eyes over the +stern of the ship, and thought she saw an object moving in the water. + +"What is that I see?" she said, pointing towards it. + +"The great sea-serpent!" exclaimed Biarne, shading his eyes with his +hand. + +"Or his ghost," remarked Krake. + +From which observations, coupled together, it would appear that the +famous monster referred to was known by repute to the Norsemen of the +eleventh century, though he was to some extent regarded as a myth! + +Be this as it may, the object which now attracted the attention and +raised the eyebrows of all on board the "_Snake_" evidently possessed +life, for it was very active--wildly so--besides being large. It darted +hither and thither, apparently without aim, sending the water in curling +foam before it. Suddenly it made straight for the ship, then it turned +at a tangent and made for the island; anon it wheeled round, and rushed, +like a mad creature, to the shore. + +Then arose a deafening shout from the men-- + +"A whale! an embayed whale!" + +And so in fact it was; a large whale, which, as whales will sometimes +do--blind ones, perhaps--had lost its way, got entangled among the +sandbanks lying between the island and the shore, and was now making +frantic efforts to escape. + +Need we say that a scene of the wildest excitement ensued among the men! +The two boats--one of which was, as we have said, a large one--were got +ready, barbed spears and lances and ropes were thrown into them, as many +men as they could hold with safety jumped in, and pulled away, might and +main, after the terrified whale. + +You may be sure, reader, that little Olaf was there, fast by the side of +his friend and hero Karlsefin, who took charge of the large boat, with +Thorward in the bow to direct him how to steer. Biarne was there too as +a matter of course, in charge of the little boat, with Krake as his +bowman and Tyrker pulling the stroke-oar. For Tyrker was strong, though +little, ugly, and old, and had a peculiar talent for getting involved in +any fighting, fun, or mischief that chanced to be in hand. Men said +that he was afraid of dying in his bed, and had made up his mind to rush +continually into the jaws of danger until they should close upon and +crush him; but we are of opinion that this was a calumny. Those of the +men who were necessarily left in the ship could scarce be prevented from +swimming after the boats as they shot away, and nothing but the +certainty of being drowned restrained them from making the mad attempt. +As it was, they clambered upon the figure-head and up the rigging, +where, with gaping mouths and staring eyes, they watched the movements +of their more fortunate companions. + +Meanwhile the whale had made what appeared to be a grand and final +neck-or-nothing rush in the direction of the shore. Of course he was +high, although not dry, in a few seconds. That is to say, he got into +water so shallow that he stuck fast, with his great head and shoulders +raised considerably out of the sea, in which position he began to roll, +heave, spout, and lash his mighty tail with a degree of violence that +almost approached sublimity. + +He was in these circumstances when the Norsemen came up; for though too +shallow for the whale, the water was quite deep enough for the boats. + +Being light, the small boat reached the scene of action first. Krake +stood up in the bow to be ready. He held in his hand a curious wooden +spear with a loose barb tipped with the tusk of a walrus. It had been +procured from one of the Greenland Skraelingers. A rope was attached to +it. + +As they drew near, the whale stopped for an instant, probably to recover +breath. Krake raised his spear--the fish raised his tail. Whizz! went +the spear. Down came the tail with a thunderclap, and next moment mud, +sand, water, stones, foam, and blood, were flying in cataracts +everywhere as the monster renewed its struggles. + +"Back! back oars!" shouted Biarne, as they were almost swamped by the +flood. + +The men obeyed with such good-will that Krake was thrown head-foremost +over the bow. + +"Hold fast!" yelled Krake on coming to the surface. + +"If ye had held fast ye wouldn't have been there," said Biarne; "where +are ye?" + +He rose again out of the foam, yelled, and tossed up his arms. + +"Can the man not swim?" cried Biarne, in alarm; "pull, boys, pull!" + +The men were already pulling with such force that they almost went over +the man. As they rubbed past him Hake dropped his oar and caught him by +the hair, Biarne leaned over the side and got him by the breeches, and +with a vigorous heave they had him inboard. + +"Why, Krake, I thought you could swim!" said Biarne. + +"Ay, so I can, but who could swim with a coil of rope round his neck and +legs?" + +The poor man had indeed been entangled in the rope of the spear, so that +he could not use his limbs freely. + +No more was said, however, for they were still in dangerous proximity to +the tail of the struggling fish, and had to pull out of its way. + +Meanwhile the large boat, profiting by the experience of the small one, +had kept more towards the whale's head, and, before Krake had been +rescued, Thorward sent a Skraelinger spear deep into its shoulder. But +this only acted as a spur to the huge creature, and made it heave about +with such violence that it managed to slew right round with its head +offshore. + +At this the men could not restrain a shout of alarm, for they knew that +if the whale were to succeed in struggling again into water where it +could swim, it would carry away spears and ropes; or, in the event of +these holding on, would infallibly capsize and sink the boats. + +"Come, drive in your spears!" shouted Karlsefin in a voice of thunder, +for his usually quiet spirit was now deeply stirred. + +Thorward and one of the men threw their spears, but the latter missed +and the former struck his weapon into a part that was too thick to do +much injury, though it was delivered with great force and went deep. + +"This will never do!" cried Karlsefin, leaping up; "here, Swend, take +the helm. Ho! hand me that spear, quick! Now, lads, pull, pull, with +heart and limb!" + +As he spoke he sprang like a roused giant into the bow of the boat and +caught up a spear. The men obeyed his orders. The boat rushed against +the whale's side, and, with its impetus added to his own Herculean +strength, Karlsefin thrust the spear deep down into the monster's body +just behind the shoulder fin. + +The crimson stream that immediately gushed forth besprinkled all in the +boat and dyed the sea around. + +"That is his life-blood," said Karlsefin, with a grim smile; "you may +back off now, lads." + +This was done at once. The small boat was also ordered to back off, and +those in it obeyed not a moment too soon, for immediately after +receiving the deadly wound the whale went into a violent dying struggle. +It soon subsided. There were one or two mighty heavings of the +shoulder; then a shudder ran through the huge carcase, and it rolled +slowly over in a relaxed manner which told significantly that the great +mysterious life had fled. + + + +CHAPTER NINE. + +THE FIRST NIGHT IN VINLAND. + +The prize which had thus fallen into the hands of the Norsemen was of +great importance, because it furnished a large supply of food, which +thus enabled them to go leisurely to work in establishing themselves, +instead of, as would otherwise have been the case, spending much of +their time and energy in procuring that necessity of life by hunting and +fishing. + +It was also exceedingly fortunate that the whale had been killed a +little before the time of high water, because that enabled them to +fasten ropes through its nose and row with it still farther in to the +shore. This accomplished, the boats made several trips back to the ship +and landed all the men, and these, with a number of ropes, hauled up the +carcase foot by foot as the tide rose. After reaching a certain point +at high water they could get it up no farther, and when the tide turned +all the men twice doubled could not have budged it an inch. The ropes +were therefore tied together and lengthened until they reached a strong +tree near the beach, to which they were fastened. + +Leaving their prize thus secured they hastened back to the ship, hauled +up the anchor, and made for the mouth of the river, but they had lost so +much of the flood-tide, in consequence of their battle with the whale, +and the evening was so far advanced, that they resolved to delay further +proceedings until the following day. + +The ship was therefore hauled close in to the land at the river's mouth +and allowed to take the ground on a spit of sand. Here the men landed +and soon built up a pile of stones, between which and the ship a gangway +was made. The women were thus enabled to walk comfortably ashore. And +here, on a grassy spot, they pitched their tents for the first time in +Vinland. + +Provisions were now brought on shore and large fires were kindled which +blazed up and glared magnificently as the night drew on, rendering the +spit of sand with the grassy knoll in the centre of it quite a cheerful +and ruddy spot. A few trees were cut down and stretched across the spit +at its neck on the land side, and there several sentinels were placed as +a precaution--for which there seemed little occasion. + +Karlsefin then set up a pole with a flag on it and took formal +possession of this new land, after which the whole colony sat down on +the grass--some under the tents, others under the starry sky--to supper. +The cattle, it may here be noted, were not landed at this place, as +they were to be taken up the river next day, but their spirits were +refreshed with a good supply of new-mown grass, so that it is to be +hoped, and presumed, they rejoiced not less than their human companions +in the satisfactory state of things. + +In the largest tent, Karlsefin, Biarne, Thorward, Gudrid, Freydissa, +Astrid, and Olaf, sat down to a sumptuous repast of dried Greenland-fish +and fresh Vinland-whale, besides which they had soup and beer. Being +healthy and hungry, they did full justice to the good things. Bertha +and Thora served and then joined in the repast. + +"This is pleasant, isn't it, Freydissa?" asked Biarne, with his mouth +full. + +Freydissa, with her mouth not quite so full, admitted that it was, for +she happened to be in an amiable humour--as well she might! + +"Come, let us pledge the new land in a can of beer," cried Biarne, +pouring the beverage out of an earthenware jar into a squat old Norse +flagon of embossed silver. "Thorward, fill up!" + +"I will join you heartily in that," cried Thorward, suiting the action +to the word. + +"And I," said Karlsefin, raising an empty flagon to his lips, "will +pledge it in a wish. I wish--prosperity to Vinland!" + +"Come, Karlsefin," remonstrated Biarne, "forego austerity for once, and +drink." + +"Not I," returned the skipper, with a laugh. + +"Wherefore not?" + +"First, because a wish is quite as potent as a drink in that respect; +second, because our beer is nearly finished, and we have not yet the +means to concoct more, so that it were ill-advised to rob _you_, Biarne, +by helping to consume that which I do not like; and, last of all, I +think it a happy occasion this in which to forswear beer altogether!" + +"Have thy way," said Biarne, helping himself to another whale-steak of +large dimensions. "You are too good a fellow to quarrel with on such +trifling ground. Here, pass the jar, Thorward; I will drink his portion +as well as my own." + +"And I will join you both," cried little Olaf with a comical turn of his +eyebrows. "Here, I wish prosperity to Vinland, and drink it, too, in +water." + +"We can all join thee in that, Olaf," said Gudrid I with an approving +nod and laugh. "Come, girls, fill up your cups and pledge to Vinland." + +"Stop!" shouted Biarne in sudden anxiety. + +They all paused with the cups half-way to their lips. + +"_You_ must not drink, Freydissa," he continued seriously. "Gudrid did +call upon the _girls_ to join her: surely ye don't--" + +He was cut short by Freydissa throwing her cup of water in his face. + +With a burst of laughter Biarne fell backwards, and, partly to avoid the +deluge, partly for fun, rolled out of the tent, when he got up and dried +his dripping beard. + +"No more of that, fair girl, I beseech thee," he said, resuming his +place and occupation. "I will not again offend--if thou wilt not again +misunderstand!" + +Freydissa made no reply to this, silence being her usual method of +showing that she condescended to be in good humour--and they were all +very merry over their evening meal. From the noise and laughter and +songs around them, it was evident that the rest of the company were +enjoying their first night on shore to the full, insomuch that Olaf was +led, in the height of his glee, to express a wish that they could live +in that free-and-easy fashion for ever. + +"'Tis of no use wishing it," observed Karlsefin; "if you would insure +success you must, according to Biarne, drink it in beer." + +"I cry you mercy, skipper," said Biarne; "if you persecute me thus I +shall not be able to drink any more to-night. Hand me the jar, +Thorward, and let me drink again before I come to that pass." + +"Hark!" exclaimed Gudrid, "there must be something going to happen, for +all the men have become suddenly quiet." + +They listened intently for a moment or two, when Krake's voice broke the +deep silence:--"Come, now, don't think so long about it, as if ye were +composing something new. Every one knows, sure, that it's about sweet +Scotland you're going to sing." + +"Right, Krake, right," replied a rich deep voice, which it required no +sight to tell belonged to Hake, the young Scot; "but there are many +songs about sweet Scotland, and I am uncertain which to choose." + +"Let it be lively," said Krake. + +"No, no, no," chorussed some of the men; "let it be slow and sad." + +"Well well," laughed the half-Irishman--as he was fond of styling +himself--"have it your own way. If ye won't be glad, by all means be +sad." + +A moment after, Hake's manly tones rose on the still air like the sound +of an organ, while he sang one of the ancient airs of his native land, +wherein, like the same airs of modern days, were sounded the praises of +Scotland's heather hills and brawling burns--her bonny daughters and her +stalwart sons. + +To those in the large tent who had listened, with breathless attention +and heads half averted, it was evident that song, sentiments, and singer +were highly appreciated, from the burst of hearty applause at the +conclusion, and the eager demand for another ditty. But Hake protested +that his ruling motto was "fair play," and that the songs must circle +round. + +"So let it be," cried Swend.--"Krake, it is your turn next." + +"I won't keep ye waiting," said that worthy, "though I might do it, too, +if I was to put off time selecting from the songs of old Ireland, for +it's endless they are--and in great variety. Sure, I could give ye +songs about hills and streams that are superior to Scotland's burns and +braes any day--almost up to those of Gamle Norge if they were a bit +higher--the hills I mean, not the songs, which are too high already for +a man with a low voice--and I could sing ye a lament that would make ye +shed tears enough to wash us all off the spit of land here into the sea; +but that's not in my way. I'm fond of a lively ditty, so here you are." + +With that Krake struck up an air in which it was roundly asserted that +Ireland was the finest country in the world (except Iceland, as he +stopped in his song to remark); that Irish boys and girls lived in a +state of perpetual hilarity and good-will, and that the boys displayed +this amiable and pleasant condition chiefly in the way of kissing the +girls and cracking each other's crowns. + +After that, Swend was called on to sing, which he did of Norway with +tremendous enthusiasm and noise but little melody. Then another man +sang a love-ditty in a very gruff voice and much out of tune, which, +nevertheless, to the man's evident satisfaction, was laughingly +applauded. After him a sentimental youth sang, in a sweet tenor voice, +an Icelandic air, and then Tyrker was called on to do his part, but +flatly refused to sing. He offered to tell a saga instead, however, +which he did in such a manner that he made the sides of the Norsemen +ache with laughter--though, to say truth, they laughed more at the +teller than the tale. + +Thus with song and saga they passed the first hours of the night, while +the camp-fires blazed ruddily on their weather-beaten faces, and the +heavenly constellations shone, not only on the surrounding landscape, +but appeared to light up another world of cloudland beneath the surface +of the sleeping sea. + +At last Karlsefin went out to them. + +"Now, lads," said he, "it is high time that you laid your heads on your +pillows. Men who do not sleep well cannot labour well. To-morrow we +have hard work before us in taking possession and settling our new home. +God has prospered us thus far. We have made a good beginning in +Vinland. May it be the foretaste of a happy ending. Away, then, and +get you to rest before the night is older, and let your sleep be sound, +for I will see to it that the sentinels posted round the camp are +vigilant." + +The men received this brief speech with a murmur of willing +acquiescence, and at once obeyed the order; though Krake observed that +he fell in with the custom merely out of respect to the opinions of his +comrades, having himself long ago learned to do without sleep in +Ireland, where the lads were in the habit of working--or fighting--all +day, dancing all night, and going home with the girls in the morning! +Each Norseman then sought a spot upon the grassy knoll suited to his +taste; used his arm, or a hillock, or stone, for a pillow, or anything +else that came conveniently to hand, and with his sword or axe beside +him, and his shield above him as a coverlet, courted repose, while the +bright stars twinkled him to sleep, and the rippling wavelets on the +shore discoursed his lullaby. + + + +CHAPTER TEN. + +TAKING POSSESSION OF THE NEW HOME, AN EVENT WHICH IS CELEBRATED BY AN +EXPLOSION AND A RECONCILIATION. + +Every one knows--at least a well-known proverb assures us--that "early +to bed and early to rise" conduces to health, wealth, and wisdom. The +Norsemen of old would appear to have been acquainted with the proverb +and the cheering prospect it holds out; perhaps they originated it; at +all events, that they acted on it, and probably experienced the happy +results, is evident from the fact that Karlsefin and his men not only +went to bed in good time at night--as related in the last chapter--but +were up and doing by daybreak on the following morning. + +Having roused the women, relieved the sentinels, struck the tents, and +carried everything safely on board the _Snake_, they manned the oars, or +large sweeps, with the stoutest of the crew, and prepared to row their +vessel up the river into the lake on the shores of which they designed +to fix their future home. Previous to this, however, a party of men +were told off to remain behind and cut up the whale, slice the lean +portions into thin layers, and dry them in the sun for winter use. + +"See that you make a good job of it," said Karlsefin to Swend, who was +left behind as the leader of the whale-party--because he was fat, as +Krake said, and, therefore, admirably suited for such work--"and be +careful not to let sand get amongst the meat. Cut out the whalebone +too, it will be of use to us; and don't forget that there may be enemies +lurking in the woods near you. Keep your windward eye uncovered, and +have your weapons always handy." + +Swend promised to attend to these orders, and, with twenty men, armed +with axes, scythes, and large knives, besides their swords, shields, +bows and arrows, stood on the ness and cheered their comrades as they +rowed away. + +The force of the current was not great, so that the _Snake_ made rapid +progress, and in a few hours reached the place where the small stream +forked off from the main river. This they named Little River. Above +that point the current was more rapid, and it became necessary to send a +large party of men on shore with a tracking-rope, by means of which and +the oars they at last overcame all obstacles, and finally swept out upon +the bosom of the beautiful sheet of water which had afforded such +delight to the eyes of the two Scots. + +"Here, then, we have got _home_ at last," said Karlsefin, as they rowed +over the still water to a spit, or natural landing-place, near Leif's +old booths. + +"It is very beautiful," said Gudrid, "but I find it difficult to call it +home. It seems so strange, though so pleasant." + +"You were always difficult to please, Gudrid," said Freydissa; "surely +you don't think Greenland--cold, windy, bleak, nasty Greenland--a better +home than this?" + +"Nay, sister, I made no comparison. I did but say that it seemed +strange, and I'm sure that Bertha agrees with me in that--don't you, +Bertha?" + +"Indeed I do," replied the maiden; "strange the land is, but beautiful +exceedingly." + +"Of course she'll agree with what _you_ say," cried Freydissa, testily. +"I would that she agreed as readily with me. It is a wonder that she is +not weeping, as she is always so ready to do on the smallest +provocation, or without any provocation at all." + +"I only wept on leaving my father," remonstrated Bertha with a winning +smile. "I'm sure you have not seen me shed a tear since then. Besides, +I do agree with you in this case, for I think Vinland will be a pleasant +home. Don't you too?" she added, turning round to Thora, who had been +standing at her side, but Thora had moved away, and her place had been +taken by Hake, the Scot. + +Bertha blushed on meeting the youth's gaze, and the blush deepened when +Hake said in a quiet undertone, that Vinland could not but be a pleasant +home to him, and added that Greenland, Iceland, Norway,--anywhere,-- +would be equally pleasant, if only _she_ were there! + +Poor Bertha was so taken aback by the cool and sudden boldness of this +unexpected reply, that she looked hastily round in alarm lest it had +been overheard; but Hake, not intending that it should be overheard, had +addressed it to her ear, and fortunately at the moment the grating of +the keel upon the pebbly shore drew the attention of all to the land. + +"Now, then, jump ashore, lads," cried Biarne, "and get out the gangway. +Make it broad, for our cattle must not be allowed to risk their limbs by +tumbling off." + +While Biarne superintended the gangway, Thorward prepared the live stock +for their agreeable change, and Karlsefin went up to examine the state +of the huts. They were found to be in excellent condition, having been +well built originally, and the doors and windows having been secured +against the weather by those who had used them last. + +"No natives can have been here," observed the leader of the party to +those who accompanied him, "because every fastening is secured, +apparently, as it was left." + +"Nevertheless, Sigrid and I have seen footprints in the sand," remarked +the woman Gunhild, coming up at that moment. + +"Show them to me," said Karlsefin, with much interest. + +"Yonder they are," replied the woman, pointing towards a sandy spot on +her left, "and he who made them must have been a giant, they are so +large." + +"Truly, a dangerous giant to meet with," observed Karlsefin, laughing, +when he reached the place, "these are none other, Gunhild, than the +footprints of the bear that the two Scots sent away with the toothache. +But come, we will open these huts and have them put in order and made +comfortable against supper-time. So, get to work all of you and see how +active you can be." + +While some of the party were busily engaged in sweeping out and +arranging the huts, others shouldered their axes and went into the woods +to cut down a few dead trees for firewood, and when the gangway between +the ship and the shore was completed the live stock was driven on shore. + +There was something quite impressive in this part of the landing. There +was a deliberate slowness in the movements of most of the animals that +gave to it quite the air of a solemn procession, and must have been a +good illustration, on a small scale, of the issuing of the beasts from +Noah's Ark on the top of Ararat! + +The first creature which, appropriately enough, led the van, was a +lordly black bull. Little Olaf, whose tastes were somewhat peculiar, +had made a pet of this bull during the voyage, and by feeding it, +scratching it behind the ears, patting its nose, giving it water, and +talking to it, had almost, if not altogether, won its affections. He +was therefore permitted to superintend the landing of it. + +"Come, get on, Blackie," cried Olaf, giving the bull a push on the flank +as it stood on the gangway with its head high, tail slightly raised, +nostrils expanded, and eyes flashing. It glanced from side to side as +if to take a general survey of its new domains. + +Olaf advised it to "get on" again, but Blackie deigned to take no +further notice than by a deep-toned internal rumbling. + +"Not unlike Mount Hecla when it is going to explode," said Biarne, +laughing. + +"Come back, boy, he will do you a mischief," cried Gudrid in some alarm. + +"Why, Olaf," said Karlsefin, "your pet is going to be disobedient. +Speak louder to him." + +Instead of speaking louder Olaf quietly grasped the brute's tail and +gave it a twist. + +The effect was wonderful and instantaneous. The huge animal rushed +wildly along the gangway, leaped across the beach, making the pebbles +fly as he went, scampered over the green turf and plunged into the +forest, kicking up his heels, flourishing his tail and bellowing in +frantic delight! + +Most of the cows went slowly and placidly along the gangway, and landed +with easy-going satisfaction expressed in their patient faces, to the +supreme contempt of Freydissa, who said she wished that they had all +been bulls. There was one young heifer amongst them, however, which +proved an exception to the rule. It glared savagely round, as if in +imitation of the bull, refused point-blank to land, swerved from side to +side of the gangway, backed right into the ship at the risk of its neck +and limbs, attempted to charge the men, created dire confusion and alarm +among the poultry, and finally fell off the gangway into the water, and +scrambled on shore in a way that must have thrilled Freydissa's heart +with admiration--although she did not say so, but maintained a grim +silence all the time. + +Next came the sheep, which, owing perhaps to sea-sickness, or +home-sickness, or some other cause, looked remarkably sheepish, and +walked on shore with as much solemnity as if each had been attending the +funeral of the rest. There were about twenty of these, and after them +came a dozen or so of Icelandic ponies, which, although somewhat more +active than the sheep, were evidently suffering in their spirits from +the effects of the recent voyage. One of them, however, on feeling the +soft turf under his feet, attempted to neigh, without much success, and +another said something that sounded more like a horse-laugh than +anything else. + +Then followed the fowls, some of which walked, some flew, and others +fluttered, according to their varying moods, with an immense deal of +fuss and cackling, which was appropriately capped by the senior cock +mounting on one of the huts and taking possession of the land with an +ecstatic crow. + +The procession was brought up by the ducks, which waddled out of the +ship, some with an expression of grave surprise, some with "quacks" of +an inquiring nature, others with dubious steps and slow, while a few, +with an eye to the "main chance" made ineffectual dabs at little +roughnesses in their pathway, in the hope that these might turn out to +be edible. + +At last all were landed and driven up into the woods, where they were +left without any fear being entertained as to their going astray, seeing +that they were guarded by several fine dogs, which were too much +associated with the men as companions to be included in the foregoing +list of the lower animals. + +"Shall we set the nets?" said Hake, going up to Karlsefin, who was busy +arranging the principal hut, while the men were bringing their goods and +chattels on shore. "You know we saw a salmon leap from a pool on Little +River. Doubtless they are in the lake also." + +"Try it, Hake, by all means. Go with your brother in the little boat +and set them where you think best. Fresh salmon for supper would be a +rare treat just now. Are you sure it _was_ a salmon you saw, and not a +large trout?" + +"Sure? Ay, as sure as I am that a horse is not a cow," replied Hake, +smiling. + +"Go then, and luck go with you." + +The nets were soon set in the bay, near the point of the ness on which +the huts were built, and near to which a small mountain-stream entered +the lake. + +Suddenly a shrill angry voice was heard issuing from one of the smaller +huts near the lake. It was Freydissa storming at poor Bertha. There +was an occasional bass growl intermingled with it. That was Thorward +remonstrating. + +"Poor Bertha," said Karlsefin to Biarne, who was standing beside him at +the time, "she has a hard mistress." + +"Poor Thorward," said Biarne, "he has a tough wife." + +"Thorward will cure or kill her," rejoined Karlsefin, with a laugh. "He +is a long-suffering man, and very tender to women withal, but he is not +made of butter." + +Biarne shook his head. He evidently had not much opinion of Thorward's +resolution when opposed by the will and passion of such a termagant as +Freydissa. + +"How much better 'twould have been," said he, "if Thorward had married +her maid--the sweet little fair-haired blue-eyed Bertha." + +"Why, Biarne, methinks that _thou_ art somewhat like to try that plan," +said his friend, looking at him in surprise, for he had spoken with much +enthusiasm. + +"Not I, man," returned Biarne, with a smile and a shake of the head. +"It is long since my heart was buried in Iceland. I am doomed to be an +old bachelor now." + +They both listened at this point, for the domestic brawl in the small +hut seemed to be waxing furious. Thorward's voice was not heard so +often, but when it did sound there was an unusually stern tone in it, +and Freydissa's became so loud that her words were audible. + +"It has been killed, I tell you, Bertha, by sheer carelessness. If you +had fed it properly it would have been as well as the others. _Don't_ +say you did your best for it. You didn't. You _know_ you didn't. +You're a smooth-faced vixen. You are. Don't speak. Don't speak back, +I say. Hold your tongue. You killed that kitten by carelessness." + +"If you don't hold your tongue, wife," said Thorward, in a loud stern +voice, "I'll kill the cat too." + +There was a pause here, as if the threat had taken away Freydissa's +breath. + +"Oho! that's the poor little kitten," whispered Karlsefin to Biarne, +referring to one of a litter that had been born at sea, "that was nigh +eaten by one of the dogs. Bertha had no hand in its death. I wonder it +lived so long." + +"Kill the cat?" shrieked Freydissa, stamping her foot. + +This was instantly followed by an unearthly caterwaul and the sudden +appearance of a dark object in the air, which, issuing from the door of +the hut, flew upwards like a sky-rocket, described a wide curve, and +fell heavily about fifty yards out into the lake. Next moment Freydissa +sprang from the hut and stood with clasped hands on the shore in +speechless horror. Thorward immediately after came forth with a dark +frown on his face, and walked away into the forest. Freydissa stood +like a statue for some minutes, and then, seeing that the cat lay quite +motionless, she turned, and, with a face that was deadly pale, +re-entered the hut. + +"It was cruel," observed Karlsefin sadly. + +"But salutary, perhaps," said Biarne. + +"It may be so," rejoined the other; "but even if Thorward's end be a +good one, a right end does not justify a wrong action.--Ah! here comes +sunshine. How goes it, Gudrid?" + +Gudrid, who came forward at the moment, and knew nothing of what had +occurred, said that she wanted Karlsefin's help, if he could spare time, +in order to arrange some of the fixtures in their new home. + +Assuring her that she herself was the most valuable "fixture" in the +house, Karlsefin left his work and the two walked off together, while +Biarne went down to the ship. + +Meanwhile Thorward returned to his hut, where he found Freydissa alone, +sitting on a box with her face buried in her hands. She did not move, +so he sat down beside her with a subdued look. + +"Freydissa," he said, "I'm sorry I did that. 'Twas cruel, 'twas hard; +but it is done now, and can't be undone. Forgive me, lass, if you can." + +She raised her head suddenly, and gazed at him with a flushed +countenance. + +"Thorward," she said with energy, "if you had come with any other tone +or word I would have hated you with all the power of my heart--" + +"And that's a strong power, Freydissa." + +"It is. But now--" + +She threw her arms round her husband's neck and kissed him. Thorward +returned the kiss with the vigour of a man who is wont to give back more +than he gets. + +"Thanks, my girl," said he, rising, "thanks. That puts my heart at +ease. As for the poor cat, she's beyond the influence of anger or +repentance now; but trust me, Freydissa, I shall fetch you the +handsomest cat that can be had for love or money in all Greenland, or +Iceland; ay, even if I should have to make a special voyage to get hold +of it." + +Thus did Thorward and Freydissa fall out, and thus were they reconciled, +on the first day in their new home in Vinland. + +Talking this matter over with Thorward next day, Karlsefin took occasion +to give his friend some sage advice. + +"Depend upon it, Thorward," said he, "no good ever comes of quarrelling +or violence, but, on the contrary, much evil. 'Tis well that you +confessed your fault to her, else had she ever after held you in light +esteem; because, although _she_ deserved reproof, the cat did not +deserve to be killed." + +"Beshrew me!" + +"Nay," interrupted Karlsefin, with a laugh, "_that_ is the last thing +you ought to say, seeing that you have had so much beshrewing already." + +"Well, well," said Thorward, "thou art wonderfully smart at giving good +advice." + +"Would that I could say thou wert equally smart at taking it! However, +I have hope of thee, Thorward. Come, let us go see what the nets have +produced. I observe Hake and Heika rowing to land." + +It was found that the fishermen had loaded their boat with magnificent +trout of all sizes--some above five or six pounds' weight--besides a +large quantity of excellent fish of other kinds, but not a single salmon +had been taken. Nevertheless they had good reason to be content with +their success, for the supply was sufficient to provide a hearty supper +for the whole party, so that the first night in the new home,--like the +first night in the new land,--was a merry one. + + + +CHAPTER ELEVEN. + +SETTLING DOWN--HAKE PROVES THAT HIS ARMS, AS WELL AS HIS LEGS, ARE +GOOD--A WONDERFUL FISHING INCIDENT, WHICH ENDS IN A SCENE BETWEEN +FREYDISSA AND KRAKE. + +The little hamlet on the Vinland lake, which had been so long silent and +deserted, resounded from that time forth with the voices and activities +of energetic labourers, for these adventurous Norsemen had much to do +before their new home could be made comfortable. + +The forest and undergrowth around had to be cleared; the huts, of which +there were six, had to be cleaned out, fitted up with new parchment in +the windows--for there was no glass in those days--and new thatch on the +roofs, besides being generally repaired; additional huts had to be built +for the people, pens for the sheep, and stabling for the cattle, all of +which implied felling and squaring timber, while the smaller articles of +household furniture and fittings kept the people generally in full +occupation. Of course a party had to be told off as hunters for the +community, while another party were set to attend to the nets in the +lake, and a third, under the special charge of Karlsefin, went out at +intervals to scour the woods, with the double purpose of procuring food +and investigating the character and resources of the new land. + +In regard to this last these settlers had every reason to be satisfied. +The country appeared to be boundless in extent, and was pleasantly +diversified in form; the waters teemed with fish, the land was rich with +verdure, and the forests swarmed with game, large and small. + +One day Karlsefin and Biarne, attended by Hake and several men, went out +for a ramble of exploration in the direction of the small river, or +branch of the large river, mentioned in a previous chapter. Some of the +party were armed with bows and arrows, others had spears, the leader and +his friend carried short spears or javelins. All wore their swords and +iron head-pieces, and carried shields. Indeed, no party was ever +allowed to go beyond the neighbourhood of the settlement without being +fully armed, for although no natives had yet been seen, it was quite +possible, nay, highly probable, that when they did appear, their arrival +would be sudden and unexpected. + +As they advanced, they heard a rustle of leaves behind a knoll, and next +instant a large deer bounded across their path. Karlsefin hurled his +spear with sudden violence, and grazed its back. Biarne flung his +weapon and missed it. There was an exclamation of disappointment among +the men, which, however, was turned into a cheer of satisfaction when +Hake let fly an arrow and shot it through the heart. So forcibly was +the shaft sent that it passed quite through the animal, and stood, +bloodstained and quivering, in the stem of a tree beyond, while the deer +leaped its own height into the air, and fell stone-dead upon the sward. + +"A brave shot--excellently done!" exclaimed Karlsefin, turning to the +young Scot with a look of admiration; "and not the first or second time +I have seen thee do something of the same sort, from which I conclude +that it is not chance, but that your hand is always quick, and your eye +generally true. Is it not so?" + +"I never miss my mark," said Hake. + +"How now? you _never_ miss your mark? It seems to me, young man, that +though your air is modest, your heart and words are boastful." + +"I never boast," replied Hake gravely. + +"Say you so?" cried Karlsefin energetically, glancing round among the +trees. "Come, clear yourself in this matter. See you yonder little +bird on the topmost branch of that birch-tree that overhangs the stream? +It is a plain object, well defined against the sky. Touch it if you +can." + +"That little bird," said Hake, without moving, "is not _my mark_. I +never make a mark of the moon, nor yet of an object utterly beyond the +compass of my shafts." + +"Well, it _is_ considerably out of range," returned Karlsefin, laughing; +"but come, I will test you. See you the round knot on the stem of +yonder pine? It is small truly, so small that I can barely see it, +nevertheless it is not more than half a bow-shot off. Do you object to +make _that_ your mark?" + +The words had scarcely left his lips when an arrow stood quivering in +the knot referred to. + +With an exclamation and look of surprise Karlsefin said it must have +been a chance, and Biarne seemed inclined to hold the same opinion; but +while they were yet speaking, Hake planted another arrow close by the +side of the first. + +"Once more, Hake," said Krake, who stood close behind the archer; +"there's a saying in Ireland that there's good fortune in odd numbers: +try it again." + +The Scot readily complied, and sent a third shaft into the knot, with +its head touching the heads of the other two arrows. + +"Enough, enough, your arms are as good as your legs," said Karlsefin. +"Ye are a valuable thrall, Hake, and Leif Ericsson has reason to be +grateful to King Olaf of Norway for his gift.--Here, two of you, sling +that deer on a pole and bear it to Gudrid. Tell her how deftly it was +brought down, and relate what you have seen just now. And hark 'ee," he +added, with a peculiar smile, "there is no occasion to say anything +about what occurred before the successful shot. It always adds to the +value of a good story that it be briefly as well as pithily told, and +disencumbered from unnecessary details. A wise tongue is that which +knows when to wag and when to lie still.--Come, Biarne, we will proceed +in our examination of this stream." + +Leaving behind them the two men who were to return to the huts with the +deer, they proceeded down the banks of Little River, until they came to +the pool where Hake and his brother had seen the salmon leap. On the +way down, however, the leader had been convinced of the fact that many +salmon were there, having seen several rise, and observed others passing +over some of the pebbly shallows. + +"It was here, was it not," asked Biarne, "that you and your brother saw +the salmon leaping on the occasion of your first visit?" + +"It was," replied Hake. + +"At what part of the pool?" + +"Just below the tail of the island, where the water is deep, and rolls +with numberless oily ripples." + +"Ha! a likely spot," said Karlsefin. + +At that moment a salmon leaped out of the pool, as if to assure him that +Hake's statement was true, and immediately afterwards another fish rose +and flourished its fan-like tail, as if to make assurance doubly sure. + +For some time they went about examining that part of the river, which, +the reader will remember, has been described as being divided for some +distance by a long island into two streams, which again united after +spreading out into a broad rippling shallow. Here Biarne was very +silent and very close in his inspection of the bed of the river, +particularly at the top and lower end of the island. + +"It appears to me as if some plan were rolling in your head, Biarne," +said Karlsefin; "what may it be?" + +"Truly a plan is forming in my brain. Simple enough too, only the +details require consideration." + +"Well, we must now return home, so we can discuss it on the way." + +"You know of our custom in Iceland," said Biarne, as they retraced their +steps, "in regard to a river which is similar to this in the matter of +having two channels--they shut off the water from one channel and catch +the fish when the bed is dry." + +"Know it? Ay, I know it well; why, man, how comes it that this did not +occur to me before? We will have it tried, and that without delay. +What is worth doing at all is worth doing at once, unless it can be +clearly shown that there shall be distinct gain by delay. As this +cannot be shown on the present occasion we will begin to-morrow." + +Accordingly, in pursuance of this resolve, Karlsefin went down to the +island on Little River with a large party of men, and set to work. +Biarne undertook to superintend what may be termed the engineering +operations, and Thorward, who was a handy fellow, directed the +mechanical details. + +First of all, Biarne fixed on the spot at the top of the island where a +dam was to be thrown across the right branch of the stream--that being +the channel which was to be run dry--and planned the direction in which +it was to be placed and the form it was to take. Then strong stakes +were driven into the bed of the river all across the head of that +branch. While this was being done Thorward marked off some tall +straight trees in the forest, and set men to cut them down, while +Karlsefin directed, and with his own hands aided, a party appointed to +collect large piles of earth, sand, stones, mud, and branches, on the +river's bank. + +Although the men were numerous and active, the work was so extensive +that it was sunset before all the stakes were driven, the first of the +heavy logs laid down in the bed of the stream, and the rest of the +material collected in readiness on the banks. Having completed these +preparations they returned to the huts and made arrangements for a grand +effort on the following day. + +Early in the morning nearly the whole body of the people set off to +Little River, leaving the settlement in charge of one or two men who +chanced at that time to be sick. Of course Olaf was with them, armed +with a huge iron hook fastened to the end of a stout pole. All the +women also went, being quite as anxious as the men to witness the sport. + +The island reached, Karlsefin divided his party into two bands. The +smaller body, numbering about twenty-five, were stationed in the water +at the lower end of the channel, at equal distances from each other, so +as to extend from the tail of the island to the right bank of the +stream. These carried strong poles about seven feet long, and were +placed there to frighten back any fish that might attempt to rush down +the river. The rest of the men went in a body to the dam, and there +awaited orders. + +When all was ready Karlsefin said to them--"My lads, if we would act +well we must act together. Here is the plan on which you are to +proceed. On getting the word from Biarne to begin, you will all set to +work to dam up the water, right across from this bank to the head of the +island. You see that we have already done the work in part, so that it +only requires to be completed, and to have the centre gap stopped up. +That will be the difficult point, for the great rush of water will be +there, and you will have to do it quickly--to heave in the logs and +stones and rubbish, not forgetting the branches and the turf, which will +keep all together--as if your very lives depended on your speed. A +certain number of you, who shall be told off presently, will do your +best at the same time to deepen the channel of the other branch of the +stream. When this is done you will have a little breathing space, for +doubtless the water will take a little time to run off. You will take +advantage of this time to get your hooks and poles and landing-nets in +readiness. For the rest your own sense will guide you.--Now, Biarne, +tell off the men and go to work." + +Reader, you should have seen the countenance of little Olaf Ericsson +when all this was being said and done! Many a time had he seen nets +hauled and fish taken, and often had he dreamt of netting whales and +other sea-monsters, but never before had he imagined such a thing as +laying the bed of a river dry; and his exuberant fancy depicted to him +scenes which it is not possible to describe. His visage glowed, and his +large blue eyes glared with excitement, while his little bosom heaved +and his heart beat high with expectation. + +This condition of course increased tenfold when he saw the men cast off +more or less of their upper garments and spring to the work with the +energy of lunatics. In his own small way he carried logs and branches +and mud and stones till he was as dirty and dishevelled as the best of +them; and when Gudrid looked horrified at him, and said that it would be +next to impossible to clean him, he burst into such a fit of laughter +that he lost his balance, fell head over heels into the river, which was +only knee-deep at the place, and came out more than half-washed in a +moment! + +"You see it won't be so difficult as you think," he cried, laughing and +gasping when he emerged; "another plunge like that would make me quite +clean, aunty." + +"Ho! Olaf, were you after a salmon?" cried Swend, as he passed with a +large log on his shoulder. + +"Not I, Swend; it was a whale I was after." + +"You don't say that, boy?" cried Krake, in a tone of admiration. "Was +he a big one?" + +"Oh! frightful--so big that--that--I couldn't see him all." + +"Couldn't see him _at all_? Ah, then, he _was_ a big one, sure. The +things we can't see at all are always the most wonderful." + +"Foolish boy," said Gudrid; "come, I will wring the water out of your +clothes." + +"'Tis hardly worth while, aunty," said Olaf, coming on shore; "I'll be +as wet, as ever in a few minutes." + +The careful Gudrid nevertheless wrung as much water out of his dripping +garments as was possible without taking them off. By the time this was +done the dam had been completed, and the men stood on the banks of the +river wiping off and wringing out the superabundant mud and water from +their clothes, besides getting ready hooks, nets, and staves. Some of +the nets were several fathoms in length. Others were small bags +fastened to wooden rings at the end of long poles. + +Presently a shout was heard from the men at the lower end of the pool, +and they were seen to use their staves smartly several times, as some of +the fish, alarmed no doubt at the strange doings above, endeavoured to +shoot down the river. Ere long the stony ground on which these men +stood became a rippling shallow, and, soon afterwards, a neck of land +connecting the lower end of the island with the shore. They therefore +abandoned it and rejoined their comrades higher up. The fish were now +imprisoned in a pool, retreat having been effectually cut off above and +below, and the whole river diverted into the bed of its left branch. + +As the water lowered it became obvious that the pool thus isolated was +absolutely swarming with salmon, for they could be seen darting hither +and thither in shoals, making for the deeper parts of the pool, and +jostling one another under stones. Gradually little islets began to +appear as the water continued to sink, and then the fish seemed to be +seized with a panic. They shot like silver arrows from bank to bank--up +the pool and down again, as if enjoying a piscatorial country dance, or, +in blind flight, rushed clear out upon the pebbly islets, in half dozens +at a time, where they leaped, slid, twirled, and bounded frantically, in +what bore some resemblance to a piscatorial reel. Then, slipping into +the water again, and recovering their fins and tails, they shot away to +encounter similar misfortune elsewhere, or to thrust their noses under +stones, and--entertaining the same delusive notions that are said to +characterise the ostrich--imagine that they were not seen! + +By degrees the islets enlarged until they joined here and there, and, +finally, the state of things being inverted, the bed of the stream +became a series of little ponds, which were absolutely boiling with +fish--not unlike, as Krake remarked, to the boiling springs of Iceland, +only that those boiled with heat instead of with living fish. + +And now commenced a scene such as, unquestionably, had not been +witnessed there since Vinland was created. The Norsemen were half mad +with excitement. The women ran up and down the banks clapping their +hands and shouting with delight, while Freydissa, unable to contain +herself, cast appearances to the dogs, leaped among the men, and joined +in the fray. + +"The big pool first; this way, lads!" shouted Karlsefin, as he seized +the end of a long net and dragged it towards the pool in question. + +Twenty willing hands assisted. The net encircled the pool and was +thrust in; men with poles forced one side of it down to the bottom, and +the two ends were hauled upon might and main. At the same moment, other +men went with hand nets to smaller pools, and, scooping up the fish, +sent them writhing and struggling through the air towards the bank, +where Gudrid, Thora, Astrid, Gunhild, Sigrid, and even timid Bertha, +sought in vain to restrain their struggles and prevent them from +wriggling back into the almost dry bed of the stream. + +"Haul away with heart, men!" shouted Biarne, who was at one end of the +large net. + +Already the stout ropes were strained to the uttermost--at last the net +came out bursting with salmon; more hands were hailed; it was run over +the pebbles, up the bank, and onwards to a flat open spot, where, with a +shout, it was emptied on the greensward. + +Talk of silver bars! The simile is wretched. No simile is of any avail +here. The brightest and freshest silver bars ever cast might shine as +much as these salmon did, but they could not glitter so, for they could +not wriggle and spring and tumble. They could not show that delicate +pink which enhanced the silvery sheen so wondrously. They could not +exhibit that vigorous life which told of firm flakes--suggestive of +glorious meals for many a day to come. Pooh! even their intrinsic value +could not suggest anything in this case,--for all the silver bars that +ever were coined on earth could not have purchased the appetites which +made the mouths of these Norsemen to water, as they gazed in admiration +on that vast hecatomb of splendid salmon! They absolutely danced round +the fish--it might almost be said they danced _with_ them--in triumphant +glee! + +"Come, come," cried Karlsefin loudly; "to work! to work! Ye may dance +after that is done. Here, sweep this pool also." + +With a cheer the men ran down the bank, and little Olaf followed, having +already used his hook with such effect that he had pulled six large fish +out of various holes and added them to the general pile. + +"Take care, Olaf, that you don't fall in and get drowned," cried Biarne +as he ran past. + +"Hurrah!" shouted Olaf, with a flourish of his weapon, which made the +narrowest possible miss of _cleeking_ Tyrker by the nose. + +"Have a care!" roared the Turk. + +"You've much need to say that," replied Olaf, with a laugh, for Tyrker +at that moment set his heel upon a salmon, fell, and rolled heavily down +the bank. But Tyrker was tough. He rose with a growl and a grin and +ran on to join his comrades. + +A second pool was netted, and with the like result. As the net was +being dragged forth, Olaf saw that several fish had escaped. He struck +in his hook at random, for the pools, being by that time a thick +compound of mud and water, could not be seen into. + +"Oh! I've got him!" he shouted, struggling with the handle of his hook, +which jerked so violently that the sturdy little fellow was almost +thrown to the ground. + +"Hold on!" cried Thorward, running to his aid. + +"Why, Olaf, what's this? Have a care. Not too fast. There. Hallo!-- +an eel." + +And so it was--an enormous eel, that went twirling round the pole in +wondrous fashion until it freed itself, and, after twisting round the +limbs of Olaf and Thorward, who in vain sought to hold it fast, made off +over the wet stones as if they were its native element, and slid into +another large pool, where it disappeared. + +"Never mind, Olaf," cried Thorward, with a laugh, "you'll catch hold of +it again. Hook away at it, lad. Don't give." + +A tremendous shriek arose from the women on the bank at this juncture. + +"Oh! look! look at Freydissa!" cried Gunhild, pointing wildly to the +river bed. + +And there Freydissa stood--up to the arm-pits in mud and salmon! + +Whether she had fallen in or been pushed in no one could tell, but +unquestionably she _was_ in, having gone in, too, head-foremost, so +that, although she had struggled right-end up she reappeared coated with +mud to an extent that might have suggested a sculptor's clay model--had +sculptors been known to the Norsemen of those days. + +There was an irresistible roar of laughter at first, and then loud +expressions of condolence and sympathy, while a dozen strong, but wet +and dirty, hands were stretched forth to the rescue. + +"Here, lay hold of my hand, poor thing," cried Krake; "there, now, don't +cry; it would only be wasting tears, with so much water on your face +already." + +If anything could have made Freydissa cry it would have been that +remark, for it implied that she was inclined to weep, while nothing was +further from her thoughts at that time. + +She did, however, grasp Krake's hand, but instead of aiding herself by +it to get out of the hole, she gave it such a vigorous and hearty pull +that Krake went souse into the mud beside her. Before he could recover +himself Freydissa had put her knee on his body, and, using him as a +foot-rest, thrust him deeper down as she stepped out. + +The delight with which this was hailed is beyond description, and many a +year passed after that before men grew tired of twitting Krake about the +pleasant mud-bath that had been given him by Freydissa on the occasion +of the celebrated take of salmon at Little River in Vinland. + + + +CHAPTER TWELVE. + +SAGE CONVERSE BETWEEN HAKE AND BERTHA--BIARNE IS OUTWITTED--A MONSTER IS +SLAIN, AND SAVAGES APPEAR ON THE SCENE. + +Not long after this an event occurred which produced great excitement in +the new settlement; namely, the appearance of natives in the woods. It +occurred under the following circumstances. + +One morning Karlsefin gave orders for one of the exploring parties to be +got ready to go out immediately. Karlsefin's plan from the beginning +had been to class his men in two divisions. One half stayed at home to +work, the other half searched the land,--always taking care, however, +not to travel so far but that they could return home in the evening. +They were careful also not to wander far from each other. Sometimes +Karlsefin went with the exploring party, at other times stayed at home +to superintend the work there, while Biarne or Thorward filled his +place. On the occasion in question Biarne was in charge. + +Soon after the party had started, Hake, who was one of them, observed a +female figure disappear round a copse near the shores of the lake. At +that part they were about to strike off into the thick woods, so Hake +went up to Biarne and asked leave to go along by the borders of the +lake, saying that he could overtake the party again before they had +reached the Willow Glen, a well-known rendezvous of the hunters and +explorers of the colony. + +"Go as thou wilt, Hake," replied Biarne; "only see to it that ye +overtake us before noon, as I intend to go on a totally new path +to-day." + +The youth left with a light step, and, on overtaking the female, found, +as he had expected, that it was Bertha. + +"You wander far from home to-day," he said, with a deferential +salutation, for Hake's bondage had not robbed him of his breeding. + +"I love to wander," answered Bertha, blushing. + +Poor Bertha, she could not help blushing. It was her unfortunate nature +to do so. When her feelings were touched--ever so little--she blushed, +and then she blushed _because_ she had blushed, and blushed again to +think herself so silly! + +"I fear it may be somewhat dangerous to wander far," said Hake, +stopping, for Bertha had stopped and seated herself on the stump of a +fallen tree. + +"Dangerous! Why so?" + +"Why, because Skraelingers may find us out any day, and if they should +come upon you unawares so far from home they might carry you off, and no +one would be aware that you were gone until too late to pursue." + +"I never thought of that," returned Bertha, with a slightly troubled +look. "Well, I shall be more careful in future. But how come you to be +wandering here alone, Hake? did I not hear your name called this morning +among those appointed to go forth and search out what is good and +beautiful and useful in the land?" + +"Most true, Bertha, and I have gone forth, and not gone far, and yet +have found something both good and beautiful and useful in the land." + +"And pray what may that be?" asked the maiden, with a look of surprise. + +Hake did not answer, but the expression of his eyes was more eloquent +than speech. + +"Nay, then," said Bertha, looking hastily away, and again blushing--as a +matter of course! "I am no reader of riddles; and I hate riddles--they +perplex me so. Besides, I never could find them out. But, Hake, has +your party gone yet?" + +"Yes, some time ago." + +"And are you left behind?" + +"No, I have leave to go by the margin of the lake." + +"Then if you put off time talking with me you will not find it easy to +overtake them; but I forgot: I suppose you count it an easy matter to +overtake ordinary men?" + +"I shall not find it difficult," replied the youth briefly; and then, +perceiving that Bertha felt uneasy--apparently at the tenor of the +conversation--he quietly changed it by remarking that he preferred to +walk by the lake for several reasons, one of which was that it reminded +him of Scotland. + +"Ah, you profess to love Scotland very much," said Bertha archly, "but +your brother evidently loves it more than you do." + +"With good reason, too," replied Hake, "for it has given him a bride, +and it had no such favours for me." + +"Indeed! what is her name?" asked the maiden, with much interest. + +"Emma." + +"Poor Emma," sighed Bertha; "but I hope that Heika will be freed one day +and return to his native land to wed Emma. Perchance by that time +Scotland may smile upon you too, and give you cause to love it better." + +"I love it well already," said Hake, with enthusiasm, "yet am I content +to stay here." + +"For shame, Hake! you do not deserve to be a Scot if you mean what you +say." + +"I mean what I say, yet do I deserve to be a Scot." + +"Come, tell me, then, what this Scotland of yours is like. I suppose +you deem it more beautiful than Iceland?" + +The youth smiled. "It is not more _wonderful_ than Iceland. I can say +that with truth--but it is passing fair to look upon. It is a land of +mountain and flood, of heath-clad braes and grassy knowes. Its mountain +peaks rise bare and rugged to the skies, where lordly eagles soar. Its +brawling burns in their infancy dash down these rugged steeps, but as +they grow older flow on through many a hazel dell, where thrush and +blackbird fill the woods with melody--through many flowering pastures, +where cattle browse and lambkins skip on the sunny braes. Wild-fowl +breed on its reedy lochs, and moor-fowl dwell on its heather hills. Its +waters teem with the spotted trout and the royal salmon. Temperate +breezes fan its cheeks, and beauty, in form and colour, revels +everywhere. Its sons are lovers of their native land, and its daughters +are wondrous fair." + +"And yet it would seem," said Bertha, "that not one is fair enough for +you?" + +"Nay, Bertha, thy speech is hardly fair. The heart cannot command its +affection," said Hake, with a smile, "but I regret it not." + +"And where does Emma dwell?" asked Bertha. + +"Beside my father, near the shores of Forth, not far from a noted town +and castle that stand on the summit of a rocky ridge. It is named after +Edwin, a Northumbrian king. A sweet romantic spot--my own dear native +town. Beside it stands a mountain, which, those who have travelled in +far southern lands tell us, bears some resemblance to a couching lion. +But I never saw a lion, and know not what truth there is in that." + +"You almost make me wish to see that land," said Bertha, with a sigh. + +"I would you might see it and that it were my fortune to show it to +you." + +"That is not likely," said Bertha, with a little laugh. + +"I know not. The most unlikely things happen, and often those that seem +most likely do not come to pass. What more unlikely than that Karlsefin +should forsake the religion of his fathers? Yet Karlsefin is now a +Christian." + +"Do you know, Hake, much about the nature of this new religion that has +come amongst us, and made so many people change?" asked Bertha, with +sudden earnestness. + +"To say truth I don't know much about it. Only this do I know, that +Karlsefin says the foundation of it is God and man united in Jesus +Christ, and that the guiding principle of it is _love_. If so, it must +be a sweet religion, and, as far as Karlsefin is concerned, it seems +both good and true; but there are some of its professors whom I know +whose guiding star is self--not love--which goes rather against it, +methinks." + +"You do not reason well, Hake; that is against the professors, not +against the religion." + +"True; but this religion is said to change those who profess it--what if +they are not changed?" + +"Why, then, they are _false_ professors," said Bertha, with a smile. + +"It may be so; I know not. But if you would have further light on the +point, Karlsefin will gladly give it you." + +"Well, I will go find him and inquire," said Bertha, rising; "I have +kept you too long already from your comrades.--Farewell." + +"Farewell, Bertha," replied the youth, gazing after her as she tripped +lightly away and disappeared behind a thicket. Then, turning into the +woods, he went off at his utmost speed in the direction of the Willow +Glen. + +"Just in time, Hake," said Biarne, as the Scot approached; "we are about +to start off westward to-day, and go as far inland as we can before +dark. I have long had a desire to search out the land in that +direction. From the distance of these blue ridges, the size of our lake +and river, and other signs, I am of opinion that this is a great land-- +not an island." + +"It may be so," replied Hake, looking round on the vast and beautiful +landscape; "I should like well to traverse it. If a thrall may be +permitted to remark, I would say that a spirited chief would explore +somewhat farther than a day's march from home." + +"Perchance a spirited chief might see fit to have his homestead put well +in order before undertaking explorations for his amusement," replied +Biarne, who was not much pleased with Hake's speech. + +The Scot made no answer, and after that the party advanced to the +westward, sometimes clearing their way through dense thickets, sometimes +walking under the branching canopy of large trees, and frequently coming +to more open places, in many of which there were little ponds swarming +with wild-fowl. + +Towards the afternoon they came to a rocky ridge which was crowned with +trees. On the other side of it was a deep gorge, near the end of which +some large animal was observed sitting on its haunches. + +"Hist! a brown bear!" whispered Biarne. + +The bear looked up and growled, for it had heard the approach of the +party. Nevertheless it appeared to be in a sluggish as well as a sulky +humour, for it gave no indication of any intention either to attack or +run away, but sat still on its haunches swaying its huge head and +shoulders to and fro, and glowering--as Krake said--horribly. + +"A fierce monster truly!" observed Hake, fitting an arrow to his bow. + +Biarne laid his hand on Hake's arm. + +"Hast seen such a brute before?" he inquired. + +"Not I," replied Hake. + +"Wouldst like to see how the Skraelingers of Greenland treat the white +bears of their land, when so few as only two men chance to meet one in +this fashion?" + +"I should like it well." + +"Good--I will show you; but first I must explain the manner of it. When +two Skraelingers see a bear they go up to him with spears. On +approaching him they separate. One settles that he is to kill him, the +other agrees to distract his attention. He who is to kill approaches on +the side next the _heart_. His comrade goes up and pricks the bear on +the _other_ side. The bear turns full on him who wounds, exposes his +heart-side, and is instantly thrust through by him who is to kill. Dost +understand?" + +"Perfectly," replied Hake. + +"Perhaps you would like to join me in such an adventure, though of +course there is some danger," said Biarne, who was very anxious to +punish Hake for his late advice by giving him a good fright. + +Hake smiled in a grim fashion, and taking a short spear from one of his +comrades, looked at Biarne, pointed to the bear, and said: + +"Come!" + +They advanced together, Biarne also carrying a short spear, while their +comrades stood on the ridge and looked on with much interest. + +When Bruin saw the two men approach, he got up and showed himself to be +an uncommonly large bear indeed, insomuch that Biarne glanced at Hake +with some anxiety, and asked if he felt sure of himself, and wasn't +frightened. + +Hake laughed lightly, but made no other reply. + +"Well, then, have a care, and see that ye be prompt in action. I will +go to the left side and kill, being used to such work. Do you separate +from me here and give him the prick on the right side. Don't get +flurried. We must approach and act together. He seems inclined to meet +us half-way, and must not be trifled with; and, harkee, prick him well, +for methinks his hide will prove a tough one." + +Hake nodded, and separated from his companion. Seeing this the bear +stopped. It had been advancing with a rapidly increasing step, growling +all the way, and with an extremely savage aspect, but this movement of +the enemy perplexed it. Looking first on one side, and then on the +other, it remained in a state of uncertainty as to which of the two it +should attack. The enemy took advantage of this--both men ran in upon +it. As they did so the bear rose on its hind-legs, still glancing +savagely from one side to the other, and in this position appearing a +larger monster than it had seemed before. + +"Give it him sharply!" cried Biarne, delaying his death-thrust till the +proper time. + +Hake stepped close up to the bear, and plunged his spear into its side +with such vigorous good-will that it went straight through its heart, +and came out at the other side just under the shoulder. + +With a tremendous roar it fell and writhed on the ground in a dying +state, while a loud cheer burst from the men on the ridge. + +"Why did ye that?" cried Biarne fiercely, stepping up to Hake as though +he would strike him. "Was it not arranged that _I_ should kill him?" + +"The Fates arranged it otherwise," answered the Scot. "I felt afraid +that my fears might weaken my arm. To make sure, I gave him a good +thrust. Besides, did you not tell me that his hide was tough, and +advise me to prick him well?" + +Hake looked so innocent, and spoke so gently, that Biarne, who was a +good-natured fellow, laughed in spite of himself as he said-- + +"Truly thou didst prick him to some purpose. Well, I do not grudge thee +the honour, and unquestionably it was deftly done.--Here, two of you, +stay behind and skin this fellow. Cut off the best parts of the meat +also. Bears of this kind are not bad for food, I dare say. We will go +on a little farther, and return to you in a short time." + +Saying this Biarne resumed his march, followed by the rest of the men. + +They had not gone far, however, when one of the party uttered a sudden +exclamation, and pointed to footprints on a soft part of the ground. + +"Perhaps the bear's footprints," said one. + +"Too small and narrow for that," remarked another. + +"We shall trace them till we come to soft ground and make certain," said +Biarne. + +They did so, and after walking a hundred yards or so came to a sandy +piece, where the footprints were so clearly defined that there remained +no doubt they were those of a man. That the marks had not been made by +any wandering member of their own band, was evident also from the form +of the sole of the shoe, as indicated by the prints. + +"Now must we be ready to meet with men who may be foes, although I hope +they shall turn out to be friends," said Biarne. "Come, Hake, there may +be need for haste, therefore do you hie back before us and inform +Karlsefin what we have seen. We will follow as swiftly as may be, and +fetch your bear along with us." + +Hake started off at a smart run without a word of reply, and never +paused a moment until he reached the hamlet, which he found in a +considerable state of confusion and excitement. + +"What now?" demanded Karlsefin as Hake came forward. + +"Strange footprints have been seen, and--" + +"Strange footprints!" exclaimed Karlsefin. "Why, man, strange _men_ +have been seen by us, so I have stranger news to tell than thou. Biarne +is returning, of course?" + +"He is, with all the men, as fast as he can." + +"That's well. Now, Hake, get your weapons ready and help the men to +make preparations for the reception of the strangers. I go to set the +ship in order." + +Hake found, on inquiry, that one of a wood-cutting party having strayed +a little way beyond his fellows, but not far from the hamlet, had come +suddenly on a native who was crouching behind a rock and gazing intently +at the woodcutters. He was at the moment fitting an arrow to the string +of a short bow which he carried, and was so absorbed that he did not at +first observe the Norseman. The instant he saw him, however, he sprang +up and discharged an arrow, which the other avoided. The savage +immediately turned to fly, but the Norseman sprang after him and struck +him to the ground. At the same instant a dozen or more savages rushed +from the woods to the rescue, and the Norseman immediately ran back to +his comrades. More savages appeared, and the Norsemen, seeing that they +were greatly outnumbered, retreated to the hamlet. They were not +followed by the savages, but there could be no doubt that now the colony +had been discovered they were certain to receive a visit from them. +Whether that visit was likely to be amicable or otherwise remained to be +seen. + +Meanwhile Karlsefin and his men did their best to put the place in a +state of defence. A breastwork of large trees, which had been long ago +thrown all round the hamlet, was repaired and strengthened before dark, +and sentinels were posted around in all directions, so that when Biarne +arrived, somewhat late at night, he was amused as well as gratified to +find that unseen though well-known voices challenged him several times +as he drew near home, and that, finally, a rude but effectual barrier +stopped him altogether, until a friend from within conducted him to the +proper entrance. + +Thus the night passed away without anything transpiring, and at last the +longed-for dawn appeared. + + + +CHAPTER THIRTEEN. + +A GREAT BUT COMPARATIVELY BLOODLESS FIGHT, WHICH ENDS PECULIARLY, AND +WITH SINGULAR RESULTS. + +When the sun rose above the trees next day, Karlsefin began to think +that the natives had left the place, for there was no sign of them +anywhere, and he was about to issue from behind his defences and go out +to reconnoitre, when a man came running from the ship shouting +"Skraelingers!" + +It is probable that by that term he meant savages generally, because the +men who had been seen bore very little resemblance to the hairy savages +of Greenland. They were taller, though not stouter, and clothed in +well-dressed skins of animals, with many bright colours about them. But +whatever they were, the sensation they created among the Norsemen was +considerable, for it was found, on going to the margin of the lake, that +they were now approaching in canoes by water. This at once accounted +for the delay in their appearance. + +That their intentions were hostile was plain from the fact that the +canoes came on abreast of each other in regular order, while the men +shouted fiercely and brandished their weapons. There could not have +been fewer than three or four hundred of them. + +Karlsefin saw at once that his only chance of saving the ship was to go +on board of it and fight on the water. + +"Get on board all of you," he cried to those who stood beside him. +"Away, Biarne, Thorward, call in the outposts and have them on board +without delay. Here, Swend, Heika, Tyrker, station the men as they +arrive. Get up the war-screens round the sides of the ship; and, +harkee, give orders that the men use their weapons as little as +possible, and spare life. I shall want you on the poop, Hake. See that +no one throws down the gangway or loosens the ropes till the order is +given. I will see to the women.--Away!" + +Each man ran with speed to obey, for the case was urgent. + +Karlsefin found the women, with Olaf, assembled in the large house +waiting for orders. + +"Come," he cried; "not a moment to be lost. Give me your hand, Gudrid." + +He seized it as he spoke, and hurried down to the ship, where the men +were already trooping on board as fast as they could. The women were +soon put under cover out of the reach of missiles, and in a few minutes +more all were on board. Of course the cattle, and live stock generally, +being scattered about the hamlet, were left to their fate. Then the +ropes were cast loose, the gangway was thrown down, the ship was pushed +out into the bay, and the anchor let go. + +All this had barely been accomplished when the canoes came sweeping +round the nearest point of land and made straight for the ship, with the +foam curling at their bows. + +Then Karlsefin's voice rose loud and clear as he issued his final +commands. + +"My lads," he cried, "remember my orders about using your weapons as +little as possible. Be careful to throw only the smaller stones. Kill +no one if you can avoid it, but give as many of them the toothache as +you can. We must be friends with these people if we are to live in +peace here, and that won't be possible if we kill many of them." + +The men answered with a great shout, mingled with some laughter, which +latter was such a strange sound to hear on the eve of an engagement, +that the savages stopped short for a moment. But soon they came on +again with redoubled impetuosity. + +No sooner were they within range than the Norsemen rose up in a body and +hurled a shower of stones at them. They were evidently not prepared for +such artillery, for they again stepped short, but after a brief pause +once more advanced. Three times did they receive a shower of stones +before getting alongside. These hurt many, but disabled none, for, +according to orders, no heavy stones were used. When within a few yards +of the ship the canoes surrounded her and lay still while the savages +began to discharge arrows in abundance. The Norsemen kept well behind +the shields, which formed a screen round the ship, and replied with +stones, only a few of the best marksmen using arrows, when they saw a +chance to wound without killing any of the foe. + +Karlsefin stood exposed on the high poop with Hake and Heika beside him. +All three wore iron helmets, and the leader protected himself with his +shield. Heika devoted his attention to warding off missiles from his +brother, who, having to use his bow, could not manage a shield. + +Presently the savages made a grand assault. But the moment they came to +close quarters they found that they had to cope with a formidable foe, +for the Norsemen, using only bludgeons, knocked them down whenever they +came within reach, and one or two of the boldest among them who +succeeded in clambering up the sides were seized by the legs and arms +and hurled back into the lake as if they had been mere puppets. + +Thus beaten off they continued the arrow shower, and some of the +Norsemen were wounded. + +All this time Karlsefin stood close to the helm, looking sharply about +him, and whenever he saw a savage who was bolder and stouter than his +fellows, he made Hake send an arrow through his right hand. In this way +most of the best men among them were sent off howling with pain, and for +the time disabled. Suddenly a very tall active savage succeeded in +clambering up by the rudder unobserved, and leaping on the poop, stood +behind Karlsefin with uplifted club. Karlsefin, without turning quite +round, gave him a back-handed slap under the left ear and sent him +flying overboard. He fell into a canoe in his descent and sank it. + +At this juncture a number of the canoes were detached from the fight, +and Karlsefin observed, with much anxiety, that the savages were going +to ransack the houses. + +"Would that I were on shore with twenty of my best men!" he said +bitterly. "Send a shaft, Hake, at yonder fellow who leads. It is out +of range, I fear, but--ha! well hit!" he exclaimed, on seeing an arrow +from Hake's prompt hand strike the man full in the back. The savage +fell, and his comrades crowded round him. + +By that time others of the canoes had put ashore, and their owners ran +up to the crowd who surrounded the fallen leader. + +At this moment an incident occurred which put a most unexpected +termination to the fight. + +For a considerable time Olaf's huge pet, Blackie, had viewed the fight +with calm indifference from the heart of a thicket close by, in which he +chanced to be cooling himself at the time. Now, it happened that one of +the many arrows which were discharged by the savages on the offshore +side of the ship glanced from a neighbouring tree and hit the bull on +the flank. Associating the pain resulting therefrom with the group of +savages before him, Blackie at once elevated his tail, lowered his head, +and, with a bellow that would have shamed a thousand trumpets, charged +furiously down upon the foe. + +Horror-struck is but a feeble word to indicate the feelings of that foe! +Although, no doubt, some of them might have heard of, perhaps seen, the +ponderous and comparatively quiet bison of the Western prairies, none of +them had ever imagined anything so awful as a little black bull with +tremendous horns, blood-red nostrils, flashing eyes, and cat-like +activity. One awe-struck look they gave it, and then fled howling into +the woods. The sounds were so startling that those of the enemy still +round the ship were panic-stricken and made off by water as fast as +their fellows had escaped by land, leaving the Norsemen victorious! + +"Hurrah for Blackie!" shouted Olaf, who was wild with excitement and +delight. + +The cheer thus claimed was given with intense enthusiasm, and then the +ship was rowed back to the shore. + +Here a great prize was found, in the shape of twenty canoes, which had +been left by the party that had fled to the woods. These were carried +carefully up to the hamlet and placed in security. On the way up +another prize was found, which afterwards turned out to be of the utmost +importance. This was the wounded savage, who had been forsaken by his +friends when the bull charged, and who only escaped from the horns of +that infuriated animal by lying quite motionless beside a log which +fortunately chanced to be near him. + +"Take care, Krake; lift him gently," said Biarne, as he came up and +found that worthy turning the poor savage over as if he had been already +a dead carcase. "Let me see; the arrow does not seem to have gone far +in. He'll recover, perhaps. Come, Hake and Swend, lift his shoulders, +and run, Olaf, tell Astrid or one of the other women to--ha! Bertha, +well met. Here is a subject for your care. You are a good nurse, I'm +told." + +"I try to be," replied Bertha. + +"She who tries to be is sure to be," returned Biarne; "nursing, like +fighting, is an art, and must be acquired; though, to say truth, some +folk seem born to learn more rapidly than others, whether as regards +nursing or fighting. Have the poor fellow into the house, and do your +best for him, Bertha." + +While this was being said the native was lying on his back, looking very +stern, but pale. It is probable that the poor wretch expected to be +taken off summarily to have his eyes punched out, or to be roasted +alive,--for the natives of Vinland, no doubt, expected from their foes, +in those days, the same treatment that they accorded to them--although +the Saga says nothing to that effect. When, therefore, he was put into +a comfortable bed, had his wound dressed, and an agreeable though +strange drink given to him by the fair hands of Bertha, the expression +of his countenance seemed to imply that he believed himself to have +passed from earth and got into the happy hunting-grounds of his fathers. +If so, the increasing pain of his wound must have perplexed him not a +little. However, it is due to him to say that he bore his surprises and +pains with the uncomplaining resignation of a Stoic. + +Karlsefin employed the remainder of that day in strengthening his +defences and connecting them in such a way with that part of the shore +where his vessel lay, that there would be no possibility of surrounding +him in the event of future hostilities. + +This accomplished, he organised his men into three bands, which were to +be commanded respectively by Biarne, Thorward, and himself. These were +appointed to particular localities and duties in the little fortress-- +for it was now almost entitled to such an appellation. When night drew +on, sentinels were posted as before. But there was no alarm during the +night. The savages appeared to have had enough of fighting for that +time, and next morning's sun arose, as it was wont to do, on a peaceful +scene. + +"Do you think they will attack us again?" asked Gudrid as she sat at +breakfast. + +"I think not," replied her husband. "They cannot but know that we are +troublesome fellows to deal with, even when taken unawares." + +"I hope they won't go off without giving us a chance to show that we +desire to be friendly," observed Thorward. + +"No fear of that," said Biarne; "we have got one of their chiefs--at +least I think he is so, for he looks like one--and that is as good as a +string tied to their great toe." + +"By the way, how _is_ the chief, Bertha?" asked Karlsefin. + +"Much better this morning. He slept well, and is even now sitting up on +his bed. He looked so well, indeed, that I took the precaution to +fasten the door on the outside when I left him just now." + +"Ha! Didst fasten the window, wench?" cried Thorward, starting up and +hastening from the room. + +"Truly, no," remarked the girl, with a somewhat confused look; "I never +thought of the window." + +Thorward returned a minute later with a peculiar smile. + +"He's all safe," said he; "I peeped through a small shot-hole in the +parchment, and saw him sitting there meditating as deeply as if he hoped +to meditate himself out of his prison." + +"Not a difficult thing to do that," said Karlsefin. "I suspect that +most prisoners manage to free themselves in that way pretty often! But +who comes here in such hot haste? Why, Swend, what's i' the wind now?" + +"The Skraelingers are coming," said he. "They come unarmed, and only +ten of them." + +"Oho! good," exclaimed Karlsefin, rising. "Come, methinks I see my way +out of this difficulty. Fetch me nine of our smartest men, Biarne. I +will go forth with them unarmed, to meet those messengers of peace. You +and Thorward will keep the defences, to be ready for any emergency. Let +the Scottish brothers be among the nine." + +When the selected men had assembled, their leader took them aside and +conferred with them for a few minutes, after which he led them towards +that part of the defences nearest the woods, when they saw the ten +natives approaching holding up their empty hands and making other +demonstrations of a peaceful nature. Far away on the heights in the +background the whole army of savages could be seen watching the +proceedings of their messengers. + +When these latter had come within about a hundred yards of the hamlet, +they selected a low grassy knoll in an open spot, in full view of both +parties. Here they sat down in a row and made signs to the Norsemen to +approach. + +"Now, lads, we will accept their invitation," said Karlsefin; "follow +me." + +With that he passed through the opening in the defences, holding up his +hands as he went to show that he was unarmed, his followers doing the +same. Karlsefin went up to the native who appeared to be the chief of +the band, and, with a bland smile, took his hand gently and shook it. + +If the savage did not understand the shake of the hand, he evidently +understood the smile, for he returned it and sat down again. Karlsefin +and his men did the same, and for a few moments the two rows of men sat +looking benignantly at one another in silence. The savage chief then +spoke. Of course Karlsefin shook his head and touched his ear, brow, +and lips, by way of intimating that he heard, but could neither +understand nor reply. He then spoke Norse, with similar results. After +that the savage leader rose up, touched his back, and fell down as if +badly wounded. Upon this one of his comrades rose, pointed to the +hamlet, lifted the wounded man in his arms, carried him behind his +companions, and laid him down exclaiming "Utway!" whereupon another +savage took a small bundle of beautiful furs from the ground, and laid +them at the feet of Karlsefin with much humility. + +"Sure he wants to buy back the wounded chief with these furs," said +Krake, who found it difficult to conceal his amusement at all this dumb +show. + +"No doubt of it, and I suppose Utway is his name," replied Karlsefin; +"but my object is to get them inside the defences, in order to show them +that when we have them in our power we will treat them well. If I let +their chief go for these furs nothing will have been gained." + +Karlsefin now did his best, by means of signs and encouraging looks, to +induce the ten natives to enter the hamlet, but no persuasion would +induce them to do this. They held stoutly to their original +proposition, and kept constantly pointing to the bundle of furs and +going through the pantomime with the wounded man. At last Karlsefin +appeared to agree to their proposal. + +"Now, Heika and Hake," said he, "nothing remains to be done but to try +the plan I have described to you. Up, and bring the wounded chief +hither without delay." + +The two men obeyed, and in a few minutes were seen re-issuing from the +fortress bearing a litter between them, on which lay the wounded chief +with a blanket thrown over him, only his head being visible. Carrying +him towards the row of natives, the brothers laid the burden at their +feet as they sat still on the ground looking on with great interest. +Karlsefin removed the blanket, and revealed the chief bound hand and +foot. Something covered by another blanket lay at his side. Karlsefin +took hold of this. As he did so the Norsemen rose. The blanket was +cast off, and ten naked swords were revealed, which were instantly +grasped by ten stalwart arms, and flashed with the speed of light over +the ten native heads! + +Taken thus by surprise they remained seated, and, supposing that to move +would be the signal for instant death, they were perfectly motionless, +though the colour of their countenances revealed to some extent the +state of their feelings. + +A terrific yell from the distant heights told that the deed had been +noticed and understood. It was answered by a shout from the Norsemen as +they issued from their fortress, secured their prisoners, and carried +them within the defences. In a few minutes thereafter not a man was to +be seen on the heights, and the region became as silent and apparently +as deserted as it had been before the advent of the savages. + +"Now then, Biarne, get the things ready. Is the kettle boiling?" said +Karlsefin. + +"All is prepared," answered Biarne. + +"'Tis well. We must carry out our plan as quickly as may be," rejoined +Karlsefin. "We may be sure that these fellows have only retired behind +the heights to hold a council of war, and, in their present humour, it +won't be long before they come on to make an effort to retaliate upon us +for our supposed treachery." + +The ten men were conveyed to the largest house in the hamlet, and there +ranged in a row against the wall. They looked very grave, but were firm +and stern. Evidently they imagined that death by torture was to be +their doom, and had braced themselves up to die like brave men in the +presence of their foes. + +Karlsefin hastened to relieve them from this state of mind as quickly as +possible. He placed before them ten plates of splendid boiled salmon. +They regarded this proceeding with some surprise, but shook their heads +and refused to eat. Doubtless their appetites were not good at the +time! + +"Fetch the wounded chief hither," said Karlsefin, "and tell Bertha that +she is wanted." + +When the wounded man was carried in and seated opposite to his comrades, +a box being placed for him to lean against, Karlsefin said to +Bertha--"Now, lass, do thy best to induce the chief to show his friends +how to eat. He has had some experience of you, and will doubtless +understand." + +With a winning smile that would have compelled any susceptible man to +eat or drink, or do anything else that he was bid whether inclined or +not, Bertha put a plate of salmon before the chief and made signs to him +to eat. He smiled in return, and began at once. Then Bertha patted him +on the shoulder, pointed to the ten prisoners, and made signs again. +The chief smiled intelligently, and spoke to his companions. He +evidently said more than was necessary to order them to eat, for their +faces brightened perceptibly, and they commenced dinner in these +peculiar circumstances without delay. + +It was clear that their appetites had not been much impaired by alarm, +for the salmon disappeared in a twinkling. Then Karlsefin ordered ten +plates of fried venison to be placed before them, which was done, and +they applied themselves to the consumption of this with equal relish. +Having concluded the repast, each man received a can of warm water and +milk, highly sweetened with sugar. At first they took a doubtful sip of +this, and looked at each other in surprise. It was a new sensation! +One of them smacked his lips; the rest said "Waugh!" nodded their heads, +and drained their cans to the bottom at a single draught; after which, +observing that there was some sediment left, they scraped it out with +their fingers and sucked them. + +"So far that is satisfactory," said Karlsefin, with a smile. "Now, +Biarne--the gifts." + +A wooden tray was now brought, on which lay a variety of silver +brooches, rings, and other baubles. These were distributed to the +prisoners. Last of all, each received a yard of bright-coloured cloth, +and then they were ordered by signs to rise. + +They obeyed with alacrity, and were led out of the house, at the door of +which they found a litter similar to the one which they had seen before. +It was simply a blanket fastened to two long poles, and rolled round +them so as to form a couch of about a yard in width. On this the +wounded chief was laid, and two of the natives were ordered to grasp the +ends of the poles and raise him. They did so, and were conducted by the +Norsemen in single file out into the forest. Here, to their intense +surprise, Karlsefin shook hands with them all very kindly, and then, +going back with his men to the fortress, left them to return to their +kindred! + +Karlsefin remarked quietly to Biarne, as he went along, that one of the +precepts of the new religion, which he had remembered well, because it +seemed to him so very wise, was, that men should always try to "overcome +evil with good." + +Thus was established a warm friendship between the natives of Vinland +and the Norsemen; a friendship which might have lasted for ever--to the +great modification, no doubt, of American history--had not unfortunate +circumstances intervened to break it up. As it was, it lasted for a +considerable time. + + + +CHAPTER FOURTEEN. + +THE FIRST AMERICAN FUR TRADERS--STRANGE DEVICES--ANXIOUS TIMES AND +PLEASANT DISCOVERIES. + +The business of the colony progressed admirably after this. A large +house was erected, with a central hall and numerous sleeping-rooms or +closets off it, where all the chief people dwelt together, and a number +of the men messed daily. Grass was found in abundance, and a large +quantity of this was cut and stacked for winter use, although there was +good reason to believe that the winter would be so mild that the cattle +might be left out to forage for themselves. Salmon were also caught in +great numbers, not only in Little River but in the main stream, and in +the lake at their very doors. What they did not consume was dried, +smoked, and stored. Besides this, a large quantity of fine timber was +felled, squared, cut into lengths, and made suitable for exportation. +Eggs were found on the islands offshore, and feathers collected, so that +early in the summer they had more than enough wherewith to load the +ship. Among other discoveries they found grain growing wild. The +Saga-writers have called it wheat, but it is open to question whether it +was not wild rice, of which large quantities grow in the uninhabited +parts of America at the present time. They also found a beautiful kind +of wood, called massurwood, of which samples were sent to Greenland and +Norway; but what this wood really was we cannot tell. + +Meanwhile an extensive traffic in valuable furs was commenced with the +natives, who were more than satisfied with the scraps of bright cloth, +beads, and other trifling ornaments they received in exchange for them. +Some of the natives wanted to purchase weapons with their furs, but +Karlsefin would not allow this. At first the Norsemen gave their cloth +and other wares in exchange with liberal hand, cutting the bright cloth +into stripes of three or four inches in breadth; but they soon found +that at this rate their supplies would become exhausted too early in the +year. They therefore reduced their prices, and began to give stripes of +cloth only two inches in width, and at last reduced the measure to one +inch, for furs that had previously fetched four. But the +unsophisticated natives were quite content with the change, and appeared +to enjoy nothing so much as to twist these stripes of cloth into their +long black hair. + +One day Karlsefin said to Gudrid that he had a new plan in his head. + +"What is that?" said she. + +"I think that our goods are going away too fast, so I mean to try if +these Skraelingers will give their furs for dairy produce. We have a +good deal of that, and can spare some." + +"I don't know how Astrid will like that," she said, laughing. "You know +she has charge of the dairy, and is very proud of it." + +"That is well, Gudrid, for Astrid will be all the more pleased to have +her produce turned to such good account. Milk is pleasant to the +throat, and cream delights the tongue. Methinks these fellows will be +tempted by it." + +"Would they not like beer better?" + +"Beer!" cried Karlsefin, with a shout of laughter. "You should have +seen the faces they made, and the way they spat it out, the only time +they were asked to taste it. Biarne was very keen to let them try it, +and I did not object, for I partly expected some such result. No, no, a +man must _learn_ to like beer. Nature teaches him to like milk. But +go, tell Astrid to fill twenty cans with milk, and twenty small cups +with good cream. Let her also set out twenty cakes, with a pat of fresh +butter and a lump of cheese on each. Let her spread all on the table in +the great hall, and see that she does it speedily. I will go and fetch +the company to this feast." + +He left the room as he spoke, and in less than an hour his orders had +been executed. When he entered the hall a short time afterwards, +followed by twenty natives, he found everything prepared according to +his directions. + +That he was correct in his expectation was clearly proved ere many +minutes had passed, for the twenty natives raised their forty eyes, and +looked on each other with rapturous delight when they tasted the good +things. They finished them in a twinkling, and then wished for more; +but it is only justice to their good-breeding and self-restraint to add +that they did not _ask_ for more! From that day nothing would please +them but that they should have dairy produce for their furs. + +Some time after this Karlsefin was walking, one afternoon, on the shores +of the lake with Thorward. He suddenly asked him how he should like to +take a trip to Greenland. + +"I should like it well," replied Thorward. + +"Then if you will go in charge of the _Snake_ I should be pleased," said +the other, "for we have collected more than enough of merchandise to +fill her, and if you set sail at once you will have time to bring back a +cargo of such things as we need before autumn comes to an end." + +"I will go," said Thorward, "to-morrow, if you choose." + +"Nay, not quite so fast. The ship is only half loaded yet; but in a day +or two she will be ready. There are two things I am anxious you should +manage. One is to persuade Leif Ericsson to come and visit us,--if he +will not come to stay with us. The other is to tempt as many married +men as you can to come over and join us--especially those men who chance +to have a good many daughters, for we would be the better of a few more +busy little hands, fair faces, and silvery tones in this beautiful +Vinland of ours." + +"I will do what I can," replied Thorward, "and I would advise that Olaf +should go with me, that his glowing descriptions may tempt his father to +come." + +"Nay; that would spoil all," objected Karlsefin, "for, having had a +sight of his son he would be content to let him come back alone. No, +no; we will keep Olaf here as a bait to tempt him. But go now and make +your arrangements, for you set sail as soon as the ship is ready." + +Not long after that the _Snake_ left her anchorage with a full cargo, +rowed down the river, hoisted sail, and bore away for Greenland. + +While she was gone an event of deep and absorbing interest occurred in +Vinland. + +One fine morning in autumn the heart of the entire hamlet was moved by +the sound of a new voice! It was not a musical voice--rather squawky, +indeed, than otherwise--and it was a feeble voice, that told of utter +helplessness. In short, a son had been born to Karlsefin and Gudrid, +and they called him Snorro. We record it with regret--for it went a +long way to prove that, in regard to sweet sounds, Karlsefin and his +wife were destitute of taste. It is our business, however, to record +facts rather than to carp at them, therefore we let Snorro pass without +further comment. + +The little body that was attached to the little voice, although far from +beautiful at first, was an object of intense affection to the parents, +and of regard, almost amounting to veneration, to the rugged men by whom +it was surrounded. Bertha declared enthusiastically that it was +"perfectly lovely," although it was obvious to all unprejudiced eyes +that it resembled nothing so much as a piece of wrinkled beef of bad +colour! Astrid declared that it had "such a wise look," despite the +evident fact that its expression was little short of idiotical! +Karlsefin said nothing, but he smiled a good deal, and chucked it under +the place where its chin ought to have been with his great forefinger in +a timid way. + +But when Snorro was deemed sufficiently far advanced in life to be +handed out for public exhibition, then it was that the greatest number +of falsehoods were uttered, with the quietest deliberation, although, to +say truth, the greater number of the men said nothing, but contented +themselves with taking the infant in their big rough hands as delicately +as if they thought it was a bubble, and feared that it might burst and +leave nothing to be handed back to Thora, who acted the part of nurse. +Others merely ventured to look at it silently with their hairy lips +parted and their huge eyes gazing in blank admiration. + +Perhaps Krake made the most original remark in reference to the +newcomer. "Ah," said he quite seriously, touching its cheek as softly +as though he half feared it would bite, "only to think that myself was +like _that_ once!" + +This was received with a shout of laughter, so loud that little Snorro +was startled. + +"Ah, then," cried Krake, with a look of great alarm, "what is it going +to do?" + +This question was occasioned by the sudden change on the infant's +countenance, which became, if possible, redder than before, and puckered +up into such a complicated series of wrinkles that all semblance to +humanity was well-nigh lost. Suddenly a hole opened on the surface and +a feeble squall came forth! + +"Oh, you wicked men!" cried Thora, snatching the infant indignantly from +them and hurrying back into the house. + +"'Tis a sweet child," observed Swend tenderly, as he and his comrades +sauntered away. + +"You must have a good opinion of yourself, Krake," said Tyrker, "to +fancy that you were once like it." + +"So I have," replied Krake. "It's what my father had before me. It +lies in the family, you see, and with good reason too, for we were the +best of company, not to mention fighting. It was always said that we +were uncommonly fine infants, though a trifle big and noisy for the +peace of our neighbourhood--quite like Turks in that way, I believe!" + +"I doubt it not, Krake," said Biarne, who came up in time to hear the +concluding remark; "and since you are such a noisy fellow I am going to +send you on an expedition in search of these vines, that seem to me to +have rooted themselves out of the land and fled, from mere spite, since +Leif named it Vinland. There is but one quarter that I can think of now +which has not yet been explored; you may take a party of men, and let +Tyrker go too; as he discovered them on his first visit, the stupid +fellow ought to have re-discovered them long before now. You can +discuss by the way the little matter you have in hand,--only see that +you don't fall out about it." + +Thus instructed, Krake organised a party, and set off to search for the +celebrated vines, which, as Biarne said, had not up to that time been +found. + +That day they searched far and wide without success. Then they sat down +to rest and eat. While thus engaged, Krake and Tyrker returned to the +subject of the reported noisiness of Turks, and the former became so +caustic in his jests that the irascible little Tyrker lost temper, much +to the amusement of his comrades. + +After refreshing themselves, the explorers again set out and came to a +part of the country which was broken up and beautifully diversified by +rocky eminences crowned with trees, and shady hollows carpeted with +wild-flowers. It was difficult here to decide as to which of the +innumerable valleys or hollows they should traverse; they therefore sat +down again for a little to consult, but the consultation soon became a +discussion, and Krake, whose spirit of fun had got the better of him, +gradually edged the talk round until it came again, quite in a natural +way, to the Turks. At last Tyrker became so angry that he started up, +declared he would follow the party no longer, plunged into a thicket and +disappeared. + +He was followed by a shout of laughter, and then the others, rising, +resumed their search, not doubting that their irate companion would ere +long rejoin them. + +But Tyrker did not join them, and when evening drew on apace they became +anxious, gave up the search for vines, and went about looking for him. +At last it became too dark for them to continue the search, and they +were obliged to return home without their comrade. + +On leaving them Tyrker had no definite idea what he meant to do or where +he meant to go. He just walked straight before him in high dudgeon, +taking no notice of the route by which he journeyed, or the flight of +time. At length he awoke from his absent condition of mind and looked +up. A vast amphitheatre of wooded hills surrounded him, and there, in +the heart of a secluded dell, under a clump of trees, were the long +sought and much-desired vines! + +For some time Tyrker stood gazing at them in silent admiration and +delight. He rubbed his eyes and looked again. Yes; there could be no +question as to their reality. There hung the rich purple clusters such +as he had seen on his first visit to Vinland, and such as he had been +wont to see in his own land in days long gone by. He pinched himself, +pulled his hair, punched his eyeballs, but no--all that failed to awaken +him; from which circumstance he naturally came to the conclusion that he +was awake already. He then uttered a wild, probably a Turkish, cheer, +and rushed upon the spoil. + +Filling both hands with the fruit he crammed his mouth full. Then he +raised his eyes upwards in ecstasy and did it again. He repeated it! +After which he paused to sigh, and leaped up to cheer and sat down again +to--guzzle! Pardon the word, good reader, it is appropriate, for there +is no disguising the fact that Tyrker was a tremendous glutton, and did +not care a fig--or a grape--for appearances. + +After eating for a long time he was satisfied and sat down to rest. By +that time the shades of evening were falling. They proved to be +soporific, for he gradually reclined backwards on the green turf and +fell asleep, surrounded by and partially covered with grapes, like a +drunken and disorderly Bacchus. + +Now Tyrker was a man in robust health; full of energy and high spirits. +Sleep therefore was to him a process which, once begun, continued till +morning. Even the puckered little Snorro did not rest more soundly in +his kneading-trough crib than did Tyrker on the greensward under his +vinous canopy. + +When next he opened his eyes, groaned, rolled over, sat up, and yawned, +the sun was beginning to peep above the eastern sea. + +"Ho!" exclaimed Tyrker. "I have forgot myself." To refresh his memory +he scratched his head and shook it; then he raised his eyes, saw the +grapes, leaped up and burst into a fit of joyous laughter. + +Thereafter he again sat down and breakfasted, after which he filled his +cap, his wallet, his various pockets, the breast of his coat--every +available compartment, in fact, outside as well as in--with grapes, and +hastened homeward at his utmost speed in order to communicate the joyful +news to his comrades. + +Now the disappearance of Tyrker had caused no small amount of anxiety to +his friends at the hamlet, especially to Karlsefin, who was very fond of +him, and who feared that his strength might have given way, or that he +had fallen into the hands of savages or under the paws of bears. He sat +up the greater part of the night watching and hoping for his return, and +when the first grey light of dawn appeared he called up a number of the +men, and, dividing them into several bands, organised a systematic +search. + +Placing himself at the head of one band he went off in the direction in +which, from Krake's account of what had taken place, it seemed most +probable that Tyrker might be found. They advanced so rapidly that when +the sun rose they had got to within a mile or so of the spot where Krake +and his party had given up their search on the previous evening. Thus +it came to pass that before the red sun had ascended the eastern sky by +much more than his own height, Karlsefin and Tyrker met face to face in +a narrow gorge. + +They stopped and gazed at each other for a few moments in silence, +Karlsefin in astonishment as well--and no wonder, for the figure that +stood before him was a passing strange one. To behold Tyrker thus +dishevelled and besmeared was surprising enough, but to see him with +grapes and vine-leaves stuffed all about him and twined all round him +was absolutely astounding. His behaviour was little less so, for, +clapping his hands to his sides, he shut his eyes, opened his big mouth, +and burst into an uproarious fit of laughter. + +The men who came up at that moment did so also for laughter is catching. + +"Why, Tyrker, where have you been?" demanded Karlsefin. + +"Grapes!" shouted Tyrker, and laughed again. + +"Are these grapes?" asked Karlsefin, regarding the fruit with much +interest. + +"Ay, grapes! vines! Vinland! hurrah!" + +"But are you sure?" + +Instead of answering, Tyrker laughed again and began to talk, as he +always did when greatly moved, in Turkish. Altogether he was so much +excited that Krake said he was certainly drunk. + +"Drunk!" exclaimed Tyrker, again using the Norse language; "no, that is +not possible. A man could not get drunk on grapes if he were to eat a +ship-load of them. I am only joyful--happy, happy as I can be. It +seems as if my young days had returned again with these grapes. I am +drunk with old thoughts and memories. I am back again in Turkey!" + +"Ye couldn't be in a worse place if all accounts be true," said Krake, +with a grin. "Come, don't keep all the grapes to yourself; let us taste +them." + +"Ay, let us taste them," said Karlsefin, advancing and plucking a bunch +from Tyrker's shoulders. + +The others did the same, tasted them, and pronounced the fruit +excellent. + +"Now, lads, we will make the strong drink from the grapes," said Tyrker. +"I don't know quite how to do it, but we will soon find out." + +"That you certainly shall not if I can prevent it," said Karlsefin +firmly. + +Tyrker looked a little surprised, and asked why not. + +"Because if the effect of eating grapes is so powerful, drinking the +strong drink of the grape must be dangerous. Why do you wish to make +it?" + +"Why? because--because--it _does_ make one so happy." + +"You told us just now," returned Karlsefin, "that you were _as happy as +you could be_, did you not? You cannot be happier than that--therefore, +according to your own showing, Tyrker, there is no need of strong +drink." + +"That's for you," whispered Krake to Tyrker, with a wink, as he poked +him in the side. "Go to sleep upon that advice, man, and it'll do ye +good--if it don't do ye harm!" + +"Ease him of part of his load, boys, and we shall go back the way we +came as fast as may be." + +Each man relieved Tyrker of several bunches of grapes, so that in a few +minutes he resumed his own ordinary appearance. They then retraced +their steps, and soon afterwards presented to the women the first grapes +of Vinland. Karlsefin carried a chosen bunch to Gudrid, who, after +thanking him heartily, stuffed a grape into the hole in Snorro's +puckered visage and nearly choked him. Thus narrowly did the first +Yankee (for such one of his own countrymen has claimed him to be) escape +being killed by the first-fruits of his native land! + + + +CHAPTER FIFTEEN. + +GREENLAND AGAIN--FLATFACE TURNS UP, ALSO THORWARD, WHO BECOMES ELOQUENT +AND SECURES RECRUITS FOR VINLAND. + +Who has not heard of that solitary step which lies between the sublime +and the ridiculous? The very question may seem ridiculous. And who has +not, at one period or another of life, been led to make comparisons to +that step? Why then should we hesitate to confess that the step in +question has been suggested by the brevity of that other step which lies +between the beautiful and the plain, the luxuriant and the barren, the +fruitful and the sterile--which step we now call upon the reader to +take, by accompanying us from Vinland's shady groves to Greenland's +rocky shores. + +Leif Ericsson is there, standing on the end of the wharf at Brattalid-- +bold, stalwart, and upright, as he was when, some years before, he +opened up the way to Vinland. Flatface the Skraelinger is there too-- +stout, hairy, and as suggestive of a frying-pan as he was when, on +murderous deeds intent, not very long before, he had led his hairy +friends on tiptoe to the confines of Brattalid, and was made almost to +leap out of his oily skin with terror. + +But his terror by this time was gone. He and the Norsemen had been +reconciled, very much to the advantage of both, and his tribe was, just +then, encamped on the other side of the ridge. + +Leif had learned a little of the Skraelinger tongue; Flatface had +acquired a little less of the Norse language--and a pretty mess they +made of it between them! As we are under the necessity of rendering +both into English, we beg the reader's forbearance and consideration. + +"So you are going off on a sealing expedition, are you?" said Leif, +turning from the contemplation of the horizon, and regarding the +Skraelinger with a comical smile. + +"Yis, yo, ha, hooroo!" said Flatface, waving his arms violently to add +force to his reply. + +"And when do you go?" asked Leif. + +"W'en? E go skrumch en cracker smorrow." + +"Just so," replied Leif, "only I can't quite make that cracker out +unless you mean _to-morrow_." + +"Yis, yo, ha!" exclaimed the hairy man. "Kite right, kite right, +smorrow, yis, to-morrow." + +"You're a wonderful man," remarked Leif, with a smile. "You'll speak +Norse like a Norseman if you live long enough." + +"Eh!" exclaimed the Skraelinger, with a perplexed look. + +"When are you to be back?" asked Leif. + +Flatface immediately pointed to the moon, which, although it was broad +daylight at the time, showed a remarkably white face in the blue sky, +and, doubling his fist, hit himself four blows on the bridge of his +nose, or rather on the spot where the bridge of that feature should have +been, but where, as it happened, there was only a hollow in the +frying-pan, with a little blob below it. + +"Ha, four months. Very good. It will be a good riddance; for, to say +truth, I'm tired of you and your noisy relations." + +Leif said this more as a soliloquy than a remark, for he had no +intention of hurting the feelings of the poor savage, who, he was aware, +could not understand him. Turning again to him, he said--"You know the +kitchen, Flatface?" Flatface said nothing, but rolled his eyes, nodded +violently, and rubbed that region which is chiefly concerned with food. + +"Go," said Leif, "tell Anders to give you food--food--food!" + +At each mention of the word Flatface retreated a step and nodded. When +Leif stopped he turned about, and with an exclamation of delight, +trundled off to the kitchen like a good-natured polar bear. + +For full half an hour after that Leif walked up and down the wharf with +his eyes cast down; evidently he was brooding over something. Presently +Anders came towards him. + +Anders was a burly middle-aged Norseman, with a happy-looking +countenance; he was also cook, steward, valet, and general factotum to +Leif. + +"Well, Anders, hast had a visit from Flatface?" asked Leif. + +"Ay--he is in the kitchen now." + +"Hast fed him?" + +"Ay, gorged him," replied Anders, with a grin. + +"Good," said Leif, laughing; "he goes off to-morrow, it seems, for four +months, which I'm right glad to hear, for we have had him and his +kindred long enough beside us for this time. I am sorry on account of +the Christian teachers, however, because they were making some progress +with the language, and this will throw them back." + +Leif here referred to men who had recently been sent to Greenland by +King Olaf Tryggvisson of Norway, with the design of planting +Christianity there, and some of whom appeared to be very anxious to +acquire the language of the natives. Leif himself had kept somewhat +aloof from these teachers of the new faith. He had indeed suffered +himself to be baptized, when on a visit to Norway, in order to please +the King; but he was a very reserved man, and no one knew exactly what +opinions he held in regard to religion. Of course he had been +originally trained in the Odin-worship of his forefathers, but he was a +remarkably shrewd man, and people said that he did not hold by it very +strongly. No one ever ventured to ask him what he held until the +teachers above mentioned came. When they tried to find out his opinions +he quietly, and with much urbanity, asked to be informed as to some of +the details of that which they had come to teach, and so managed the +conversation that, without hurting their feelings, he sent them away +from him as wise as they came. But although Leif was silent he was very +observant, and people said that he noted what was going on keenly--which +was indeed the case. + +"I know not what the teachers think," said Anders, with a careless air, +"but it is my opinion that they won't make much of the Skraelingers, and +the Skraelingers are not worth making much of." + +"There thou art wrong, Anders," said Leif, with much gravity; "does not +Flatface love his wife and children as much as you love yours?" + +"I suppose he does." + +"Is not his flesh and blood the same as thine, his body as well knit +together as thine, and as well suited to its purposes?" + +"Doubtless it is, though somewhat uglier." + +"Does he not support his family as well as thou dost, and labour more +severely than thou for that purpose? Is he not a better hunter, too, +and a faster walker, and fully as much thought of and prized by his +kindred?" + +"All that may be very true," replied Anders carelessly. + +"Then," pursued Leif, "if the Skraelingers be apparently as good as thou +art, how can ye say that they are not worth making much of?" + +"Truly, on the same ground that I say that I myself am not worth making +much of. I neither know nor care anything about the matter. Only this +am I sure of, that the Skraelingers do not serve you, master, as well as +I do." + +"Anders, thou art incorrigible!" said Leif, smiling; "but I admit the +truth of your last remark; so now, if ye will come up to the house and +do for me, to some extent, what ye have just done to Flatface, ye will +add greatly to the service of which thou hast spoken." + +"I follow, master," said Anders; "but would it not be well, first, to +wait and see which of our people are returning to us, for, if I mistake +not, yonder is a boat's sail coming round the ness." + +"A _boat's_ sail!" exclaimed Leif eagerly, as he gazed at the sail in +question; "why, man, if your eyes were as good as those of Flatface, ye +would have seen that yonder sail belongs to a ship. My own eyes have +been turned inward the last half hour, else must I have observed it +sooner." + +"It seems to me but a boat," said Anders. + +"I tell thee it is a ship!" cried Leif; "ay, and if my eyes do not +deceive, it is the ship of Karlsefin. Go, call out the people quickly, +and see that they come armed. There is no saying who may be in +possession of the ship now." + +Anders hastened away, and Leif, after gazing at the approaching vessel a +little longer, walked up to the house, where some of his house-carls +were hastily arming, and where he received from the hands of an old +female servant his sword, helmet, and shield. + +The people of Brattalid were soon all assembled on the shore, anxiously +awaiting the arrival of the ship, and an active boy was sent round to +Heriulfness, to convey the news to the people there--for in Greenland +the arrival of a ship was of rare occurrence in those days. + +As the ship drew near, all doubt as to her being Karlsefin's vessel was +removed, and, when she came close to land, great was the anxiety of the +people to make out the faces that appeared above the bulwarks. + +"That is Karlsefin," said one. "I know his form of face well." + +"No, it is Biarne," cried another. "Karlsefin is taller by half a +foot." + +"'Tis Thorward," said a third. "I'd know his face among a thousand." + +"There seem to be no women with them," observed Anders, who stood at the +end of the wharf near his master. + +"Does any one see Olaf?" asked Leif. + +"No--no," replied several voices. + +When the ship was near enough Leif shouted--"Is Olaf on board?" + +"No!" replied Thorward, in a stentorian voice. + +Leif's countenance fell. + +"Is all well in Vinland?" he shouted. + +"All is well," was the reply. + +Leif's countenance brightened, and in a few minutes he was shaking +Thorward heartily by the hand. + +"Why did ye not bring my son?" said Leif, somewhat reproachfully, as +they went up to the house together. + +"We thought it best to try to induce you to go to him rather than bring +him to you," answered Thorward, smiling. "You must come back with me, +Leif. You cannot conceive what a splendid country it is. It far +surpasses Iceland and Norway. As to Greenland, it should not be named +in the same breath." + +Leif made no reply at that time, but seemed to ponder the proposal. + +"Now we shall feast, Thorward," said Leif, as he entered the hall. "Ho! +lay the tables, good woman.--Come, Anders, see that ye load it well. +Have all the house-carls gathered; I will go fetch in our neighbours, +and we shall hear what Thorward has to say of this Vinland that we have +heard so much about of late." + +Leif's instructions were promptly and energetically carried out. The +tables were spread with all the delicacies of the season that Greenland +had to boast of, which consisted chiefly of fish and wild-fowl, with +seal's flesh instead of beef, for nearly all the cattle had been carried +off by the emigrants, as we have seen, and the few that were left behind +had died for want of proper food. The banquet was largely improved by +Thorward, who loaded the table with smoked salmon. After the dishes had +been removed and the tankards of beer sent round, Thorward began to +relate his story to greedy ears. + +He was very graphic in his descriptions, and possessed the power of +detailing even commonplace conversations in such a way that they became +interesting. He had a great deal of quiet humour, too, which frequently +convulsed his hearers with laughter. In short, he gave such a +fascinating account of the new land, that when the people retired to +rest that night, there was scarcely a man, woman, or child among them +who did not long to emigrate without delay. This was just what Thorward +desired. + +Next day he unloaded the ship, and the sight of her cargo fully +confirmed many parts of his story. The upshot of it was that Leif +agreed to go and spend the winter in Vinland, and a considerable number +of married men made up their minds to emigrate with their wives and +families. + +Having discharged cargo and taken in a large supply of such goods as +were most needed at the new colony, Thorward prepared for sea. Leif +placed Anders in charge of his establishment, and, about grey dawn of a +beautiful morning, the _Snake_ once again shook out her square sail to +the breeze and set sail for Vinland. + + + +CHAPTER SIXTEEN. + +JOYFUL MEETINGS AND HEARTY GREETINGS. + +Need we attempt to describe the joy of our friends in Vinland, when, one +afternoon towards the end of autumn, they saw their old ship sweep into +the lake under oars and sail, and cast anchor in the bay? We think not. + +The reader must possess but a small power of fancy who cannot, without +the aid of description, call up vividly the gladsome faces of men and +women when they saw the familiar vessel appear, and beheld the bulwarks +crowded with well-known faces. Besides, words cannot paint Olaf's +sparkling eyes, and the scream of delight when he recognised his father +standing in sedate gravity on the poop. + +Suffice it to say that the joy culminated at night, as human joys not +unfrequently do, in a feast, at which, as a matter of course, the whole +story of the arrival and settlement in Vinland was told over again to +the newcomers, as if it had never been told before. But there was this +advantage in the telling, that instead of all being told by Thorward, +each man gave his own version of his own doings, or, at all events, +delegated the telling to a friend who was likely to do him justice. +Sometimes one or another undertook that friendly act, without having it +laid upon him. Thus, Krake undertook to relate the discovery of the +grapes by Tyrker, and Tyrker retaliated by giving an account of the +accident in connexion with a mud-hole that had happened to Krake. This +brought out Biarne, who went into a still more minute account of that +event with reference to its bearing on Freydissa, and that gentle woman +revenged herself by giving an account of the manner in which Hake had +robbed Biarne of the honour of killing a brown bear, the mention of +which ferocious animal naturally suggested to Olaf the brave deed of his +dear pet the black bull, to a narrative of which he craved and obtained +attention. From the black bull to the baby was an easy and natural +transition--more so perhaps than may appear at first sight--for the bull +suggested the cows, and the cows the milk, which last naturally led to +thoughts of the great consumer thereof. + +It is right to say here, however, that the baby was among the first +objects presented to Leif and his friends after their arrival; and great +was the interest with which they viewed this first-born of the American +land. The wrinkles, by the way, were gone by that time. They had been +filled up so completely that the place where they once were resembled a +fair and smooth round ball of fresh butter, with two bright blue holes +in it, a knob below them, and a ripe cherry underneath that. + +Snorro happened to be particularly amiable when first presented to his +new friends. Of course he had not at that time reached the crowing or +smiling age. His goodness as yet was negative. He did not squall; he +did not screw up his face into inconceivable formations; he did not grow +alarmingly red in the face; he did not insist on having milk, seeing +that he had already had as much as he could possibly hold--no, he did +none of these things, but lay in Gudrid's arms, the very embodiment of +stolid and expressionless indifference to all earthly things--those who +loved him best included. + +But this state of "goodness" did not last long. He soon began to +display what may be styled the old-Adamic part of his nature, and +induced Leif, after much long-suffering, to suggest that "that would +do," and that "he had better be taken away!" + +The effervescence of the colony caused by this infusion of new elements +ere long settled down. The immigrants took part in the general labour +and duties. Timber-cutting, grape-gathering, hay-making, fishing, +hunting, exploring, eating, drinking, and sleeping, went on with +unabated vigour, and thus, gradually, autumn merged into winter. + +But winter did not bring in its train the total change that these +Norsemen had been accustomed to in their more northern homes. The +season was to them comparatively mild. True, there was a good deal of +snow, and it frequently gave to the branches of the trees that silvery +coating which, in sunshine, converts the winter forest into the very +realms of fairyland; but the snow did not lie deep on the ground, or +prevent the cattle from remaining out and finding food all the winter. +There was ice, also, on the lake, thick enough to admit of walking on +it, and sledging with ponies, but not thick enough to prevent them +cutting easily through it, and fishing with lines and hooks, made of +bone and baited with bits of fat, with which they caught enormous trout, +little short of salmon in size, and quite as good for food. + +Daring the winter there was plenty of occupation for every one in the +colony. For one thing, it cost a large number of the best men constant +and hard labour merely to supply the colonists with firewood and food. +Then the felling of timber for export was carried on during winter as +easily as in summer, and the trapping of wild animals for their furs was +a prolific branch of industry. Sometimes the men changed their work for +the sake of variety. The hunters occasionally took to fishing, the +fishers to timber felling and squaring, the timber-cutters to trapping; +the trappers undertook the work of the firewood-cutters, and these +latter relieved the men who performed the duties of furniture-making, +repairing, general home-work and guarding the settlement. Thus the work +went on, and circled round. + +Of course all this implied a vast deal of tear and wear. Buttons had +not at that time been invented, but tags could burst off as well as +buttons, and loops were not warranted to last for ever, any more than +button-holes. Socks were unknown to those hardy pioneers, but soft +leather shoes, not unlike mocassins, and boots resembling those of the +Esquimaux of the present day, were constantly wearing out, and needed to +be replaced or repaired; hence the women of the colony had their hands +full, for, besides these renovating duties which devolved on them, they +had also the housekeeping--a duty in itself calling for an amount of +constant labour, anxiety, and attention which that ridiculous creature +_man_ never can or will understand or appreciate--at least so the women +say, but, being a man, we incline to differ from them as to that! + +Then, when each day's work was over, the men returned to their several +abodes tired and hungry. Arrangements had been made that so many men +should dwell and mess together, and the women were so appointed that +each mess was properly looked after. Thus the men found cheerful fires, +clean hearths, spread tables, smoking viands, and a pleasant welcome on +their return home; and, after supper, were wont to spend the evenings in +recounting their day's experiences, telling sagas, singing songs, or +discussing general principles--a species of discussion, by the way, +which must certainly have originated in Eden after the Fall! + +In Karlsefin's large hall the largest number of men and women were +nightly assembled, and there the time was spent much in the same way, +but with this difference, that the heads of the settlement were +naturally appealed to in disputed matters, and conversation frequently +merged into something like orations from Leif and Biarne Karlsefin and +Thorward, all of whom were far-travelled, well-informed, and capable of +sustaining the interest of their audiences for a prolonged period. + +In those days the art of writing was unknown among the Norsemen, and it +was their custom to fix the history of their great achievements, as well +as much of their more domestic doings, in their memories by means of +song and story. Men gifted with powers of composition in prose and +verse undertook to enshrine deeds and incidents in appropriate language +at the time of their occurrence, and these scalds or poets, and saga-men +or chroniclers, although they might perhaps have _coloured_ their +narratives and poems slightly, were not likely to have falsified them, +because they were at first related and sung in the presence of actors +and eye-witnesses, to attempt imposition on whom would have been useless +as well as ridiculous. Hence those old songs and sagas had their +foundation in truth. After they were once launched into the memories of +men, the form of words, doubtless, tended to protect them to some extent +from adulteration, and even when all allowance is made for man's +well-known tendency to invent and exaggerate, it still remains likely +that _all_ the truth would be retained, although surrounded more or less +with fiction. To distinguish the true from the false in such cases is +not so difficult a process as one at first sight might suppose. Men +with penetrating minds and retentive memories, who are trained to such +work, are swift to detect the chaff amongst the wheat, and although in +their winnowing operations they may frequently blow away a few grains of +wheat, they seldom or never accept any of the chaff as good grain. + +We urge all this upon the reader, because the narratives and poems which +were composed and related by Karlsefin and his friends that winter, +doubtless contained those truths which were not taken out of the +traditionary state, collected and committed to writing by the Icelandic +saga-writers, until about one hundred years afterwards, at the end of +the eleventh or beginning of the twelfth century. + +On these winter evenings, too, Karlsefin sometimes broached the subject +of the new religion, which had been so recently introduced into +Greenland. He told them that he had not received much instruction in +it, so that he could not presume to explain it all to them, but added +that he had become acquainted with the name and some of the precepts of +Jesus Christ, and these last, he said, seemed to him so good and so true +that he now believed in Him who taught them, and would not exchange that +belief for all the riches of this world, "for," said he, "the world we +dwell in is passing away--that to which we go shall never pass away." +His chief delight in the new religion was that Jesus Christ was +described as a Saviour from sin, and he thought that to be delivered +from wicked thoughts in the heart and wicked deeds of the body was the +surest road to perfect happiness. + +The Norsemen listened to all this with profound interest, for none of +them were so much wedded to their old religion as to feel any jealousy +of the new; but although they thought much about it, they spoke little, +for all were aware that the two religions could not go together--the +acceptance of the one implied the rejection of the other. + +Frequently during the winter Karlsefin and Leif had earnest +conversations about the prospects of the infant colony. + +"Leif," said Karlsefin, one day, "my mind is troubled." + +"That is bad," replied Leif; "what troubles it?" + +"The thoughts that crowd upon me in regard to this settlement." + +"I marvel not at that," returned Leif, stopping and looking across the +lake, on the margin of which they were walking; "your charge is a heavy +one, calling for earnest thought and careful management. But what is +the particular view that gives you uneasiness?" + +"Why, the fact that it does not stand on a foundation which is likely to +be permanent. A house may not be very large, but if its foundation be +good it will stand. If, however, its foundation be bad, then the bigger +and grander it is, so much the worse for the house." + +"That is true. Go on." + +"Well, it seems to me that the foundation of our settlement is not good. +It is true that some of us have our wives here, and there is, besides, +a sprinkling of young girls, who are being courted by some of the men; +nevertheless it remains a stubborn truth that far the greater part of +the men are those who came out with Thorward and me, and have left +either wives or sweethearts in Norway and in Iceland. Now these may be +pleased to remain here for a time, but it cannot be expected that they +will sit down contentedly and make it their home." + +"There is truth in what you say, Karlsefin. Have any of your men spoken +on that subject?" + +"No, none as yet; but I have not failed to note that some of them are +not so cheerful and hearty as they used to be." + +"What is to prevent you making a voyage to Iceland and Norway next +spring," said Leif, "and bringing out the wives and families, and, if +you can, the sweethearts of these men?" + +Karlsefin laughed heartily at this suggestion. "Why, Leif," he said, +"has your sojourn on the barren coast of Greenland so wrought on your +good sense, or your feelings, that you should suppose thirty or forty +families will agree at once to leave home and kindred to sail for and +settle in a new land of the West that they have barely,--perhaps never-- +heard of; and think you that sweethearts have so few lovers at home that +they will jump at those who are farthest away from them? It is one +thing to take time and trouble to collect men and households that are +willing to emigrate; it is another thing altogether to induce households +to follow men who have already emigrated." + +"Nay, but I would counsel you to take the men home along with you, so +that they might use their persuasions," returned Leif; "but, as you say, +it is not a likely course to take, even in that way. What, then, do you +think, is wisest to be done?" + +"I cannot yet reply to that, Leif. I see no course open." + +"Tell me, Karlsefin, how is it with yourself?" asked Leif, looking +earnestly at his friend. "Are you content to dwell here?" + +Karlsefin did not reply for a few seconds. + +"Well, to tell you the truth," he said at length, "I do not relish the +notion of calling Vinland _home_. The sea is my home. I have dwelt on +it the greater part of my life. I love its free breezes and surging +waves. The very smell of its salt spray brings pleasant memories to my +soul. I cannot brook the solid earth. While I walk I feel as if I were +glued to it, and when I lie down I am too still. It is like death. On +the sea, whether I stand, or walk, or lie, I am ever bounding on. Yes; +the sea is my native home, and when old age constrains me to forsake it, +and take to the land, my home must be in Iceland." + +"Truly if that be your state of mind," said Leif, laughing, "there is +little hope of your finally coming to an anchor here." + +"But," continued Karlsefin, less energetically, "it would not be right +in me to forsake those whom I have led hither. I am bound to remain by +and aid them as long as they are willing to stay--at least until they do +not require my services." + +"That is well spoken, friend," said Leif. "Thou art indeed so bound. +Now, what I would counsel is this, that you should spend another year, +or perhaps two more years, in Vinland, and at the end of that time it +will be pretty plain either that the colony is going to flourish and can +do without you, or that it is advisable to forsake it and return home. +Meanwhile I would advise that you give the land a fair trial. Put a +good face on it; keep the men busy--for that is the way to keep them +cheerful and contented, always being careful not to overwork them-- +provide amusements for their leisure hours if possible, and keep them +from thinking too much of absent wives and sweethearts--if you can." + +"_If I can_," repeated Karlsefin, with a smile; "ay, but I don't think I +can. However, your advice seems good, so I will adopt it; and as I +shall be able to follow it out all the better with your aid, I hope that +you will spend next winter with us." + +"I agree to that," said Leif; "but I must first visit Greenland in +spring, and then return to you. And now, tell me what you think of the +two thralls King Olaf sent me." + +Karlsefin's brow clouded a little as he replied that they were excellent +men in all respects--cheerful, willing, and brave. + +"So should I have expected of men sent to me by the King," said Leif, +"but I have noticed that the elder is very sad. Does he pine for his +native land, think ye?" + +"Doubtless he does," answered Karlsefin; "but I am tempted to think that +he, like some others among us, pines for an absent sweetheart." + +"Not unlikely, not unlikely," observed Leif, looking gravely at the +ground. "And the younger lad, Hake, what of him? He, I think, seems +well enough pleased to remain, if one may judge from his manner and +countenance." + +"There is reason for that," returned Karlsefin, with a recurrence of the +troubled expression. "The truth is that Hake is in love with Bertha." + +"The thrall?" exclaimed Leif. + +"Ay, and he has gone the length of speaking to her of love; I know it, +for I heard him." + +"What! does Karlsefin condescend to turn eavesdropper?" said Leif, +looking at his friend in surprise. + +"Not so, but I chanced to come within earshot at the close of an +interview they had, and heard a few words in spite of myself. It was in +summer. I was walking through the woods, and suddenly heard voices near +me in the heart of a copse through which I must needs pass. Thinking +nothing about it I advanced and saw Hake and Bertha partially concealed +by the bushes. Suddenly Hake cried passionately, `I cannot help it, +Bertha. I _must_ tell you that I love you if I should die for it;' to +which Bertha replied, `It is useless, Hake; neither Leif nor Karlsefin +will consent, and I shall never oppose their will.' Then Hake said, +`You are right, Bertha, right--forgive me--.' At this point I felt +ashamed of standing still, and turned back lest I should overhear more." + +"He is a thrall--a thrall," murmured Leif sternly, as if musing. + +"And yet he is a Scottish earl's son," said Karlsefin. "It does seem a +hard case to be a thrall. I wonder if the new religion teaches anything +regarding thraldom." + +Leif looked up quickly into his friend's face, but Karlsefin had turned +his head aside as if in meditation, and no further allusion was made to +that subject by either of them. + +"Do you think that Bertha returns Hake's love?" asked Leif, after a few +minutes. + +"There can be no doubt of that," said Karlsefin, laughing; "the colour +of her cheek, the glance of her eye, and the tones of her voice, are all +tell-tale. But since the day I have mentioned they have evidently held +more aloof from each other." + +"That is well," said Leif, somewhat sternly. "Bertha is free-born. She +shall not wed a thrall if he were the son of fifty Scottish earls." + +This speech was altogether so unlike what might have been expected from +one of Leif's kind and gentle nature that Karlsefin looked at him in +some astonishment and seemed about to speak, but Leif kept his frowning +eyes steadily on the ground, and the two friends walked the remainder of +the road to the hamlet in perfect silence. + + + +CHAPTER SEVENTEEN. + +TREATS OF THE FRIENDSHIP AND ADVENTURES OF OLAF AND SNORRO, AND OF +SUNDRY SURPRISING INCIDENTS. + +We must now pass over a considerable period of time, and carry our story +forward to the spring of the third year after the settlement of the +Norsemen in Vinland. + +During that interval matters had progressed much in the same way as we +have already described, only that the natives had become a little more +exacting in their demands while engaged in barter, and were, on the +whole, rather more pugnacious and less easily pleased. There had been a +threatening of hostilities once or twice, but, owing to Karlsefin's +pacific policy, no open rupture had taken place. + +During that interval, too, Leif had made two trips to Greenland and +back; a considerable amount of merchandise had been sent home; a few +more colonists had arrived, and a few of the original ones had left; +Thorward's ship had been also brought to Vinland; and last, but not +least, Snorro had grown into a most magnificent baby! + +Things were in this felicitous condition when, early one beautiful +spring morning, Snorro resolved to have a ramble. Snorro was by that +time barely able to walk, and he did it after a peculiar fashion of his +own. He had also begun to make a few desperate efforts to talk; but +even Gudrid was forced to admit that, in regard to both walking and +talking, there was great room for improvement. + +Now, it must be told that little Olaf was particularly fond of Snorro, +and, if one might judge from appearances, Snorro reciprocated the +attachment. Whenever Snorro happened to be missed, it was generally +understood that Olaf had him. If any one chanced to ask the question, +"Where is Snorro?" the almost invariable reply was, "Ask Olaf." In the +event of Olaf _not_ having him, it was quite unnecessary for any one to +ask where he was, because the manner in which he raged about the hamlet +shouting, howling, absolutely yelling, for "O'af!" was a sufficient +indication of his whereabouts. + +It was customary for Olaf not only to tend and nurse Snorro, in a +general way, when at home, but to take him out for little walks and +rides in the forest--himself being the horse. At first these delightful +expeditions were very short, but as Snorro's legs developed, and his +mother became more accustomed to his absences, they were considerably +extended. Nevertheless a limit was marked out, beyond which Olaf was +forbidden to take him, and experience had proved that Olaf was a +trustworthy boy. It must be remembered here, that although he had grown +apace during these two years, Olaf was himself but a small boy, with the +clustering golden curls and the red chubby cheeks with which he had left +Greenland. + +As we have said, then, Snorro resolved to have a walk one fine spring +morning of the year one thousand and ten--or thereabouts. In the +furtherance of his design he staggered across the hall, where Gudrid had +left him for those fatal "few minutes" during which children of all ages +and climes have invariably availed themselves of their opportunity! +Coming to a serious impediment in the shape of the door-step, he paused, +plucked up heart, and tumbled over it into the road. Gathering himself +up, he staggered onward through the village shouting his usual +cry,--"O'af! O'af! O'AF! O-o-o!" with his wonted vigour. + +But "O'af" was deaf to the touching appeal. He chanced to have gone +away that morning with Biarne and Hake to visit a bear-trap. A little +black bear had been found in it crushed and dead beneath the heavy tree +that formed the _drop_ of the trap. This bear had been slung on a pole +between the two men, and the party were returning home in triumph at the +time that Snorro set up his cry, but they were not quite within earshot. + +Finding that his cries were not attended to, Snorro staggered out of the +village into the forest a short way, and there, standing in the middle +of the path, began again,--"O'af! O'af! O'AF! O-o-o!" + +Still there was no reply; therefore Snorro, stirred by the blood which +had descended to him through a long line of illustrious and warlike +sea-kings, lost his temper, stamped his feet, and screeched with +passion. + +Nothing resulting, he changed his mood, shouted "O'af!" once more, in +heartrending accents, and--with his eyes half-shut and mouth wide open, +his arms and hands helplessly pendent, his legs astraddle, and his whole +aspect what is expressively styled in the Norse tongue begrutten--howled +in abject despair! + +In this condition he was found by the bear party not many minutes later, +and in another moment he was sobbing out his heart and sorrows into the +sympathetic bosom of his dearly-loved friend. + +"What is it, Snorrie? What's the matter?" inquired Olaf tenderly. + +"Hik!--Me--hup!--O!--want--hif!--wak," replied the sobbing child. + +"It wants to walk, does it? So it shall, my bold little man. There, +dry its eyes and get on my back, hup!--now, away we go! I'll be back +soon," he said to Biarne, who stood laughing at them. "Be sure that you +keep the claws of the bear for me.--Now, Snorrie, off and away! hurrah!" + +"Hoo'ah!" echoed Snorro, as, holding tight with both his fat arms round +Olaf's neck, he was borne away into the wilderness. + +Olaf's usual mode of proceeding was as follows: + +First he dashed along the track of the woodcutters for about half a +mile. It was a good broad track, which at first had been cleared by the +axe, and afterwards well beaten by the constant passage of men and +horses with heavy loads of timber. Then he stopped and set Snorro on +his legs, and, going down on his knees before him, laughed in his face. +You may be sure that Snorro returned the laugh with right good-will. + +"Whereaway next, Snorrie?" + +"Away! a-way!" shouted the child, throwing up his arms, losing his +balance, and falling plump--in sedentary fashion. + +"Ay, anywhere you please; that means, no doubt, up to the sun or moon, +if possible! But come, it must walk a bit now. Give me its hand, old +man." + +Snorro was obedient to Olaf--and, reader, that was an amazing triumph of +love, for to no one else, not even to his mother, did he accord +obedience. He quietly took his guide's hand, trotted along by his side, +and listened wonderingly while he chatted of trees, and flowers, and +birds, and squirrels, and wild beasts, just as if he understood every +word that Olaf said. + +But Snorro's obedience was not perfect. Olaf's pace being regulated by +his spirits, Snorro soon began to pant, and suddenly pulled up with a +violent "'Top!" + +"Ho! is it tired?" cried Olaf, seizing him and throwing him over his +shoulder into the old position. "Well, then, off we go again!" + +He not only went off at a run, but he went off the track also at this +point, and struck across country straight through the woods in the +direction of a certain ridge, which was the limit beyond which he was +forbidden to go. + +It was an elevated ridge, which commanded a fine view of the surrounding +country, being higher than the tree-tops, and was a favourite resort of +Olaf when he went out to ramble with Snorro. Beyond it lay a land that +was unknown to Olaf, because that part of the forest was so dense that +even the men avoided it in their expeditions, and selected more open and +easier routes. Olaf, who was only allowed to accompany the men on short +excursions, had never gone beyond the ridge in that direction. He +longed to do so, however, and many a time had he, while playing with +Snorro on the ridge, gazed with ever increasing curiosity into the deep +shades beyond, and wondered what was there! To gaze at a forbidden +object is dangerous. We have already said that Olaf was a trustworthy +boy, but he was not immaculate. He not only sometimes wished to have +his own way, but now and then took it. On this particular occasion he +gave way, alas! to temptation. + +"Snorro," said he, after sitting under a tree for a considerable time +basking in the checkered sunshine with the child beside him, "Snorro, +why should not you and I have a peep into that dark forest?" + +"Eh?" said Snorro, who understood him not. + +"It would be great fun," pursued Olaf. "The shade would be so pleasant +in a hot day like this, and we would not go far. What does it think?" + +"Ho!" said Snorro, who thought and cared nothing at all about it, for he +happened to be engaged just then in crushing a quantity of wild-flowers +in his fat hands. + +"I see it is not inclined to talk much to-day. Well, come, get on my +back, and we shall have just one peep--just one run into it--and then +out again." + +Error number one. Smelling forbidden fruit is the sure prelude to the +eating of it! + +He took the child on his back, descended the hill, and entered the thick +forest. + +The scene that met his gaze was indeed well calculated to delight a +romantic boy. He found that the part of the woods immediately around +him consisted of tall straight trees with thick umbrageous tops, the +stems of which seemed like pillars supporting a vast roof; and through +between these stems he could see a vista of smaller stems which appeared +absolutely endless. There was no grass on the ground, but a species of +soft moss, into which he sank ankle-deep, yet not so deep as to render +walking difficult. In one direction the distance looked intensely blue, +in another it was almost black, while, just before him, a long way off, +there was a bright sunny spot with what appeared to be the glittering +waters of a pond in the midst of it. + +The whole scene was both beautiful and strange to Olaf, and would have +filled him with intense delight, if he could only have got rid of that +uncomfortable feeling about its being forbidden ground! However, having +fairly got into the scrape, he thought he might as well go through with +it. + +Error number two. Having become impressed with the fact that he had +sinned, he ought to have turned back _at once_. "In for a penny, in for +a pound," is about the worst motto that ever was invented. Interpreted, +it means, "Having done a little mischief, I'll shut my eyes and go +crashing into all iniquity." As well might one say, "Having burnt my +finger, I'll shove my whole body into the fire!" + +But Olaf did not take time to think. He pushed boldly forward in the +direction of the lake. As he drew near he found the moss becoming +softer and deeper, besides being rather wet. Going a few steps further, +he found that it changed into a swamp. + +"Ho! Snorrie, this is dangerous ground," he said, turning back; "we'll +take a round-about and try to get to the lake by a drier way." + +He did so, but the more he diverged towards dry ground the more did the +swamp force him to one side, until it compelled him to go out of sight +of the pond altogether. + +"Now, isn't that vexin'?" he said, looking about him. + +"Iss," replied Snorro, who was becoming sleepy, and had laid his head on +his friend's shoulder. + +"Well, as we can't get to the lake, and as this is rather a wild place, +we'll just turn back now and get out of it as fast as we can." + +"Iss," murmured Snorro, with a deep sigh. + +Olaf turned back and made for the edge of the wood. He was so long of +coming to it that he began to be somewhat surprised, and looked about +him a little more carefully, but the tall straight stems were all so +much alike that they afforded him no clue to his way out of the wood. +Young though he was, Olaf knew enough of woodcraft to be able to steer +his course by the sun; but the sky had become clouded, and the direction +of the sun could not be ascertained through the dense foliage overhead. +He now became seriously alarmed. His heart beat against his ribs as if +it wanted to get out, and he started off at a run in the direction in +which, he felt sure, the ridge lay. Becoming tired and still more +alarmed, he changed his course, eagerly advanced for a short time, +hesitated, changed his course again, and finally stopped altogether, as +the terrible fact flashed upon him that he was really lost in the woods. +He set Snorro on the ground, and, sitting down beside him, burst into +tears. + +We need scarcely say that poor Olaf was neither a timid nor an +effeminate boy. It was not for himself that he thus gave way. It was +the sudden opening of his eyes to the terrible consequences of his +disobedience that unmanned him. His quick mind perceived at once that +little Snorro would soon die of cold and hunger if he failed to find his +way out of that wilderness; and when he thought of this, and of the +awful misery that would thus descend on the heads of Karlsefin and +Gudrid, he felt a strange desire that he himself might die there and +then. + +This state of mind, however, did not last long. He soon dried his eyes +and braced himself up for another effort. Snorro had gone to sleep the +instant he was laid on the ground. As his luckless guide raised him he +opened his eyes slightly, murmured "O'af," and again went off to the +land of Nod. + +Olaf now made a more steady and persevering effort to get out of the +wood, and he was so far successful that he came to ground that was more +open and broken--more like to that through which he had been accustomed +to travel with the men. This encouraged him greatly, for, although he +did not recognise any part of it, he believed that he must now be at all +events not far distant from places that he knew. Here he again looked +for the sun, but the sky had become so thickly overcast that he could +not make out its position. Laying Snorro down, he climbed a tall tree, +but the prospect of interminable forest which he beheld from that point +of vantage did not afford him any clue to his locality. He looked for +the ridge, but there were many ridges in view, any of which might have +been _his_ ridge, but none of which looked precisely like it. + +Nevertheless, the upward bound which his spirits had taken when he came +to the more open country did not altogether subside. He still wandered +on manfully, in the hope that he was gradually nearing home. + +At last evening approached and the light began to fade away. Olaf was +now convinced that he should have to spend the night in the forest. He +therefore wisely resolved, while it was yet day, to search for a +suitable place whereon to encamp, instead of struggling on till he could +go no farther. Fortunately the weather was warm at the time. + +Ere long he found a small hollow in a sand-bank which was perfectly dry +and thickly overhung with shrubs. Into this he crept and carefully laid +down his slumbering charge. Then, going out, he collected a large +quantity of leaves. With these he made a couch, on which he laid Snorro +and covered him well over. Lying down beside him he drew as close to +the child as he could; placed his little head on his breast to keep it +warm; laid his own curly pate on a piece of turf, and almost instantly +fell into a profound slumber. + +The sun was up and the birds were singing long before that slumber was +broken. When at last Olaf and his little charge awoke, they yawned +several times and stretched themselves vigorously; opened their eyes +with difficulty, and began to look round with some half-formed notions +as to breakfast. Olaf was first to observe that the roof above him was +a confused mass of earth and roots, instead of the customary plank +ceiling and cross-beams of home. + +"Where am I?" he murmured lazily, yet with a look of sleepy curiosity. + +He was evidently puzzled, and there is no saying how long he might have +lain in that condition had not a very small contented voice close beside +him replied: + +"You's here, O'af; an' so's me." + +Olaf raised himself quickly on his elbow, and, looking down, observed +Snorro's large eyes gazing from out a forest of leaves in quiet +satisfaction. + +"Isn't it nice?" continued Snorro. + +"Nice!" exclaimed Olaf in a voice of despair, when the whole truth in +regard to their lost condition was thus brought suddenly to his mind. +"Nice! No, Snorrie, my little man, it isn't nice. It's dread-ful! +It's awful! It's--but come, I must not give way like a big baby as I +did yesterday. We are lost, Snorrie, lost in the woods." + +"Lost! What's lost?" asked Snorro, sitting up and gazing into his +friend's face with an anxious expression--not, of course, in consequence +of being lost, which he did not understand, but because of Olaf's woeful +countenance. + +"Oh! you can't understand it, Snorrie; and, after all, I'm a stupid +fellow to alarm you, for that can do no good. Come, my mannie, you and +I are going to wander about in the woods to-day a great long way, and +try to get home; so, let me shake the leaves off you. There now, we +shall start." + +"Dat great fun!" cried Snorro, with sparkling eyes; "but, O'af, me want +mik." + +"Milk--eh? Well, to be sure, but--" + +Olaf stopped abruptly, not only because he was greatly perplexed about +the matter of breakfast thus suggested to him, but because he chanced at +that moment to look towards the leafy entrance of the cave, and there +beheld a pair of large black eyes glaring at him. + +To say that poor Olaf's heart gave a violent leap, and then apparently +ceased to beat altogether, while the blood fled from his visage, is not +to say anything disparaging to his courage. Whether you be boy or man, +reader, we suspect that if you had, in similar circumstances, beheld +such a pair of eyes, you might have been troubled with somewhat similar +emotions. Cowardice lies not in the susceptibility of the nervous +system to a shock, but in giving way to that shock so as to become unfit +for proper action or self-defence. If Olaf had been a coward, he would, +forgetting all else, have attempted to fly, or, that being impossible, +would have shrunk into the innermost recesses of the cave. Not being a +coward, his first impulse was to start to his feet and face the pair of +eyes; his second, to put his left arm round Snorro, and, still keeping +his white face steadily turned to the foe, to draw the child close to +his side. + +This act, and the direction in which Olaf gazed, caused Snorro to glance +towards the cave's mouth, where he no sooner beheld the apparition, than +shutting his own eyes tight, and opening his mouth wide, he gave vent to +a series of yells that might have terrified the wildest beast in the +forest! + +It did not, however, terrify the owner of the eyes, for the bushes were +instantly thrust aside, and next instant Snorro's mouth was violently +stopped by the black hand of a savage. + +Seeing this, Olaf's blood returned to its ordinary channels with a rush. +He seized a thick branch that lay on the ground, and dealt the savage a +whack on the bridge of his nose, that changed it almost immediately from +a snub into a superb Roman! For this he received a buffet on the ear +that raised a brilliant constellation in his brain, and laid him flat on +the ground. + +Rising with difficulty, he was met with a shower of language from the +savage in a voice which partook equally of the tones of remonstrance and +abuse, but Olaf made no reply, chiefly because, not understanding what +was said, he could not. Seeing this plainly indicated on his face, the +savage stopped speaking and gave him a box on the other ear, by way of +interpreting what he had said. It was not quite so violent as the +first, and only staggered Olaf, besides lighting up a few faint stars. +Very soon little Snorro became silent, from the combined effects of +exhaustive squeezes and horror. + +Having thus promptly brought matters to what he seemed to consider a +satisfactory condition, the savage wiping his Roman nose, which had bled +a little, threw Snorro over his shoulder and, seizing Olaf by the collar +of his coat, so as to thrust him on in advance, left the cavern with +rapid strides. + +Words cannot describe the condition of poor Olaf's mind, as he was thus +forced violently along through the forest, he knew not whither. Fearful +thoughts went flashing swiftly through his brain. That the savage would +take him and Snorro to his home, wherever that might be, and kill, +roast, and eat him, was one of the mildest of these thoughts. He +reflected that the hatred of the savage towards him must be very +intense, in consequence of his recent treatment of his nose, and that +the pain of that feature would infallibly keep his hatred for a long +time at the boiling-point; so that, in addition to the roasting and +eating referred to, he had every reason to expect in his own case the +addition of a little extra torture. Then he thought of the fact, that +little Snorro would never more behold his mother, and the torture of +mind resulting from this reflection is only comparable to the roasting +of the body; but the worst thought of all was, that the dreadful pass to +which he and Snorro had come, was the consequence of his own wilful +_disobedience_! The anguish of spirit that filled him, when he +reflected on this, was such that it caused him almost to forget the pain +caused by savage knuckles in his neck, and savage prospects in the +future. + +Oh how he longed for a knife! With what fearful gloating did he +contemplate the exact spot in the savage groin into which he would have +plunged it until the haft should have disappeared! And this, not so +much from a feeling of revenge--though that was bad enough--as from an +intense desire to rescue Snorro ere it should be too late. + +Several times he thought of a final dying effort at a hand-to-hand +struggle with his captor, but the power of the grip on the back of his +neck induced him to abandon that idea in despair. Then he thought of a +sudden wrench and a desperate flight, but as that implied the leaving of +Snorro to his fate, he abandoned that idea too in disdain. Suddenly, +however, he recurred to it, reflecting that, if he could only manage to +make his own escape, he might perhaps find his way back to the +settlement, give the alarm, and lead his friends to Snorro's rescue. +The power of this thought was so strong upon him, that he suddenly +stooped and gave his active body a twist, which he considered absolutely +awful for strength, but, much to his astonishment, did not find himself +free. On the contrary, he received such a shake, accompanied by such a +kick, that from that moment he felt all hope to be gone. + +Thus they proceeded through the woods, and out upon an open space +beyond, and over a variety of ridges, and down into a number of hollows, +and again through several forests not unlike the first, until poor Olaf +began to wonder whether they had not passed the boundaries of the world +altogether and got into another region beyond--until his legs, sturdy +though they were, began to give way beneath him--until the noon-day sun +shone perpendicularly down through the trees, and felt as if it were +burning up his brain. Then they came to a rivulet, on the banks of +which were seen several tents of a conical form, made of skins, from the +tops of which smoke was issuing. + +No sooner did the savage come in sight of these tents than he uttered a +low peculiar cry. It was responded to, and immediately a band of +half-naked savages, like himself, advanced to meet him. + +There was much gesticulation and loud excited talking, and a great deal +of pointing to the two captives, with looks expressive of surprise and +delight, but not a word could Olaf understand; and the gestures were not +definite in their expression. + +When Snorro was placed sitting-wise on the ground--nearly half dead with +fatigue, alarm, and hunger--he crept towards Olaf, hid his face in his +breast, and sobbed. Then did Olaf's conscience wake up afresh and stab +him with a degree of vigour that was absolutely awful--for Olaf's +conscience was a tender one; and it is a strange, almost paradoxical, +fact, that the tenderer a conscience is the more wrathfully does it stab +and lacerate the heart of its owner when he has done wrong! + +There was, however, no uncertainty as to the disposition of the savages, +when, after a thorough inspection of the children, they took them to the +tents and set before them some boiled fish and roast venison. + +Need we remark that, for the time, Olaf and Snorro forgot their sorrow? +It would scarcely be an exaggeration to say that Snorro was as ravenous +as any wolf in Vinland. From the day of his birth that well-cared-for +child had, four times a day, received regular nutriment in the form of +milk, bread, eggs, and other substances, and never once had he been +permitted to experience the _pangs_ of hunger, though the _intimations_ +thereof were familiar. No wonder, then, that after an evening, a night, +and half a day of abstinence, he looked with a longing gaze on victuals, +and, when opportunity offered, devoured them desperately. Olaf, though +trained a little in endurance, was scarcely less energetic, for his +appetite was keen, and his fast had been unusually prolonged. + +When they had eaten as much as they could--to the delight of the +natives, excepting, of course, the man with the temporary Roman nose-- +they were ordered by signals, which even Snorro understood, to remain +still and behave themselves. Thereafter the natives struck their tents, +packed up their goods and chattels, embarked in sixteen large canoes, +and descended the rivulet a hundred yards or so to the spot where it +flowed into a large river. Here they turned the canoes upstream, and +silently but swiftly paddled away into the interior of the land. + + + +CHAPTER EIGHTEEN. + +ANXIOUS TIMES--A SEARCH ORGANISED AND VIGOROUSLY CARRIED OUT. + +It is not easy to conceive the state of alarm that prevailed in the +settlement of the Norsemen when it came to be known that little Snorro +and Olaf were lost. The terrible fact did not of course break on them +all at once. + +For some hours after the two adventurers had left home, Dame Gudrid went +briskly about her household avocations, humming tunefully one of her +native Icelandic airs, and thinking, no doubt, of Snorro. Astrid, +assisted by Bertha, went about the dairy operations, gossiping of small +matters in a pleasant way, and, among other things, providing Snorro's +allowance of milk. Thora busied herself in the preparation of Snorro's +little bed; and Freydissa, whose stern nature was always softened by the +sight of the child, constructed, with elaborate care, a little coat for +Snorro's body. Thus Snorro's interests were being tenderly cared for +until the gradual descent of the sun induced the remark, that "Olaf must +surely have taken a longer walk than usual that day." + +"I must go and meet them," said Gudrid, becoming for the first time +uneasy. + +"Let me go with you," said Bertha. + +"Come, child," returned Gudrid. + +In passing the spot where the little bear had been cut up and skinned, +they saw Hake standing with Biarne. + +"Did you say that Olaf took the track of the woodcutters?" asked Gudrid. + +"Ay, that was their road at starting," answered Biarne. "Are they not +later than usual?" + +"A little. We go to meet them." + +"Tell Olaf that I have kept the bear's claws for him," said Biarne. + +The two women proceeded a considerable distance along the woodcutters' +track, chatting, as they went, on various subjects, but, not meeting the +children, they became alarmed and walked on in silence. + +Suddenly Gudrid stopped. + +"Bertha," said she, "let us not waste time. If the dear children have +strayed a little out of the right road, it is of the utmost importance +to send men to search and shout for them before it begins to darken. +Come, we will return." + +Being more alarmed than she liked to confess, even to herself, Gudrid at +once walked rapidly homewards, and, on approaching the huts, quickened +her pace to a run. + +"Quick, Swend, Hake, Biarne!" she cried; "the children must have lost +their way--haste you to search for them before the sun goes down. Shout +as ye go. It will be ill to find them after dark, and if they have to +spend the night in the woods, I fear me they will--" + +"Don't fear anything, Gudrid," said Biarne kindly. "We will make all +haste, and doubtless shall find them rambling in the thickets near at +hand.--Go, Hake, find Karlsefin, and tell him that I will begin the +search at once with Swend, while he gets together a few men." + +Cheered by Biarne's hearty manner, Gudrid was a little comforted, and +returned to the house to complete her preparation of Snorro's supper, +while Hake gave the alarm to Karlsefin, who, accompanied by Leif and a +body of men, at once went off to scour the woods in every direction. + +Of course they searched in vain, for their attention was at first +directed to the woods near home, in which it was naturally enough +supposed that Olaf might have lost his way in returning. Not finding +them there, Karlsefin became thoroughly alive to the extreme urgency of +the case, and the necessity for a thorough and extended plan of search. + +"Come hither, Hake," said he. "This may be a longer business than we +thought for. Run back to the huts, call out all the men except the +home-guards. Let them come prepared for a night in the woods, each man +with a torch, and one meal in his pouch at least--" + +"Besides portions for the twenty men already out," suggested Hake. + +"Right, right, lad, and tell them to meet me at the Pine Ridge.--Away! +If ever thy legs rivalled the wind, let them do so now." + +Hake sprang off at a pace which appeared satisfactory even to the +anxious father. + +In half an hour Karlsefin was joined at the Pine Ridge by all the +available strength of the colony, and there he organised and despatched +parties in all directions, appointing the localities they were to +traverse, the limits of their search, and the time and place for the +next rendezvous. This last was to be on the identical ridge whence poor +Olaf had taken his departure into the unknown land. Karlsefin knew well +that it was his favourite haunt, and intended to search carefully up to +it, never dreaming that the boy would go beyond it after the strict +injunctions he had received not to do so, and the promises he had made. + +"I'm not so sure as you seem to be that Olaf has not gone beyond the +ridge," observed Leif to Karlsefin, after the men had left them. + +"Why not?" asked the latter. "He is a most trustworthy boy." + +"I know it--who should know it so well as his own father?" returned +Leif; "but he is very young. I have known him give way to temptation +once or twice before now. He may have done it again." + +"I trust not," said Karlsefin; "but come, let us make direct for the +ridge, while the others continue the search; we can soon ascertain +whether he has wandered beyond it. I know his favourite tree. +Doubtless his footsteps will guide us." + +Already it had begun to grow dark, so that when they reached the ridge +it was necessary to kindle the torches before anything could be +ascertained. + +"Here are the footsteps," cried Karlsefin, after a brief search. + +Leif, who was searching in another direction, hurried towards his +friend, torch in hand. + +"See, there is Olaf's footprint on that soft ground," said Karlsefin, +moving slowly along, with the torch held low, "but there is no sign of +Snorro's little feet. Olaf always carried him--yet--ah! here they are +on this patch of sand, look. They had halted here--probably to rest; +perhaps to change Snorro's position. I've lost them again--no! here +they are, but only Olaf's. He must have lifted the child again, no +doubt." + +"Look here," cried Leif, who had again strayed a little from his friend. +"Are not these footsteps descending the ridge?" + +Karlsefin hastily examined them. + +"They are," he cried, "and then they go down towards the wood--ay, +_into_ it. Without doubt Olaf has broken his promise; but let us make +sure." + +A careful investigation convinced both parents that the children had +entered that part of the forest, and that therefore all search in any +other direction was useless. Karlsefin immediately re-ascended the +ridge, and, putting both hands to his mouth, gave the peculiar halloo +which had been agreed upon as the signal that some of the searchers had +either found the children or fallen upon their tracks. + +"You'll have to give them another shout," said Leif. + +Karlsefin did so, and immediately after a faint and very distant halloo +came back in reply. + +"That's Biarne," observed Karlsefin, as they stood listening intently. +"Hist! there is another." + +A third and fourth halloo followed quickly, showing that the signal had +been heard by all; and in a very short time the searchers came hurrying +to the rendezvous, one after another. + +"Have you found them?" was of course the first eager question of each, +followed by a falling of the countenance when the reply "No" was given. +But there was a rising of hope again when it was pointed out that they +must certainly be in some part of the tract of dense woodland just in +front of them. There were some there, however--and these were the most +experienced woodsmen--who shook their heads mentally when they gazed at +the vast wilderness, which, in the deepening gloom, looked intensely +black, and the depths of which they knew must be as dark as Erebus at +that hour. Still, no one expressed desponding feelings, but each spoke +cheerfully and agreed at once to the proposed arrangement of continuing +the search all night by torchlight. + +When the plan of search had been arranged, and another rendezvous fixed, +the various parties went out and searched the live-long night in every +copse and dell, in every bush and brake, and on every ridge and knoll +that seemed the least likely to have been selected by the lost little +ones as a place of shelter. But the forest was wide. A party of ten +times their number would have found it absolutely impossible to avoid +passing many a dell and copse and height and hollow unawares. Thus it +came to pass that although they were once or twice pretty near the cave +where the children were sleeping, they did not find it. Moreover, the +ground in places was very hard, so that, although they more than once +discovered faint tracks, they invariably lost them again in a few +minutes. They shouted lustily, too, as they went along, but to two such +sleepers as Olaf and Snorro in their exhausted condition, their wildest +shouts were but as the whisperings of a sick mosquito. + +Gradually the searchers wandered farther and farther away from the spot, +until they were out of sight and hearing. + +We say sight and hearing, because, though the children were capable of +neither at that time, there was in that wood an individual who was +particularly sharp in regard to both. This was a scout of a party of +natives who chanced to be travelling in that neighbourhood at the time. +The man--who had a reddish-brown body partially clad in a deer-skin, +glittering black eyes, and very stiff wiry black hair, besides +uncommonly strong and long white teeth, in excellent order--chanced to +have taken up his quarters for the night under a tree on the top of a +knoll. When, in the course of his slumbers, he became aware of the fact +that a body of men were going about the woods with flaring torches and +shouting like maniacs, he awoke, _not_ with a start, or any such +ridiculous exclamation as "Ho!" "Ha!" or "Hist!" but with the mild +operation of opening his saucer-like eyes until they were at their +widest. No evil resulting from this cautious course of action, he +ventured to raise his head an inch off the ground--which was his rather +extensive pillow--then another inch and another, until he found himself +resting on his elbow and craning his neck over a low bush. Being almost +black, and quite noiseless, he might have been mistaken for a +slowly-moving shadow. + +Gradually he gained his knees, then his feet, and then, peering into +space, he observed Biarne and Krake, with several others, ascending the +knoll. + +For the shadow to sink again to its knees, slope to its elbows, recline +on its face, and glide into the heart of a thick bush and disappear, did +not seem at all difficult or unnatural. At any rate that is what it +did, and there it remained observing all that passed. + +"Ho! hallo! Olaf! Snorro! hi-i-i!" shouted Biarne on reaching the +summit of the knoll. + +"Hooroo!" yelled Krake, in a tone that must have induced the shadow to +take him for a half-brother. + +"Nothing here," said Biarne, holding up the torch and peering round in +all directions. + +"Nothing whatever," responded Krake. + +He little knew at the time that the shadow was displaying his teeth, and +loosening in its sheath a long knife or dagger made of bone, which, from +the spot where he lay, he could have launched with unerring certainty +into the heart of any of those who stood before him. It is well for man +that he sometimes does not know what _might_ be! + +After a brief inspection of the knoll, and another shout or two, they +descended again into the brake and pushed on. The shadow rose and +followed until he reached a height whence he could see that the +torch-bearers had wandered far away to the westward. As the friends and +relatives for whom he acted the part of scout were encamped away to the +eastward, he returned to his tree and continued his nap till daybreak, +when he arose and shook himself, yawned and scratched his head. +Evidently he pondered the occurrences of the night, and felt convinced +that if so many strange men went about looking for something with so +much care and anxiety, it must undoubtedly, be something that was worth +looking for. Acting on this idea he began to look. + +Now, it must be well-known to most people that savages are rather smart +fellows at making observations on things in general and drawing +conclusions therefrom. The shouts led him to believe that lost human +beings were being sought for. Daylight enabled him to see little feet +which darkness had concealed from the Norsemen, whence he concluded that +children were being sought for. Following out his clue, with that +singular power of following a trail for which savages are noted, he came +to the cave, and peered through the bushes with his great eyes, pounced +upon the sleepers, and had his pug nose converted into a Roman--all as +related in the last chapter. + +Sometime after sunrise the various searching parties assembled at the +place of rendezvous--fagged, dispirited, and hungry. + +"Come," said Karlsefin, who would not permit his feelings to influence +his conduct, "we must not allow ourselves to despond at little more than +the beginning of our search. We will breakfast here, lads, and then +return to the ridge where we first saw their footsteps. Daylight will +enable us to track them more easily. Thank God the weather is warm, and +I daresay if they kept well under cover of the trees, the dear children +may have got no harm from exposure. They have not been fasting _very_ +long, so--let us to work." + +Leif and Biarne both fell in with Karlsefin's humour, and cheered the +spirits of the men by their tone and example, so that when the hurried +meal was finished they felt much refreshed, and ready to begin the work +of another day. + +It was past noon before they returned to the ridge and began the renewed +search. Daylight now enabled them to trace the little footsteps with +more certainty, and towards the afternoon they came to the cave where +the children had slept. + +"Here have they spent the night," said Leif, with breathless interest, +as he and Karlsefin examined every corner of the place. + +"But they are gone," returned the other, "and it behoves us to waste no +time. Go, Biarne, let the men spread out--stay!--Is not this the foot +of a man who wears a shoe somewhat different from ours?" + +"'Tis a savage," said Biarne, in a tone of great anxiety. + +Karlsefin made no reply, and the party being now concentrated, they +followed eagerly on, finding the prints of the feet quite plain in many +places. + +"Unquestionably they have been captured by a savage," said Leif. + +"Ay, and he must have taken Snorro on his shoulder, and made poor Olaf +walk alongside," observed Biarne. + +Following the trail with the perseverance and certainty of blood-hounds, +they at last came to the deserted encampment on the banks of the +rivulet. That it had been forsaken only a short time before was +apparent from the circumstance of the embers of the fires still smoking. +They examined the place closely and found the little foot-marks of the +children, which were quite distinguishable from those of the native +children by the difference in the form of the shoes. Soon they came to +marks on the bank of the stream which indicated unmistakeably that +canoes had been launched there. And now, for the first time, the +countenances of Leif and Karlsefin fell. + +"You think there is no hope?" asked the latter. + +"I won't say that," replied Leif; "but we know not what course they have +taken, and we cannot follow them on foot." + +"True," observed Karlsefin, in bitter despondency. + +"The case is not so bad," observed Heika, stepping forward at this +point. "You know we have a number of canoes captured from the savages; +some of us have become somewhat expert in the management of these. Let +a few of us go back and fetch them hither on our shoulders, with +provisions for a long journey, and we shall soon be in a position to +give chase. They cannot have gone far yet, and we shall be sure to +overtake them, for what we lack in experience shall be more than made up +by the strength of our arms and wills." + +"Thou art a good counsellor, Heika," said Karlsefin, with a sad smile; +"I will follow that advice. Go thou and Hake back to the huts as fast +as may be, and order the home-guard to make all needful preparation. +Some of us will follow in thy steps more leisurely, and others will +remain here to rest until you return with the canoes." + +Thus directed the brothers turned their powers of speed to good account, +so that, when some of their comrades returned foot-sore and jaded for +want of rest, they not only found that everything was ready for a start, +but that a good meal had been prepared for them. + +While these remained in the settlement to rest and protect it, the +home-guards were ordered to get ready for immediate service. Before +night had closed in, the brothers, with torches in their hands, headed a +party of fresh men carrying three canoes and provisions on their +shoulders. They reached the encampment again in the early morning, and +by daybreak all was ready for a start. Karlsefin, Thorward, and Heika +acted as steersmen; Krake, Tyrker, and Hake filled the important posts +of bowmen. Besides these there were six men in each canoe, so that the +entire party numbered twenty-four strong men, fully armed with bow and +arrow, sword and shield, and provisioned for a lengthened voyage. + +"Farewell, friends," said Karlsefin to those who stood on the banks of +the little stream. "It may be that we shall never return from this +enterprise. You may rest assured that we will either rescue the +children or perish in the attempt. Leif and Biarne have agreed to +remain in charge of the settlement. They are good men and true, and +well able to guide and advise you. Tell Gudrid that my last thoughts +shall be of her--if I do not return. But I do not anticipate failure, +for the God of the Christians is with us.--Farewell." + +"Farewell," responded the Norsemen on the bank, waving their hands as +the canoes shot out into the stream. + +In a few minutes they reached the great river, and, turning upstream, +were soon lost to view in the depths of the wide wilderness. + + + +CHAPTER NINETEEN. + +NEW EXPERIENCES--DIFFICULTIES ENCOUNTERED AND OVERCOME--THORWARD AND +TYRKER MAKE A JOINT EFFORT, WITH HUMBLING RESULTS. + +It may be as well to remark here, that the Norsemen were not altogether +ignorant of the course of the great river on which they had now +embarked. During their sojourn in those regions they had, as we have +said, sent out many exploring parties, and were pretty well acquainted +with the nature of the country within fifty miles or so in all +directions. These expeditions, however, had been conducted chiefly on +land; only one of them by water. + +That one consisted of a solitary canoe, manned by four men, of whom +Heika was steersman, while Hake managed the bow-paddle, these having +proved themselves of all the party the most apt to learn the use of the +paddle and management of the canoe. During the fight with the savages, +recorded in a previous chapter, the brothers had observed that the man +who sat in the bow was of quite as much importance in regard to steering +as he who sat in the stern; and when they afterwards ascended the river, +and found it necessary to shoot hither and thither amongst the surges, +cross-currents, and eddies of a rapid, they then discovered that simple +steering at one end of their frail bark would not suffice, but that it +was necessary to steer, as it were, at both ends. Sometimes, in order +to avoid a stone, or a dangerous whirlpool, or a violent shoot, it +became necessary to turn the canoe almost on its centre, as on a pivot, +or at least within its own length; and in order to accomplish this, the +steersman had to dip his paddle as far out to one side as possible, to +draw the stern in that direction, while the bowman did the same on the +opposite side, and drew the bow the other way--thus causing the light +craft to spin round almost instantly. The two guiding men thus acted in +unison, and it was only by thoroughly understanding each other, in all +conceivable situations, that good and safe steering could be achieved. + +The canoes which had been captured from the savages were frail barks in +the most literal sense of these words. They were made of the bark of +the birch-tree, a substance which, though tough, was very easily split +insomuch that a single touch upon a stone was sufficient to cause a bad +leak. Hence the utmost care was required in their navigation. But +although thus easily damaged they were also easily repaired, the +materials for reparation--or even, if necessary, reconstruction--being +always at hand in the forest. + +Now although Heika and his brother were, as we have said, remarkably +expert, it does not follow that those were equally so who managed the +other two canoes of the expedition. On the contrary, their experience +in canoeing had hitherto been slight. Karlsefin and his bowman Krake +were indeed tolerably expert, having practised a good deal with the +Scottish brothers, but Thorward turned out to be an uncommonly bad +canoe-man; nevertheless, with the self-confidence natural to a good +seaman, and one who was expert with the oar, he scouted the idea that +anything connected with fresh-water voyaging could prove difficult to +_him_, and resolutely claimed and took his position as one of the +steersmen of the expedition. His bowman, Tyrker, as ill luck would have +it, turned out to be the worst man of them all in rough water, although +he had shown himself sufficiently good on the smooth lake to induce the +belief that he might do well enough. + +But their various powers in this respect were not at first put to the +test, because for a very long way the river was uninterrupted by rapids, +and progress was therefore comparatively easy. The scenery through +which they passed was rich and varied in the extreme. At one part the +river ran between high banks, which were covered to the water's edge +with trees and bushes of different kinds, many of them being exceedingly +brilliant in colour. At another part the banks were lower, with level +spaces like lawns, and here and there little openings where rivulets +joined the river, their beds affording far-reaching glimpses of +woodland, in which deer might occasionally be seen gambolling. +Elsewhere the river widened occasionally into something like a lake, +with wooded islets on its calm surface, while everywhere the water, +earth, and air teemed with animal life--fish, flesh, fowl, and insect. +It was such a sight of God's beautiful earth as may still be witnessed +by those who, leaving the civilised world behind, plunge into the vast +wildernesses that exist to this day in North America. + +Beautiful though it was, however, the Norsemen had small leisure and not +much capacity to admire it, being pre-occupied and oppressed by anxiety +as to the fate of the children. Still, in spite of this, a burst of +admiration would escape them ever and anon as they passed rapidly along. + +The first night they came to the spot where the natives had encamped the +night before, and all hands were very sanguine of overtaking them +quickly. They went about the encampment examining everything, stirring +up the embers of the fires, which were still hot, and searching for +little footprints. + +Hake's unerring bow had supplied the party with fresh venison and some +wild-geese. While they sat over the fires that night roasting steaks +and enjoying marrow-bones, they discussed their prospects. + +"They have got but a short start of us," said Karlsefin, looking +thoughtfully into the fire, before which he reclined on a couch of +pine-branches, "and if we push on with vigour, giving ourselves only +just sufficient repose to keep up our strength, we shall be sure to +overtake them in a day or two." + +"It may be so," said Thorward, with a doubtful shake of the head; "but +you know, brother, that a stern chase is usually a long one." + +Thorward was one of those unfortunate men who get the credit of desiring +to throw wet blankets and cold water upon everything, whereas, poor man, +his only fault was a tendency to view things critically, so as to avoid +the evil consequences of acting on the impulse of an over-sanguine +temperament. Thorward was a safe adviser, but was not a pleasant one, +to those who regard all objection as opposition, and who don't like to +look difficulties full in the face. However, there is no question that +it would have been better for him, sometimes, if he had been gifted with +the power of holding his tongue! + +His friend Karlsefin, however, fully appreciated and understood him. + +"True," said he, with a quiet smile, "as you say, a stern chase is a +long one; nevertheless we are not _far_ astern, and that is what I count +on for shortening the chase." + +"That is a just remark," said Thorward gravely, applying a marrow-bone +to his lips, and drinking the semi-liquid fat therefrom as if from a +cup; "but I think you might make it (this is most excellent marrow!) a +still shorter chase if you would take my advice.--Ho! Krake, hand me +another marrow-bone. It seems to me that Vinland deer have a peculiar +sweetness, which is not so obvious in those of Norway, though perchance +it is hunger which gives the relish; and yet can I truly say that I have +been hungered in Norway. However, I care not to investigate reasons too +closely while I am engaged in the actual practice of consumption." + +Here he put another marrow-bone to his lips, and sucked out the contents +with infinite gusto. + +"And what may your advice be?" asked his friend, laughing. + +"I'll wager that Hake could tell you if his mouth were not too full," +replied Thorward, with a smile. + +"Say, thou thrall, before refilling that capacious cavern, what had best +be done in order to increase our speed?" + +Hake checked a piece of wild-fowl on its passage to his mouth, and, +after a moment's consideration, replied that in his opinion lightening +the load of the canoe was the best thing to be done. + +"And say," continued Thorward, beginning to [eat] a large drumstick, +"how may _that_ be done?" + +"By leaving our provisions behind," answered Hake. + +"Ha! did not I say that he could tell you?" growled Thorward between his +teeth, which were at that moment conflicting with the sinewy part of the +drumstick. + +"There is something in that," remarked Karlsefin. + +"_Something_ in it!" exclaimed Thorward, resting for a moment from his +labours in order to wash all down with a cataract of water; "why, there +is everything in it. Who ever heard of a man running a race with a full +stomach--much less winning it? If we would win we must voyage light; +besides, what need is there to carry salt salmon and dried flesh with us +when the woods are swarming with such as these, and when we have a man +in our company who can bring down a magpie on the wing?" + +"And that's true, if anything ever was," observed Krake, who had been +too busy up to that point to do more than listen. + +Hake nodded his approval of the sentiment, and Karlsefin said that he +quite agreed with it, and would act upon the advice next day. + +"Just take a _very_ little salmon," suggested Tyrker, with a sigh, "for +fear this good fortune should perhaps come suddenly to an end." + +There was a general laugh at Tyrker's caution, and Karlsefin said he was +at liberty to fill his own pockets with salmon for his own use, if he +chose. + +"Sure it would be much better," cried Krake, "to eat a week's allowance +all at once, and so save time and trouble." + +"If I had your stomach, Krake, I might try that," retorted Tyrker, "but +mine is not big enough." + +"Well, now," returned Krake, "if you only continue to over-eat for a +week or two, as you're doing just now, you'll find it big enough--and +more!" + +"We must sleep to-night, and not talk," said Karlsefin gravely, for he +saw that the dispute was likely to wax hot. "Come, get you all to rest. +I will call you two hours hence." + +Every man of the expedition was sound asleep in a few minutes after +that, with the exception of their leader, who was to keep the first +half-hour watch--Thorward, Heika, and Hake being appointed to relieve +him and each other in succession. + +The moon was shining brightly when the two hours had elapsed. This was +very fortunate, because they expected to arrive at the rapids ere long, +and would require light to ascend them. Owing to recent heavy rains, +however, the current was so strong that they did not reach the rapids +till sunrise. Before starting, they had buried all their provisions in +such a way that they might be dug up and used, if necessary, on their +return. + +"'Tis as well that we have daylight here," observed Karlsefin, as he, +Thorward, and Hake stood on a rocky part of the bank just below the +rapids, and surveyed the place before making the attempt. + +It might have been observed that Thorward's face expressed some unusual +symptoms of feeling, as he looked up the river, and saw there nothing +but a turbulent mass of heaving surges dashing themselves wildly against +sharp forbidding rocks, which at one moment were grinning like black +teeth amidst the white foam, and the next were overwhelmed by the +swelling billows. + +"You don't mean to say we have to go up that maelstrom?" he said, +pointing to the river, and looking at Hake. + +"I would there were any other road," answered Hake, smiling, "but truly +I know of none. The canoes are light, and might be carried by land to +the still water above the rapids, but, as you see, the banks here are +sheer up and down without foothold for a crow, and if we try to go round +by the woods on either side, we shall have a march of ten miles through +such a country that the canoes will be torn to pieces before the journey +is completed." + +"Have you and Heika ever ascended that mad stream?" cried Thorward. + +"Ay--twice." + +"Without overturning?" + +"Yes--without overturning." + +Again Thorward bestowed on the river a long silent gaze, and his +countenance wore an expression of blank surprise, which was so amusing +that Karlsefin forgot for a moment the anxiety that oppressed him, and +burst into a hearty fit of laughter. + +"Ye have little to laugh at," said Thorward gravely. "It is all very +well to talk of seamanship--and, truly, if you will give me a good boat +with a stout pair of oars, and the roughest sea you ever saw, I will +show you what I can do--but who ever heard of a man going afloat in an +egg-shell on a monstrous kettle of boiling water?" + +"Why, Hake says he has done it," said Karlsefin. + +"When I see him do it I will believe it," replied Thorward doggedly. + +"You will not, I suppose, object to follow, if I lead the way?" asked +Hake. + +"Go to, thrall! Dost think I am afraid?" said Thorward sternly; and +then, as if he thought such talk trifling, turned on his heel with a +light laugh, and was about to descend the bank of the river to the spot +where the men stood in a group near the canoes, when Karlsefin called +him back. + +"Softly, not so fast, Thorward. Although no doubt we are valiant +sailors--and woe betide the infatuated man who shall venture to deny +it!--yet must we put our pride in our pouches for once, and accept +instruction from Hake. After all, it is said that wise men may learn +something from babes--if so, why may not sea-kings learn from thralls?-- +unless, indeed, we be not up to the mark of wise men." + +"I am all attention," said Thorward. + +"This, then," said Hake, pointing to a large rock in the middle of the +stream, "is the course you must pursue, if ye would reach the upper end +of the rapid in a dry skin. See you yonder rock--the largest--where the +foam breaks most fiercely, as if in wrath because it cannot overleap it? +Well, that is our first resting-place. If you follow my finger +closely, you will see, near the foot of the rapid, two smaller rocks, +one below the other; they only show now and then as the surges rise and +fall, but each has an eddy, or a tail of smooth water below it. Do you +see them?" + +"I see, I see," cried Thorward, becoming interested in spite of himself; +"but, truly, if thou callest that part of the river smooth and a `tail,' +I hope I may never fall into the clutches of the smooth animal to which +that tail belongs." + +"It is smooth compared with the rest," continued Hake, "and has a +back-draught which will enable us to rest there a moment. You will +observe that the stone above has also a tail, the end of which comes +quite down to the head of the tail below. Well, then, you must make +such a bold dash at the rapid that you shall reach the lower eddy. That +gained, the men will rest a space and breathe, but not cease paddling +altogether, else will you be carried down again. Then make a dash into +the stream and paddle might and main till you reach the eddy above. You +will thus have advanced about thirty yards, and be in a position to make +a dash for the long eddy that extends from the big rock." + +"That is all very plain," observed Thorward; "but does it not seem to +you, Hake, that the best way to explain matters would be to go and +ascend while we look on and learn a lesson through our eyes?" + +"I am ready," was the youth's brief reply; for he was a little hurt by +the seaman's tone and manner. + +"Thorward is right, Hake," said Karlsefin. "Go, take your own canoe up. +We will watch you from this spot, and follow if all goes well." + +The young Scot at once sprang down the bank, and in a few minutes his +canoe with its six men, and Heika steering, shot out from the bank +towards the rapid. + +All tendency to jest forsook Thorward as he stood beside his friend on +the cliff with compressed lips and frowning brow, gazing upon the +cork-like vessel which danced upon the troubled waters. In a minute it +was at the foot of the broken water. Then Heika's voice rose above the +roar of the stream, as he gave a shout and urged on his men. The canoe +sprang into the boiling flood. It appeared to remain stationary, while +the men struggled might and main. + +"'Tis too strong for them!" cried Thorward, becoming excited. + +"No; they advance!" said Karlsefin in a deep, earnest tone. + +This was true, but their progress was very small. Gradually they +overcame the power of the stream and shot into the first eddy, amid the +cheers of their comrades on shore. Here they waited only a moment or +two, and then made a dash for the second eddy. There was a shout of +disappointment from the men, because they swept down so fast that it +seemed as if all the distance gained had been lost; but suddenly the +canoe was caught by the extreme tail of the eddy, the downward motion of +its bow was stopped, it was turned straight upstream, and they paddled +easily towards the second rock. Another brief pause was made here, and +then a dash was made for the eddy below the large rock. This was more +easily gained, but the turbulence of the water was so great that there +was much more danger in crossing from one eddy to the other than there +had been before. + +Under the large rock they rested for a few minutes, and then, dashing +out into the rapid, renewed the struggle. Thus, yard by yard, taking +advantage of every available rock and eddy, they surmounted the +difficulty and landed at the head of the rapids, where they waved their +caps to their friends below. + +"It's Krake that wishes he was there!" observed that worthy, wiping the +perspiration from his brow and drawing a long deep breath; for the mere +sight of the struggle had excited him almost as much as if he had +engaged in it. + +"'Tis Krake that will soon be there if all goes well," remarked +Karlsefin, with a laugh, as he came forward and ordered his canoe to be +pushed off. "I will be ready to follow, but you had better go first, +Thorward. If anything befalls you I am here to aid." + +"Well, come along, lads," cried Thorward. "Get into the bow, Tyrker, +and see that you do your duty like a man. Much depends on you--more's +the pity!" He added the last words in a low voice, for Thorward, being +a very self-reliant man, would like to have performed all the duties +himself, had that been possible. + +"Shove off!" + +They shot from the bank and made for the rapid gallantly. Thorward's +shout quite eclipsed that of Heika on taking the rapid. Truly, if +strength of lung could have done it, he might have taken his canoe up +single-handed, for he roared like a bull of Bashan when Tyrker missed a +stroke of his paddle, thereby letting the bow sweep round so that the +canoe was carried back to the point whence it had started. + +Tremendous was the roar uttered by Thorward when they faced the rapid +the second time, and fierce was the struggle of the men when in it, and +anxious was Tyrker to redeem his error--so anxious, in fact, that he +missed another stroke and well-nigh fell overboard! + +It is said that "Fortune favours the brave." There was no lack of +bravery in Tyrker--only lack of experience and coolness--and Fortune +favoured him on this occasion. If he had _not_ missed a stroke and +fallen forward, his miscalculation of aqueous forces would have sent the +canoe past the mark in the opposite direction from the last time; but +the missed stroke was the best stroke of all, for it allowed the canoe +to shoot into the first eddy, and converted a terrific roar of wrath +from Thorward into a hearty cheer. + +Resting a few moments, as Heika and his crew had done, they then +addressed themselves to the second part of the rapid. Here Thorward +steered so well that the canoe took the stream at the proper angle; but +Tyrker, never having perceived what the right angle was, and strongly +impressed with the belief that the bow was pointing too much up the +river, made a sudden stroke on the wrong side! The canoe instantly flew +not only to the tail of the eddy, but right across it into the wild +surges beyond, where it was all but upset, first to one side then to the +other, after which it spun round like a teetotum, and was carried with +fearful violence towards one of those rocky ridges which we have +described as being alternately covered and uncovered by the foam. On +the crest of a bulging cascade they were fortunately borne right over +this ridge, which next moment showed its black teeth, as if grinning at +the dire mischief it might have done if it had only chosen to bite! +Next instant the canoe overturned, and left the men to flounder to land, +while it went careering down towards the gravelly shallows below. + +Now Karlsefin had anticipated this, and was prepared for it. In the +first place, he had caused the arms, etcetera, to be removed from +Thorward's canoe before it set out, saying that he would carry them up +in his canoe, so that his friend's might go light. Then, having his +vessel ready and manned, he at once pushed out and intercepted the other +canoe before it reached the gravelly shallows, where it would have been +much damaged, if not dashed to pieces. + +"That is bad luck," observed Thorward, somewhat sulkily, as, after +swimming ashore, he wrung the water from his garments. + +"Not worse than might have been expected on a first trial," said +Karlsefin, laughing. "Besides, that rascal Tyrker deceived me. Had I +known he was so bad, you should have had Krake." + +Poor Tyrker, very much crestfallen, kept carefully away from the party, +and did not hear that remark. + +"Now it is my turn," continued Karlsefin. "If we get up safely I will +send Heika down to take the bow of your canoe." + +Karlsefin, as we said, was somewhat more expert than most of the men in +managing canoes, and Krake, besides having had more experience than many +of his fellows, had once before visited and ascended this rapid. They +therefore made the ascent almost as well as the Scots had done. + +Arrived at the upper end, Hake and Heika were ordered to remove +everything out of their canoe, and, with a full crew, to run down to the +aid of their friends. Karlsefin himself went with them as one of the +crew, so that he might take the steering paddle when Heika should resign +it in order to act as Thorward's bowman. Thus manned, the second +attempt was crowned with success, and, not long afterwards the three +canoes swept into a smooth reach of the river above the rapids, and +proceeded on their way. + +But a great deal of time had been lost in this way, and Karlsefin felt +that it must be made up for by renewed diligence and protracted labour. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY. + +REMARKABLE EXPERIENCES OF OLAF AND SNORRO--THE FORMER SUFFERS THE PANGS +OF REMORSE. + +A camp of savages is, in some respects, exceedingly unattractive. +Indeed, it may truly be said to be in many respects repulsive. There +are usually odours in such a camp which are repellent to the nose, +dishes that are disgusting to the taste, sights that are disagreeable to +the eyes, sounds that are abhorrent to the ear, and habits that are +uncongenial to the feelings. + +Nevertheless there is much in such a camp that is deeply interesting. +The student of nature, the mental and moral philosopher, the +anthropologist, and the philanthropist--ay, even the cynic--might each +find much food here suited to his particular tastes and powers of mental +digestion. At present, however, we have chiefly to do, good reader, +with that which interests you and me--namely, Olaf and Snorro, who were +prisoners of war in a savage camp. + +The camp referred to was not the small affair already described as +having taken sudden flight from the rivulet which flowed into the great +river, where we have left the Norsemen doing battle with the waters. It +was the great parent, of which that little camp was but an offshoot--the +head-quarters of a whole tribe of savages, who dwelt in it to the extent +of many hundreds. Yet it was not a fixed camp. It was a moving village +of leathern tents, or wigwams, pitched without any regard to order, on +the margin of what appeared to be a small lake, but which was in reality +a mere widening of the great river. + +Hither Olaf and Snorro were brought by their captors, and immediately +conveyed to the tent of the chief, who was an aged and white-haired +though vigorous and strong-boned savage. Whitepow, for such, curiously +enough, was his name, opened his eyes uncommonly wide when he saw the +children of the Norsemen, and, sitting up on the couch of furs on which +he had been reclining, gazed at them for about five minutes without +speaking, almost without winking. + +Snorro did not appear to relish this, for he crept close to Olaf's side +and tried to turn away his eyes, but found this to be impossible, for a +sort of fascination kept them riveted on the countenance of the aged +Whitepow. + +At last the savage chief opened his mouth as well as his eyes, and spoke +to the savage who had brought the children into the royal presence. +That worthy rapidly related the circumstances of the capture--at least +so it is to be presumed, but no one can now tell for certain--after +which Whitepow turned to Olaf and said something which as near as +possible resembled the words: + +"Whardeekum froyoul ittlsiner?" + +"I don't understand you," answered Olaf humbly. Whitepow repeated the +words, and Olaf reiterated his assurance that he could make nothing of +them whatever. + +This concluded the interview at that time, and Whitepow gave an order +which resulted in the children being conveyed to a tent where there were +several women, old and young, to whom they were handed over with a +message which we cannot record, not knowing what it was. + +The reception which they met with from these native women was +flattering, if not in all respects pleasant. First, they were placed in +the centre of the group and gazed at in wondering admiration. Then they +were seized and kissed and hugged all round the circle. Then they were +examined carefully all over, and under as well, their white skins being +as much a matter of interest as their clothing. After that their fair +hair was smoothed and parted by not untender hands, and they were hugged +again--just as two new dolls might have been by a group of sisters on +first making their acquaintance. + +Of course there was an immense deal of talking and chatting and +commenting, also no small amount of giggling, and once or twice one of +the women addressed Olaf; but Olaf shook his head and stuck to his first +assurance that their words were incomprehensible. + +All this was borne by the captives with wonderful equanimity, because +neither was old enough to be much affected by dirtiness of person or +garments, and both were thoroughly able to appreciate kindness. + +Finally, a stout and not bad-looking young woman took possession of +Snorro, and robbed her own offspring in order to bestow on him a very +acceptable drink of milk. This last act quite reconciled him to his +fate, and Olaf, though not so easily won over, was somewhat mollified by +a kindly old woman, who placed him at her side, and set before him a +dish of dried berries. + +When this feeding process was concluded, and the first blush of novelty +began to wear off, the children were turned out in front of the women's +tent, where, seated together on a bit of wood, they underwent the +inspection of the whole tribe, old and young, male and female. This was +a much more trying ordeal, but in about an hour an order was issued +which resulted in the dispersion of every one save a few boys, who were +either privileged individuals or rebellious subjects, for they not only +came back to gaze at the children, but ventured at length to carry them +off to play near the banks of the river. + +Olaf was so far reconciled to his new friends that he did not object to +witness and take an interest in their games, though he resolutely +refused to join, fearing that if he did so his little charge might be +spirited away while he was not watching. + +At last one of the boys, whose head was very small and round, and whose +name appeared to be Powlet, came forward with a little red paint, and +offered to apply it to Olaf's face. All the boys' faces were, we may +observe, more or less painted with black, red, white, and blue colours, +and their heads were decorated more or less with feathers. Indeed, +these feathers constituted, with the exception of a trifling shred of +leather about the loins, and some feathers in their hair, all the +clothing they wore at that season of the year. + +Olaf refused to be painted, whereupon Powlet rubbed the red paint on the +point of his own nose, an operation which so tickled the fancy of +Snorro, that he burst into a hearty fit of laughter, to Olaf's ineffable +joy. + +"That's right, Snorrie," he cried, setting the child on his knee, "laugh +again; do it heartily; it will cheer us both." + +"It am so fun-ny, O'af," said Snorro, repeating the laugh as he looked +at the native boy. + +Observing the success of his efforts to please, Powlet put a spot of the +red paint under each eye, and Snorro laughed so much at this that all +the other boys came crowding round to ascertain and enjoy the joke. + +Powlet now offered to anoint Snorro in the same way, but Snorro +objected, and, pointing to his protector said, with a look of glee-- + +"Do O'af." + +Nothing else would have induced Olaf to submit, but Snorro's wish was +law to him. He therefore consented at once, and Powlet, dipping his +finger in the red paint which he carried in the hollow of his hand, drew +a thick stroke from Olaf's forehead down to the point of his nose, where +he made it terminate in a large, round spot. + +There was a tremendous shout at this, not only from Snorro, but from all +the other boys; and Olaf was so pleased to see Snorro happy, that he +turned to Powlet, pointed to his face, and nodded his head by way of +inviting further decoration. + +Powlet was an intelligent boy. He understood him at once, and went on +with his work, a boy coming up at the moment with some white paint in +his hand, and another with some blue. A white diamond was immediately +planted on each cheek, and a blue circle under each eye, with a red spot +in the centre of each. So far, the work was very striking and +suggestive, but when Powlet finished off by drawing a series of blue, +red, and white lines over Olaf's eyes, in the forms that usually +indicate astonishment, added a red oval to the chin, with a blue spot in +the middle of it, and stuck some feathers in his hair, the effect was +absolutely tremendous, for it caused the native boys to yell with +delight, and Snorro almost to fall off his protector's knee in a fit of +juvenile hysterics. + +"Don't overdo it, Snorrie," said Olaf in some alarm. + +"Oh! O'af, 'oo _is so_ fun-ny!" he cried again, giving way to mirth +till the tears ran down his cheeks. + +At this point a tall savage came rushing out of the chief's tent with +glaring eyes, and made for the spot where the boys were assembled. They +seemed to know at once what was his errand, for, with one consent, they +scattered and fled. The tall savage singled out Powlet, caught him, +punched his head, and flung him into the river, after which he turned, +and, without taking any notice of the captives further than to gaze at +them, returned leisurely to the regal tent. + +Meanwhile Powlet came to the surface, swam like an otter to the shore, +and, clambering up the bank, ran into the woods, seemingly none the +worse of his bath. + +Thus left alone, Olaf put Snorro on his back and sauntered away into the +woods along the banks of the river. Forgetting his ridiculous +appearance, he began to think of home and to feel very sad, while his +charge, overcome with his late exertions, fell asleep on his back. The +longer he walked the sadder he grew, and at last he groaned rather than +said, "What _shall_ I do?" + +Suddenly it occurred to him, that as the savages appeared to be very +careless about watching him, he might run away. It could do no harm to +try, and he would not be in a much worse position than when lost in the +woods before. Under the influence of this thought he stopped and looked +cautiously round in all directions. No one was to be seen. He breathed +hard, turned off the track on tiptoe until he had got into what appeared +to him to be a very dense and sequestered part of the woods, then +suddenly took to his heels and ran for his life! + +A loud laugh sounded in the bushes in front of him, and he stopped short +just as Powlet appeared, wagging his small head and laughing +inordinately. + +Poor Olaf guessed at once that the boy had been set to watch him; he +therefore wheeled about and walked back to the river, where, going out +on a spit of land that he might not be overheard, he sat down on the +ground and communed bitterly with himself. + +"Oh why, why did I break my promise?" he murmured in deep despondency. + +After a long silence he began to think aloud. + +"It all comes of _disobedience_!" he muttered. + +"Father used to say, `If you love me, obey me. If you want to prove +that you love Gudrid, _obey_ her.' That's it, Olaf. It's there that +the sin lies. He told me never to pass the ridge, and I _did_ pass the +ridge, even though I had promised not to; and so, owing to that little +bit of disobedience, here you are, Olaf--and Snorrie too--poor Snorrie-- +and we're likely to remain here for ever, as far as I can see. Oh that +I had not done it! But what good can wishing do _now_? If I had loved +father better, perhaps I would have obeyed him better." + +It would almost seem as if Olaf had heard of such a word as this--"If ye +love me, keep my commandments!" + +After a few minutes he broke forth again--"Yes, I know that I did not +intend to disobey; nevertheless I _did_ it. And I did not think such +awful things would follow--but that does not mend the matter. What +_shall_ I do? Snorrie, I think I could gladly lay down my life, if I +could give you back once more to your mother." + +Snorro heard not the remark. He was as sound as a top, and Olaf looked +sadly at the little head that lay on his shoulder. Then it struck him +that it was high time to have the child put to bed, so he rose and +hurried back to the women's tent, where he was received with as much +kindness as before. + +Very soon Snorro's little head reposed upon a pillow of rabbit-skins, +and not long after that Olaf went to rest beside him on a deer-skin +couch, where, lying on his back, he could see the sky through the hole +in the top of the tent whence the smoke of the fire escaped. As he lay +there the burden of his thoughts was ever the same--"Oh _why_ did I do +it? Why did I disobey?" Thus the poor boy lay, self-condemned, and +gazed upwards and pondered, until sweet sleep came and carried heart and +brain to the blessed refuge of oblivion. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY ONE. + +REINFORCEMENTS SENT OFF TO KARLSEFIN--FOES DISCOVERED IN THE WOODS--A +NIGHT ATTACK, AND OTHER WARLIKE MATTERS. + +We must return now for a little to the settlement of the Norsemen, +which, by the way, had by this time come to be called by the name of +Leifsgaard. + +Here, from Thorward's house, there issued tones which indicated the +existence of what is popularly known as a "breeze." Human breezes are +usually irregular, and blow after the manner of counter-currents; but in +Thorward's habitation the breezes almost invariably blew in one +direction, and always issued from the lungs of Freydissa, who possessed +a peculiar knack of keeping and enjoying all the breeze to herself, some +passive creature being the butt against which it impinged. + +On the present occasion that butt was Bertha. Indeed, Bertha was a +species of practising-butt, at which Freydissa exercised herself when +all other butts failed, or when she had nothing better to do. + +"Don't say to me that you can't help it!" she cried, in her own amiably +shrill tones. "You can help it well enough if you choose. You are +always at it, morning, noon, and night; I'm quite sick of you, girl; I'm +sorry I brought you here; I'd send you back to Greenland to-morrow if I +could. If the ship sank with you on the passage, I'd rejoice--I +_would_! There! don't say it again, now; you're going to--I can see +that by your whimpering look. _Don't_ say you can't help it. Don't! +don't! Do you hear?" + +"Indeed, _indeed_ I can't--" + +"There! I knew you would," shrieked Freydissa, as she raised herself +from the wash-tub in which she had been manipulating some articles of +clothing as if she were tearing Bertha to pieces--"_why_ can't you?" + +"It isn't easy to help weeping," whimpered Bertha, as she continued to +drive her spinning-wheel, "when one thinks of all that has passed, and +poor--" + +"Weeping! weeping!" cried Freydissa, diving again into the tub; "do you +call that weeping? _I_ call it downright blubbering. Why, your face is +as much _begrutten_ as if you were a mere baby." + +This was true, for what between her grief at the sudden disappearance of +Olaf and Snorro, and the ceaseless assaults of her mistress, who was +uncommonly cross that morning, Bertha's pretty little face was indeed a +good deal swelled and inflamed about the eyes and cheeks. She again +took refuge in silence, but this made no difference to Freydissa, or +rather it acted, if anything, as a provocative of wrath. "Speak, you +hussy!" was usually her irate manner of driving the helpless little +handmaid out of that refuge. + +"What were you going to say? Poor what?" she asked sharply, after a few +minutes' silence. + +"I was going to say that poor Snorro and--" + +"Oh! it's all very well to talk of poor Snorro," interrupted her +mistress; "you know quite well that you took to snivelling long before +Snorro was lost. You're thinking of Hake, you are. You know you are, +and you daren't deny it, for your red face would give you the lie if you +did. Hake indeed! Even though he _is_ a thrall, he's too good for such +a silly thing as you. There, be off with you till you can stop your +_weeping_, as you call it. Go!" + +Freydissa enforced her command by sending a mass of soapy cloth which +she had just wrung out after the retreating Bertha. Fortunately she was +a bad shot. The missile flew past its intended object, and, hitting a +hen, which had ventured to intrude, on the legs, swept it with a +terrific cackle into the road, to the amazement, not to say horror, of +the cock and chickens. + +As Bertha disappeared Biarne entered the room--"Hallo! Freydissa, +stormy weather--eh?" + +"You can go outside and see for yourself," answered Freydissa angrily. + +"So I mean to," returned Biarne, with a smile, "for the weather is +pleasanter outside than in; but I must first presume to put the question +that brought me here. Do you chance to know where Leif is this +morning?" + +"How should I know?" + +"By having become acquainted with the facts of the case somehow," +suggested Biarne. + +"Well, then, I don't know; so you can go study the weather." + +"Oho! mistress: I see that it is time we sent to Iceland for another +cat!" + +This allusion to her husband's former treatment of her pet was almost +the only thing that could calm--or at least restrain--the storm! +Freydissa bit her lips and flushed as she went on with her washing, but +she said nothing more. + +"Well, good-morning," said Biarne as he left the house to search for +Leif. + +He found him busily engaged in executing some repairs on board the +"_Snake_." + +"I have a thought in my head," said Biarne. + +"Out with it then," replied Leif, wiping his brow, "because thoughts, if +kept long in the brain, are apt to hatch, and the chicken-thoughts are +prone to run away at the moment of birth, and men have a tendency to +chase the chickens, to the utter forgetting of the original hens! What +is thy thought, Biarne?" + +"That I should take as many of the men as you can spare," he replied, +"and go off by water to reinforce Karlsefin." + +"That is strange," said Leif. "I sometimes think that there must be a +mysterious influence which passes between mind and mind. The very same +thought came into my head this morning when I was at work on this oar, +and I had intended to talk with you on the subject. But why do you +think this course of action needful?" + +"Just because the party of savages may turn out to be larger than we +imagined, or they may be joined by others, and it has occurred to me +that the force which is out with Karlsefin is barely sufficient to make +a good stand against heavy odds. With a small party heavy odds against +you is a serious matter; but with a large party heavy odds on the side +of the enemy makes little weight--unless, indeed, their men are willing +to come on and be killed in large numbers, which my experience of +savages assures me that they are never willing to do." + +"Your reasons, Biarne, are very much the same as my own; therefore, +being of one mind, we shall go about the business without delay, for if +our aid is to reach them at all it must be extended at once. Go, then, +select and collect your men; I will be content to guard the place with +the half of those that are now here; and make haste, Biarne, the more I +think of it the more I fear delay." + +Biarne was not slow to act. In a remarkably brief space of time he had +selected his men, prepared the canoes, loaded them with arms and food, +and got everything ready; so that before the afternoon had far advanced +he was enabled to set off with four canoes and thirty-two men. + +Meanwhile Leif had set those that remained to complete a small central +point of defence--a sort of fortalice--which had been for some time in +preparation as a last refuge for the colonists in the event of their +ever being attacked by overwhelming numbers. + +Karlsefin had long seen the propriety of building some such stronghold; +but the friendly relations that had existed for a considerable period +between the Norsemen and the natives had induced him to suspend building +operations, until several annoying misunderstandings and threats on the +part of the savages had induced him to resume the work. At the time of +which we write it was almost completed. + +This fortress was little more than a strong palisade of stout planks +about twelve feet high, placed close together, with narrow slits on +every side for the discharge of arrows, and a platform all round the top +inside, on which men could stand to repel an assault or discharge stones +and other missiles over the wall. But the chief strength of the place +lay in its foundation, which was the summit of a small isolated rocky +mound in the centre of the hamlet. The mound was not more than thirty +feet high, but its sides were so steep that the top could not be reached +without difficulty, and its area was so small that the little +fortification embraced the whole of it. It was large enough, however, +to contain the whole population of the place, exclusive of the cattle. + +To the completion, then, of this place of refuge, Leif addressed himself +with all the energy of his nature. A large shed was erected in one +corner of it, with a strong plank roof, to protect the women from +stones, arrows, and javelins, which were the only projectiles in vogue +at that period of the world's history. Another shed was built just +under the fortalice, on the lake side, for the safe housing of the live +stock. Arrows were made in great numbers by some of the men, while +others gathered and stored an immense supply of heavy ammunition in the +shape of stones. Besides this a large quantity of dried provisions was +stored in the women's shed, also a supply of water; but in regard to the +last, being near the lake, and within easy bow-shot of their vessel, +they trusted to bold night-sallies for additional supplies of the +indispensable fluid. Finally, the work was carried on with such vigour +that eight days after Biarne's departure it was finished. + +Finished--and not a moment too soon! At the time when Biarne started on +his voyage, the woods were, unknown to the Norsemen, alive with savages. +Fortunately these had not observed the departure of the canoes, the +whole of them being engaged at the time deep within the woods, holding a +council of war, in which it was resolved to attack the white invaders of +their land, kill them all, and appropriate their property. + +Leif committed a slight mistake in not sending out scouts at this time +to guard against surprise, but he was so eager to have the works +completed that he grudged sending away any of his small body of men. + +On the day when everything had been got ready, he sent a man named +Hengler, who was an expert bowman, to procure some venison. In less +than an hour Hengler was seen running towards the hamlet at break-neck +speed, with his eyes almost starting out of his head, his hair streaming +in the breeze, and two savages close on his heels. + +"To arms, men!" shouted Leif, as he snatched up a bow, and, without +waiting to put on helmet or sword, ran out to meet Hengler. + +Seeing this, the savages stopped, hastily fitted arrows to their +bowstrings and discharged them, the one at Hengler, the other at Leif. +The first just grazed the flying Norseman's ear; the other fell short, +but before a second discharge was possible Leif had sent an arrow +whizzing at the first savage. It pierced his thigh. Uttering a fierce +yell, he plucked the shaft out of the wound, and turning round fled back +to the woods followed by his companion. + +"Not a moment to lose," gasped Hengler, as he ran into the hamlet. +"There are hundreds of them everywhere." + +"Coming towards us?" asked Leif. + +"Not when I saw them, but doubtless when these two return they will come +down like a mountain foss." + +"Quick, get into the fort, lads!--Stay, Hengler, assist me with the +women." + +"Do you think they really mean to attack us?" asked Gudrid, who, with +Bertha and Freydissa, came forward at the moment. + +"Assuredly they do," answered Leif; "come, follow Hengler to the fort. +Whatever they intended before, the arrow in that fellow's leg will +settle the question. Where are Thora and Astrid?" + +"In the dairy," replied Gudrid. + +"Away, then; I go to fetch them." + +"Would that I were a man!" exclaimed Freydissa, catching up a spear and +shaking it as she strode along with the rest. "_I'd_ teach them to +think twice before coming here to disturb peaceable folk!" + +"Peaceable," thought Leif, with a grim smile, as he hurried towards the +dairy; but he said nothing, for he deemed that to be a time for silence +and action. + +In a few minutes nearly all the population of the place had taken refuge +in the fort, and soon afterwards the livestock was driven into the shed +beside the rock. The gate was then shut and the men mounted the +battlements, or breastwork, to watch for the expected foe. + +But no foe made his appearance. Hour after hour passed away; the sun +descended behind the tree-tops and below the horizon; the grey mantle of +evening overspread the scene; still the watchers stood on the +battlements and gazed intently into the forest--still there was not the +slightest sound or symptom of an enemy in the vast sleeping wilderness. + +"Now this is passing strange," observed Hengler, who had been appointed +second in command, and stood beside Leif. + +"Not so strange as ye suppose," replied Leif. "Many a time have I +fought with men in the mountains of Norway and on the plains of Valland, +and invariably have I found that a surprise is never attempted save in +the night." + +"True," returned Hengler, "but when a very strong foe stands before a +very weak one, it seems to me childish to delay the assault." + +"Thine ignorance of war must be great, Hengler," returned Leif, +regarding the man with a smile, "if thou hast yet to learn that a body +of men weak in numbers becomes passing strong when posted behind good +walls, with plenty of missiles and provender." + +"My knowledge of war is not great," said the man, who was quite a youth, +"but methinks it is like to improve now." + +"I fear it is," returned Leif sadly, "but now I will give thee a job to +perform that is necessary. From my experience of such matters I feel +well assured that the savages intend an assault during the night, when +they doubtless expect that their numbers will more easily cope with and +overcome us; but in my judgment it is likely that they understand +nothing of this fort-work, therefore I shall give _them_ a surprise, +instead of receiving one at their hands. Go thou, then, with six of the +most active among the men, and slip as quietly as may be into the +forest; gather there as many pine cones as shall fill your shields to +overflowing, and bring them hither, along with a quantity of birch bark. +If ye are attacked fight your way back, and we will cover your retreat +from the ramparts." + +While Hengler and six men were absent on this duty, another small party +was sent to fetch into the fort a log about eighteen feet long, which +lay on the ground close at hand; at the same time they were ordered to +run down to the lake and bring up three or four old planks which had +lain for a long time in the water, and were quite sodden. These things +were all secured and carried into the fortress in the course of a few +minutes. The log was then set up on end and sunk deep into a hole in +the ground, so that it remained standing in the centre of the fort with +the top just reaching a little above the walls. Pegs were driven into +it all the way up, so that a man could easily ascend it. On the top of +this pole was affixed a platform made of the soaked planks, about six +feet square, with a hole left near the head of the pole through which a +man could thrust himself. These Norsemen were smart in using their +hands and axes. The contrivance which we have taken so long to describe +was erected in a very few minutes. It was well-nigh completed when +Hengler and his party returned with the pine cones and birch bark, both +of which substances are exceedingly resinous and inflammable. Leif made +the men carry them to the top of the pole, and pile them on the +platform. He then ordered a small fire to be kindled in a corner of the +fort, but to be kept very low and small, so that the tiny wreath of +smoke which arose from it might be dissipated before it reached the +battlements. After that he called all the men to him. + +"Now, my lads," said he, "it is likely that these savages will try to +take us by surprise. This they will not find it easy to do. From what +I know of them they will come like the fox--slily--and try to pounce +upon us. We will let them come; we will let them pounce, and not show +face until such time as I give the word--then ye will know how to quit +you like men. Away, all of you, to rest--each man with his shield above +him and his sword by his side. I myself will do the part of sentinel." + +The men quietly obeyed this order. Leif did not think it necessary to +say more to them, but to Hengler and two others who had been selected as +leaders he revealed more minutely the intended plan of action before +they lay down. + +Leaving Hengler for a few minutes to guard the walls, he entered the +shed where the women were seated. + +"You must keep well under cover, Gudrid," he said, "for it is likely +that these fellows will shower some arrows upon us--perhaps something +heavier; but we are well prepared to receive them." + +"Are our enemies numerous?" asked Gudrid anxiously. + +"So it is said, but that will do them little service so long as we are +behind these walls." + +"I wish I had my fingers in their chief's hair!" muttered Freydissa +between her teeth. + +"I echo the wish you expressed not long ago," said Leif laughing. +"Would that thou wert a man, Freydissa, for assuredly a spirit like +thine is invaluable on the field of battle." + +"Thankful am I that there are other fields besides battle-fields where +women may be useful," observed Bertha, who was seated on a box beside +Astrid, with her arm round her waist. + +Freydissa merely cast on her handmaid a look of scorn, for she was aware +that neither the time nor place was suited to the exercise of her +peculiar talents. + +"I just looked in to assure you that all goes well," said Leif, +addressing the women generally, "and that you have nothing to fear." + +"We fear _nothing_!" said Freydissa, answering for the rest. + +The somewhat flippant remark, "Speak for yourself," might have been +appropriately made by some of her sisterhood, but they were all too +anxious about the impending danger to heed what she said. + +When Leif rejoined Hengler on the walls, the shades of night had fallen +on the forest. He advised his lieutenant to lie down, but Hengler +begged and obtained permission to share his vigil. + +There was no moon that night, and it became extremely dark--just such a +night as was suited to the purpose of the natives. Leif stood +motionless, like a statue, leaning on his spear. His man sat on the +rampart; both gazed and listened with painful intensity. + +At last Leif pointed to what appeared to be a moving object on the space +of cleared ground that intervened between the slight wall of the hamlet +and the edge of the forest. + +"Awake the men," he whispered, "and let not a sound of voice or clank of +sword be heard." + +Hengler made no reply, but glided silently away. One by one the men +came up with the light tread of cats, and manned the walls, keeping well +under cover of the parapet--each taking his appointed station beside his +particular pile of stones and sheaf of arrows, which lay on the +platform, while below a man with a bow was stationed at every slit. + +Suddenly there arose on the night air a yell so fierce, so prolonged, +and so peculiar, that it made even the stout hearts of the Norsemen +quail for a moment--it was so unearthly, and so unlike any war-cry they +had ever before heard. Again and again it was repeated, then a rushing +sound was heard, and hundreds of dark objects were indistinctly seen +leaping over the slight wall of felled trees that surrounded the hamlet. + +With furious shouts the savages surrounded the houses, burst open the +doors, and rushed in; but they rushed out again almost immediately, and +their yells were exchanged for exclamations of surprise as they went +about searching in the dark for their concealed enemies. Of course they +came to the rock-fortress almost immediately after, and another war-cry +was uttered as they surrounded the place in hundreds, but as there was +still no sound or appearance of their expected foe, they became suddenly +silent, as if under the impression that there was something mysterious +in the affair which was not in accordance with their past experiences. + +They nevertheless clambered to the top of the rock, and began to feel +round the bottom of the wooden palisades for a door. + +At that moment, while they were clustering thick as bees round the base +of the building, Leif gave a preconcerted signal. One of the men +applied a light to the pile of bark and fir-cones, and a bright flash of +flame shot upward as Leif said,--"Up, lads!" in deep stern tones. + +Instantly a shower of heavy stones descended on the pates of the +savages, who rolled down the steep sides of the mound with shrieks and +cries and yells very different indeed from those which had characterised +their assault. From all directions the savages now concentrated on the +fortress. At the same time the fire suddenly shot up with such a glare +that the whole scene was made nearly as light as day, and from the +parapets and every loop-hole of the fortress a very hail of arrows +poured forth into the midst of them, while their own shafts either +quivered in the palisade or fell harmless from the shields and helmets +of the Norsemen. + +Even in that hour of extreme danger, Leif's desire to spare life, with a +view to future proposals of peace, was exemplified in his ordering the +men to draw their bows slightly, so as to wound without killing, as much +as possible, and to aim as well as they could at the legs of the foe! +One result of this was, that the wounded men were soon very numerous, +and, as they fled away, filled the woods with such howls of agony that +their still unhurt comrades were more alarmed than they would probably +have been if the ground had been strewn with the dead. + +At this point a vigorous sally from the fortress, and a deep-toned Norse +cheer, settled the question for the time being. The entire army of +dark-skinned warriors turned and fled into its native wilderness! + +There was not, it may be well to remark here, so much danger in this +sally as we moderns might suppose, for, even though the savages had not +run, but had faced and surrounded their enemy, these Norsemen, with +their massive limbs, sweeping swords, large shields, and defensive +armour, could have cut their way back again to the fort through hundreds +of such half-naked foes. + +Of course Leif had expected them to fly, and had no intention of +retiring immediately to the fort. He merely went the length of the +outer wall, and then, with half of his men, kept up a vigorous shouting +to expedite the flight of the foe, while the other half picked up as +many arrows as they could find. Leif was glad to learn, on returning to +the fort, that only two dead men had been discovered on the ground. + +But the savages had not given in by any means, as became pretty clear +from the noise they made in the woods soon afterwards. This continued +all night, and Leif ordered the fire to be extinguished, lest they +should be tempted by its light to send a flight of arrows among them, +which might wound some of his people when off their guard. + +When the first grey light of dawn appeared, it became evident to the +beleaguered Norsemen what the savages had been about. Not very far from +the fortress an enormous pile of dry timber had been raised, and, +although it was within easy bow-shot, the savages managed, by dodging +from tree to tree, to get under its shelter with fresh logs on their +shoulders, and thus increased the pile continually. + +"They mean to burn us out!" exclaimed Hengler anxiously. + +"Rather to smoke us out," observed one of the men. "Fire can never +reach us from that distance." + +Leif, who was very grave, shook his head and said:-- + +"If they make the pile very big it may reach us well enough. They have +plenty of hands and no lack of wood. See, they are piling it to +windward. God grant that the breeze may not increase, else shall we +have to forsake the fortress. Nevertheless our good ship is at hand," +he added, in a more cheerful tone, "and they will find us tough to deal +with when we get upon the water.--Come, lads, we will at all events +harass if we cannot stop them." + +So saying, Leif ordered the men to keep up a constant discharge of +arrows whenever they obtained a glimpse of the savages, and he himself +headed a sally and drove them back to the woods. But as soon as he and +his men had returned to the fortress, out came the savages again like a +swarm of bees, and continued their work vigorously. + +Thus the morning passed away, and the pile of the intended bonfire, +despite the arrows and the frequent sallies of the Norsemen, continued +slowly but steadily to grow. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY TWO. + +HAKE MAKES A BOLD VENTURE, BUT DOES NOT WIN--THE NORSEMEN FIND THAT +THERE IS MANY A SLIP 'TWIXT THE CUP AND THE LIP. + +When Karlsefin and his men had surmounted the rapid, as before +described, they found their future advance unimpeded, and, in the +natural course of things--or of the river--arrived, not long after the +children, at the lake-like expansion on the shores of which the native +village stood. + +This village, it must be understood, was not a permanent one. The +natives were nomads. Their tents were merely poles cut as required from +the neighbouring woods, tied together at the top, spread out in a circle +at the base, and covered with leather, which coverings were the only +parts of their habitations the natives deigned to carry about with them. +They were here to-day and away to-morrow, stopping a longer or shorter +time in each encampment according to fancy, or to the measure of their +success in procuring food. The particular tribe of natives which had +captured the Norsemen's children had only just come to the locality; +they therefore knew nothing of the arrival of the white strangers in +their land, except what they had recently learned from their scouts, as +we have seen. + +Karlsefin's canoe led the way; hence, on turning sharp round a point of +rock that jutted out into the stream, Krake was the first who caught +sight of the smoke that rose above the tree-tops. + +"Hist! hold on," he exclaimed in a hoarse whisper, looking over his +shoulder as he backed-water suddenly. Karlsefin and the men instantly +did the same, and sent the canoe back under the shelter of the point. +The other canoes of course followed suit. + +"The Skraelingers!" whispered Krake. "I saw the smoke of their fires." + +"Did you see tents?" asked the leader. + +"No; there was scarce time to see anything before we got back here." + +"What do you advise?" asked Karlsefin, looking at Thorward. + +"Go ashore and attack them at once," he replied. + +"Ay, that's it, there's nothing like fighting it out at once!" muttered +Krake in an undertone. + +"My advice," said Karlsefin, "is, that we cross the river and get on +yonder height, which from its position must needs overlook the camp of +the savages, and there reconnoitre and form our plans." + +"Well, I daresay your advice is best after all," rejoined Thorward, with +a smile. "You were always a cautious and peaceful man; though I'm bound +in fairness to admit that you can fight passing well when it comes to +that." + +"Thanks for your good opinion," said Karlsefin, laughing quietly. "So +now, lads, turn about and follow me closely. Keep silence, and dip your +paddles as lightly as may be." + +Saying this, he returned a considerable way down the river; keeping very +close in to the banks, which were overhung with bushes, until he reached +a point where it seemed likely that the party could cross without being +observed. There was a slight rapid at the place, so that they had only +to enter it at an angle with the bank and were swept across in a few +moments, almost without requiring to use their paddles. + +Landing at the edge of a dense thicket, they hauled the canoes out of +the water, secreted them carefully, and then, taking their arms, made a +detour through the forest in the direction of the cliff before referred +to by Karlsefin. In less than half an hour they reached it, and found, +as had been anticipated, that it commanded a view of the native +encampment, which to their dismay they now discovered was an immense +one, filled with many hundreds of men, besides women and children. + +Here, prone on their breasts, and scarce venturing to raise their heads +above the grass, the two leaders held a consultation, while their men +kept well in the background. + +"This is an unfortunate business," said Karlsefin. + +"Truly it is," replied Thorward; "but the question is, can this be the +set of rascals who carried off the children? It seems to me that, being +a small band, as we know, they did not belong to the same set." + +"That may be so, Thorward;--but I incline to the belief that the small +party was but an offshoot from the large one, and that our dear little +ones are even now with the people before us." + +As if to put the matter beyond doubt, Olaf, with Snorro on his back, +issued at that moment from the woods on the opposite side of the river, +and went out upon the identical spit of sand where, on the previous +evening, he had held such bitter communings with his own spirit. The +Norseman leaders recognised the children at once, being almost within +hail of them, and it was with difficulty they restrained the impulse to +spring to their feet and shout. + +"Thanks be to God for the sight of them at all events," said Karlsefin +fervently; "see, the dear boy has brought my darling there to amuse +him.--Ah! little dost thou know, Olaf, the hold that thy kindness has +given thee of his father's heart!" + +"'Twould be well if he had a hold of the father's hand just at this +time," drily observed Thorward, who was not gifted with much of a +sentimental temperament. + +"That is not easy of accomplishment," returned the other. "Even you +would scarcely, methinks, advise so small a band of men to make an open +attack on five or six hundred savages." + +"I would not advise it," replied Thorward; "nevertheless, if it came to +the worst I would _do_ it. But what, then, is your advice?" + +"Why, _until_ it comes to the worst we must try strategy," answered +Karlsefin. "I will call Hake to our council; the youth, I have +observed, is a deep thinker, and clear-sighted." + +When Hake was summoned, and had laid himself down beside his leaders, he +remained for some time silently gazing on the busy scene below, where +some men in canoes were spearing fish in the bay, and others were +skinning and cutting up deer near the edge of the woods, while women +were cooking and engaged in other domestic duties at the doors of the +tents, and children and dogs were romping about everywhere. + +"Could we not get into our canoes," suggested Thorward, "make a dash at +the spit of sand, and carry off the children at a swoop before the +brown-skinned rascals were well aware of us?" + +"They would see us before we got half-way to the spit," replied +Karlsefin, "carry the children into the woods, and then be ready to +receive us in hundreds on shore.--What think you, Hake; can you suggest +any plan of outwitting these savages?" + +"I have a plan," answered the Scot, "but I fear you will deem it +foolish." + +"Out with it, man, foolish or otherwise," said Thorward, who was +beginning to chafe under difficulties that appeared to be +insurmountable, even by his favourite method--force of arms. + +"If ye approve of it," returned Hake, "I will cross the river alone and +unarmed, and walk straight to the spot where the children are now +seated. Much of the way is concealed by shrubs, and when I saunter +across the open part, it may be that I shall scarce be noticed until I +am near them. If I be, then will I make a dash, catch them up, make for +the rapid, plunge in, and, on gaining the opposite bank, run to meet +you. We can then hasten to the canoes--fight our way to them if need +be--and sweep down the river. We shall probably get a fair start; and +if so, it will go hard but we reach Leifsgaard before they overtake us. +If not, why--" + +Hake touched the hilt of his sword by way of completing the sentence. + +"A rare plan!" said Thorward with a suppressed chuckle; "and how, my +bold youth, if thou art observed and caught before getting hold of the +children?" + +"I will then set my wits to devise some other plan. It may be of some +advantage to them that I should be a captive along with the children, +and at most it is but one man lost to the expedition." + +"Ay, but that would be a heavy loss," said Karlsefin; "nevertheless the +plan seems to me not so unlikely--only there are one or two points about +which I have my doubts. In the first place, although your legs are +marvellously good, I fear that with the additional weight of Olaf and +Snorro on them, the fleet runners among the savages, of whom there must +be many, would soon overtake thee." + +"With Olaf on my back, Snorro under my left arm, and the right arm free +to swing--I think _not_," replied Hake, quietly but decidedly. + +"Then as to crossing: how do you--" + +"I would swim," replied Hake. + +"What! with the weight and drag of wet garments to cumber you!" +exclaimed Thorward; "besides making it clear to the savages, if they +caught you, that you had come from the opposite bank of the river, where +your _friends_ might be expected to be waiting for you!" + +"I would tie my clothes in a tight bundle on the top of my head," said +Hake. "Many a time have I crossed the streams of my native land in this +manner." + +"Well, ye have a ready answer for everything," returned Thorward; +"nevertheless I like not the plan." + +"If you cannot suggest a better, I am disposed to let Hake try it," said +Karlsefin. + +Thorward had no better plan to suggest. Indeed, the more he thought of +it the more did he feel inclined to make a tremendous onslaught, cut as +many men to pieces as he could before having his own life taken, and so +have done with the whole affair for ever. Fortunately for Olaf and +Snorro his counsels were not followed. + +In a few minutes Hake was ready. His brother was ordered to lead the +men back to the canoes, there to keep in close hiding and await further +orders. Meanwhile Karlsefin remained on the cliff to watch the result. + +Hake felt it to be a desperate venture, but he was possessed of that +species of spirit which rejoices in such, and prefers danger to safety. +Besides, he saw at a glance that there would be no chance whatever of +success if his leaders made up their minds to attempt an open attack +against such fearful odds. + +With a light step the young Scot descended to the river, thinking of +Bertha as he went. A few minutes afterwards he was seen--or rather his +head with a bundle on it--was seen crossing the river by the watchers on +the cliff. A few minutes later, and he was on the opposite shore +rapidly putting on his light garments. Thereafter he entered the +bushes, and a glimpse could be caught of him ever and anon as he glided +swiftly, like the panther towards his prey. + +When the last point capable of affording concealment was gained, Hake +assumed a careless air, and, with his head down, as if in meditation, +sauntered towards the spit of land where Olaf and Snorro were still +playing. + +"Well done!" exclaimed Thorward, with a look of admiration; "cleverly, +bravely done!" + +There is no doubt that such was the case, and that Hake would have +reached the children unobserved by the natives had not Olaf chanced to +notice him while he was yet about fifty yards off. He recognised him at +once, and, with a shout of joy, ran to meet him. + +Hake dashed past him, sprang toward Snorro, whom he caught up, and, +stooping, cried--"Up, Olaf! up for your life!" + +Olaf understood at once, sprang on his back, and held on tight, while +Hake, bending low, sped away at a pace that defied pursuit, though by +that time a hundred savages were almost at his heels! + +It was obvious from the first that the lithe Scot was well able to +achieve his purpose. He was already nearing the rapid. His pursuers +were far behind, and Karlsefin could scarcely restrain a shout of +exultation as he rose to run round to his canoes, when he observed that +a party of more than a dozen natives, who chanced to be ascending the +river's bank on foot, met the fugitive. Observing that he was a +stranger, and pursued by natives, they crossed his path at once. + +Hake stopped abruptly, glanced at the bushes, then turned to the river, +and was on the point of plunging in, when a canoe, with four savages in +it, shot out from the bank just below him. + +He saw at once that escape was impossible. Feeling intuitively that +submission was his best policy, he set the children on the ground and +quietly suffered himself to be taken prisoner. + +"I knew it! I _said_ it!" growled Thorward between his teeth, as he +sprang up, drew his sword, and slashed down two small trees at a single +stroke in his wrath, then rushing through the woods, he made for the +canoes. + +Karlsefin followed in a state of mind almost as furious. It was such a +bitter disappointment to fail so signally on the very eve of success! + +The canoes were already in the water and manned when the leaders reached +them, for Heika, who had been left in charge, knew well that whatever +might be the result of the enterprise, prompt action would be necessary. + +"Quick, shove off!" cried Karlsefin, taking his place, and driving his +paddle into the water with such force that the light craft shot from the +bank like an arrow. + +The men were not slow to obey. The fierce spirit of their leader seemed +to be catching, and the foam curled from their respective bows, leaving +a long white track behind, as they rushed up the river and swept out +upon the broad expanse above. + +Of course they had been seen before reaching that point, and the savages +immediately lined the banks with armed men. They did not, however, go +out upon the spit of sand where Olaf and Snorro had first been observed +by their friends. That point was so high up the stream, that it did not +seem to be considered by any one as worthy of attention. This Karlsefin +observed at once, and formed his plans accordingly. He advanced as if +he were about to land below the spit, but made no hostile demonstrations +of any kind, and paddled so quietly on nearing the shore, that the +savages did not seem to understand him, and, although ready with their +arrows for instant action, they remained passive. + +When within a short distance of the land, Karlsefin suddenly, but still +quietly, turned the head of his canoe up the stream, and made for the +spit of sand. The other canoes followed. The natives, perceiving the +intention of the strangers, uttered a wild shout, and made for the same +place along the shore, but before they reached it Karlsefin had landed +with all his men, and, with their stalwart figures and strange arms, +presented such an imposing front that the natives stopped short. + +At this point the crowd opened a little to let some one pass, and +Whitepow came to the front. Judging him to be the chief, Karlsefin at +once laid down his sword, and, stepping a few paces in front of his men, +held up his hands and made demonstrations of a peaceful kind. + +But Whitepow was not peacefully inclined. Although aged, he was a +sturdy fellow, stood erect, and carried a heavy club on his shoulder. +To the Norseman's demonstrations he replied by frowning fiercely and +shaking his head savagely, as though to intimate that he was much too +old a bird to be taken in with such chaff. Then, turning to those +beside him, he gave an order, which resulted in Hake being led to the +front with his arms tightly bound to his sides. + +"Ah!" thought Karlsefin, "if you had only brought the children to that +spot, I would have rescued them at all hazards." + +He did not, however, think it wise to make so desperate an attempt +merely to rescue Hake, while the children were still concealed and at +the mercy of the savages. He therefore put on his blandest looks and +manner, and again invited confidence, but Whitepow again shook his head, +pointed backwards as if in reference to the two children, and then at +Hake, after which he flung his club with such violence and precision at +Karlsefin's head that the stout Norseman would certainly have measured +his length on the sand, if he had not been very much on the alert. As +it was, he received the missile on his shield, from which it glanced +with a loud clang, and went hissing into the river. + +Karlsefin smiled, as if that sort of thing rather amused him than +otherwise, and again held up his hands, and even advanced a step or two +nearer, while the concourse of savages gave vent to a shout of surprise. +It is probable that Whitepow was a hero whose artillery had hitherto +been the messenger of certain death to foes. The failure of the club +seemed to exasperate the old savage beyond endurance, for he instantly +seized a bow, and let fly an arrow at the Norseman leader. It was well +aimed, but was also caught on the shield, and fell broken to the ground. + +Seeing this, some of the Norsemen hastily drew their bows, but +Karlsefin, anticipating something of the kind, turned about and bade +them forbear. + +Meanwhile Whitepow had ordered his warriors to remove Hake, and to fall +back a little. This they did, and appeared to be awaiting further +orders from their chief, who had gone up towards the tents. The +movement puzzled Karlsefin, who rejoined his men. + +"It is my advice," said Thorward, "that we hesitate no longer. Stand or +fall, we are in for a fight now, so the sooner we begin the better. No +doubt the odds are great, but they don't seem to be able for much--at +least if that old chap gave us a good specimen of their powers." + +Most of the Norsemen appeared to agree with this advice, but Karlsefin +did not. + +"You forget," said he, "that this would not be a mere trial of strength. +If we once begin, and chance to fail, every man of us must die, and our +colony, thus left so weak, would stand a small chance of surviving in +the midst of so many savages. Besides--the children would be lost _for +ever_! It is my opinion that we should wait a little to see what this +movement implies. Perhaps that white-haired old savage may have +recovered his temper and senses by this time, and is making up his mind +to have peace instead of war. God grant that it may be so." + +Instead of replying Thorward frowned darkly, and with something of a +savage sneer on his lip pointed to a bend in the river above them, round +which, at that moment, a hundred canoes swept, and came swiftly towards +them. + +"Looks _that_ like peace?" he said bitterly. + +Karlsefin's countenance fell. + +"All is lost!" he muttered, in a tone that was rather sad than fierce. +"Oh my tender little child!" + +Crushing down his feelings with a mighty effort, he turned to the men, +and quietly but quickly arranged them in a circle, with their faces +outwards, so that they presented a front in all directions. + +"Now, ye men of Norway and Iceland," he said, "the day has come at last +when ye must prove yourselves worthy descendants of a noble race. Our +cause this day is a right cause, and God is with the right, whether it +please Him to send death or victory. Quit you like men, and let us +teach these Skraelingers how to fight--if need be, how to die." + +Taking his stand on the landward side of his men, and ordering Thorward +to do the same in the direction of the water, he calmly awaited the +onset. + +And now, indeed, it seemed as if a fierce and bloody battle were about +to begin, for when the canoes of their comrades swept round the point of +land, as already described, the savages on shore, constantly reinforced +by new arrivals, began to move steadily down in an overwhelming mass +towards the spit of sand, and the heroes who stood there, though +comparatively so few in number, were, with their superiority of weapons +and courage, certain to make a fearfully prolonged and bloody +resistance. + +Affairs had reached this critical point, when a sudden and loud shout +was heard down the river. All eyes were turned in that direction, and +there several canoes were seen coming round the bend of the river, full +of armed men. The descent of the native fleet was checked. The +Norsemen at once recognised their comrades, and greeted their approach +with a lusty cheer. In another minute the newcomers had leaped upon the +sand. + +"Welcome, welcome, Biarne!" exclaimed Thorward, seizing and wringing his +friend's hand in great delight. "Why, man, we had all but taken leave +of each other, but we shall have another tale to tell now." + +"May God bless you, Biarne, for coming so opportunely," said Karlsefin. +"Let your men join and extend the circle. There, spread it out wider; +that will do. I won't trouble you with questions just now, Biarne, as +to what made you think of coming. We have more pressing work on hand." + +Thus saying, the leader busied himself in arranging his reinforcements, +while the savages held back, and awaited the result of a consultation +between Whitepow and the chief men of the tribe. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY THREE. + +DIFFICULTIES REGARDING INTERCOMMUNICATION--THE POWER OF FINERY +DISPLAYED--ALSO THE POWER OF SONG AND SENTIMENT. + +The additional force thus opportunely gained by the Norsemen, although +hailed with so much enthusiasm, did not very materially alter their +position. True, they now formed a company of above fifty stout and +well-armed men, who, in the hour of extremity, could make a formidable +resistance to any foe, however numerous; but what chance had they of +ultimately escaping from upwards of a thousand savages, every man of +whom was an adept at bush-warfare; could dart from tree to tree, and +harass and cut off in detail an enemy whom he would not dare, or did not +care, to face in the open field--which latter mode of warfare was more +natural and congenial to the Norsemen? + +This truth soon began to force itself upon Karlsefin's understanding; +but as he feared to damp the spirits of his less thoughtful comrades, he +kept his anxieties to himself, and made the best disposition of his +force that was possible in the circumstances. + +Very soon there was a movement among the savages on shore, and its +object was not long of being apparent, for presently a fleet of canoes +was seen ascending the river. At the same time the other fleet renewed +its advance from above, while the men on shore moved once more towards +the spit of sand. + +"They mean to attack on all sides at once," said Biarne. + +"Let them come," growled Thorward. "'Tis death or victory now, lads." + +No one spoke, but the eagle glances of the men, and their firm grasp of +sword and spear, told that they were ready; and once more it seemed as +if the bloody fight were about to begin, when again it was interrupted +by a shout. This time the shout came from the woods, from which, a few +minutes later, a solitary savage was seen to issue. He appeared to be +in haste, and ran through the crowd of warriors, who made way for him, +straight towards the white-haired chief, to whom he appeared to speak +with great fervour and many gesticulations, though he was too far off to +be heard, or his countenance to be distinctly seen, by the Norsemen. + +"That fellow brings news of some sort or other. I should say," remarked +Biarne. + +"Whatever his news may be," replied Karlsefin, "I don't think it will be +likely to do much for us." + +"The rascal's figure seems not unfamiliar to me," said Thorward. + +At that moment the crowd of chiefs around Whitepow shouted the word +"Ho!" apparently in approbation of something that he had just remarked, +and immediately after the man whom Thorward had styled a rascal began to +talk and gesticulate again more violently than ever. + +"What _is_ the man after now?" said Thorward. "It seems to me that he +is mad." + +The savage did indeed appear to be slightly deranged, for, in the midst +of his talk, he took an arrow and went through the pantomime of +discharging it; then he applied the point of it to his own back, and +fell down as if wounded; whereupon he rose quietly and kneeled with a +tender air, as if in the act of succouring a wounded man; and thereafter +went on to perform other pantomimic acts, which at last induced Thorward +to open his eyes very wide and whistle, as he exclaimed--"Why, 'tis +Utway, that fellow who was half killed in our first brush with the +Skraelingers." + +"Ay, and who was so tenderly nursed by Bertha," added Biarne. + +"There can be no doubt of it," said Karlsefin, in a cheerful voice; "and +now have I some hope of a peaceful end to this affair, for what else can +he be doing but pleading our cause?" + +"I'm not so sure of that," replied Thorward. "He may just as likely be +telling them what lots of good things might be got by killing us all and +taking possession of Leifsgaard." + +"The question will soon be settled, Thorward, for here comes the +savage," said Biarne. + +This was true. Having finished his talk, whatever it was, and heard a +brief reply from Whitepow, Utway turned round and ran fearlessly towards +the Norsemen. + +"I will go meet him," said Karlsefin. + +"There may be danger in that," suggested Biarne. + +"Greater danger in showing distrust," replied Karlsefin. "Confidence +should beget confidence." + +Without more words he flung down sword and shield, and advanced unarmed +to meet the savage, whom he shook warmly by the hand--a style of +salutation which Utway thoroughly understood, having learned it while +lying wounded in Leifsgaard. + +They could not of course make use of speech, but Utway was such a +powerful gesticulator that it was not difficult to make out his meaning. +After shaking hands he put his hand on his heart, then laid it on +Karlsefin's breast, and pointed towards the old chief with an air that +would have done credit to a courtier. + +Karlsefin at once took the hand of the savage, and walked with him +through the midst of the native chiefs, above whose heads he towered +conspicuously, until he stood before Whitepow. Taking off his iron +helmet he bowed to the old chief, an act which appeared to afford that +worthy much satisfaction, for, although he did not venture to return the +bow, he exclaimed "Ho!" with solemn emphasis. + +This was all very pleasant, but it was not much. Karlsefin, therefore, +tried his hand at a little gesticulation, while the natives gazed at him +with speechless interest. Whitepow and Utway then replied with a +variety of energetic demonstrations, some of which the Norseman +understood, while of others he could make nothing at all, but the result +of it all was, that Utway made a final proposal, which was very clear, +to the effect that the Norsemen should approach the savages, mingle with +them, and be friends. + +To this Karlsefin returned a decided negative, by shaking his head and +frowning portentously. At the same time he stooped and held his hand +about two feet from the ground, as if to indicate something that stood +pretty nearly that height. Then he tenderly patted the top of the +imaginary thing, whatever it was, and took it up in his arms, kissed it, +and laid it on his breast. After that he indicated another thing +somewhat higher, which he also patted on the top. Thereafter he pressed +his arms close to his side and struggled as if to get loose from +something, but could not until he had taken hold of an imaginary knife, +cut the something which bound him, and set his arms free. + +All this was apparently understood and immensely relished by the +natives, who nodded to each other and vociferated "Ho!" to such an +extent that the repetition caused it to sound somewhat like a fiendish +laugh. But here Whitepow put in his veto, shook his head and appeared +inexorable, whereupon Karlsefin crossed his arms on his breast and +looked frowningly on the ground. + +Things had just reached this uncomfortable pass, when Karlsefin's eye +chanced to fall on the end of a piece of bright scarlet cloth with which +Gudrid had smilingly ornamented his neck before he set out on this +expedition,--just as a young wife might, in chivalrous ages, have tied a +scarf to her knight's arm before sending him off to the wars. + +A sudden idea flashed upon him. He unfastened the strip of cloth, and, +advancing, presented it to Whitepow, with a bland smile. + +The aged chief was not proof against this. He gazed at the brilliant +cloth with intense admiration, and expressed as much delight at +receiving it as if he had been a child--which, by the way, he was, in +regard to such fabrics and in his inability to restrain his feelings. + +Rejoiced to observe the good effect thus produced, Karlsefin did his +best to assure the chief that there was plenty more of the same in his +possession, besides other things--all of which Utway corroborated,--and +signified that he, Whitepow, should have large quantities thereof if he +would restore the captives to their friends. In order to add force to +what he said, he drew from his pouch or wallet several small metal +ornaments strung together like beads, and presented these also to +Whitepow, as well as to several of the chiefs who stood nearest to him. +At the same time he uncovered, as if inadvertently, a magnificent silver +brooch which hung round his neck, under his leathern war-shirt. + +This brooch was by no means a trifling bauble. It was massive, +beautifully carved, and hung round with little silver cups and +diamond-shaped pieces of silver about the size of a man's thumb-nail. +It was much prized by its owner on account of being an heirloom of his +family, having been carried to Iceland by his forefathers when they were +expatriated from Norway by King Harald Fairhair. + +Whitepow's eye at once fell on the brooch, and he expressed a strong +desire to possess it. + +Karlsefin started as if in alarm, seized the brooch with both hands, +held it aloft, and gazed at it in a species of veneration, then, +clasping it to his breast, shook his head by way of an emphatic "No!" + +Of course Whitepow became doubly anxious to have it; whereupon Karlsefin +again stooped, and, placing his hand about two feet from the ground, +patted the top of the thing indicated, and said that he might have the +brooch for _that_ and the other things previously referred to. + +Whitepow pondered a few minutes, and Utway said something very seriously +to him, which resulted in his giving an order to two of his chiefs, who +at once left the group. They quickly returned, leading Hake and the +children between them--the former being still bound at the elbows. + +There was something quite startling in the shout of surprise that Olaf +gave on observing Karlsefin. It was only equalled by the shriek of glee +that burst from Snorro when he recognised his father. + +Olaf instantly seized Snorro and ran towards him. Karlsefin met them +more than half-way, and, with an expression of deep thankfulness, caught +up his little one and strained him to his heart, while Olaf tightly +embraced his leg! + +But, recollecting himself instantly, he set Snorro down, removed the +silver brooch from his neck and placed it in the hand of the old chief. +At the same time he pointed to Hake's bonds. Whitepow understood him, +and, drawing his stone knife, cut these asunder. + +"Make no haste, Hake," said his leader, "but take Snorro in your arms +and Olaf by the hand, and walk _slowly_ but steadily towards your +comrades. If any one offers to intercept you, resist not, but turn and +come back hither." + +Hake made no reply, but did as he was bid, and was soon in the midst of +his comrades. Meanwhile Karlsefin, whose joy almost prevented him from +maintaining the dignity that was appropriate to the occasion, took off +every scrap in the shape of ornament that he possessed and presented all +to Whitepow, even to the last bauble in the bottom of his wallet, and he +tried to make the old man understand that all his men had things of a +similar kind to bestow, which would be brought to him if he would order +the great mass of his people to retire to a considerable distance, +retaining only about his person a party equal in numbers to the +Norsemen. + +To this the chief seemed inclined to object at first, but again Utway's +eloquence and urgency prevailed. The old man stood up, shouted an order +in the voice of a Stentor, and waved his hand. The whole multitude at +once fell back to a considerable distance, leaving only a few of the +principal men around their chief. + +The active Scot instantly bounded towards him--not less with desire to +serve his deliverer than with delight at finding himself once more free! + +"Go back, Hake, and tell the men to come quietly hither in a compact +body, leaving their bows and spears behind them, only carrying each man +his sword and shield. Let a strong guard stay with the weapons and the +children, and see that Biarne and Thorward also remain with them. +Quietly place the children in a canoe, and do you and Heika stand ready +to man it." + +"That has already been done," said Hake. + +"By whose orders?" demanded Karlsefin. + +"At my suggestion," replied Hake. + +"Thou art a wise man, Hake. I thank thee. Go; I need not explain that +two canoes at least would require to accompany you, so as to repel +attack by water, and, if it be necessary, to flee, while we guard the +retreat." + +"That has already been arranged," said Hake. + +"Good, good. Then, whatever betide us, the dear children are like to be +safe. Get you gone, Hake; and, harkee, if _we_ should not return, be +sure thou bear my love to Gudrid.--Away." + +Hake bowed in silence and retired. In a few minutes the greater part of +the Norsemen stood before the old chief, and, by Karlsefin's command, +every man who chanced to have any trifling ornament of any kind about +him took it off and presented it to the savages. + +Whitepow, in return, ordered a package of furs to be brought, and +presented each man with a beautiful sable. Karlsefin then made Utway +explain that he had seen much valuable cloth and many ornaments in the +Norsemen's camp, and that these would be given in exchange for such +furs,--a piece of news which seemed to gratify the savages, for they +possessed an immense number of furs, which were comparatively of little +value to them. + +Thus amicable relations were established; but when Whitepow invited the +Norsemen to accompany him to his village and feast, Karlsefin intimated +that he intended to sup and pass the night on the spit of sand, and that +in the early morning he would return to his home, whither he hoped the +savages would soon follow him with their furs. That, meanwhile, a small +number might accompany him, if they chose, to view his habitation and +take back a report. This was agreed to, and thus happily the +conferences ended. + +That night the Norsemen held high carousal on the spit of sand, partly +because they were rejoiced at the successful issue of the expedition as +far as it had gone, and partly because they wished to display a +free-and-easy spirit to the savages. They drew a line at the narrowest +part of the neck of land, and there posted armed sentinels, who +resolutely refused to let any one pass. On the outward edge of the +spit, other sentinels were placed, who checked all tendency to approach +by water, and who--in one or two instances, when some obstinate natives +attempted to force a landing--overturned the canoes and left the +occupants to swim ashore the best way they could. + +The only exception to this rule was made in favour of Utway and +Whitepow, with the grandson of the latter, little Powlet. These three +came down to the spit after the Norsemen had kindled a magnificent +bonfire of dry logs, round which they sat and ate their supper, told +sagas, sang songs, cracked jokes, and drank to absent friends in cans of +pure water, with an amount of dash, fervour, and uproarious laughter +that evidently raised quite a new idea in the savage minds, and filled +them with amazement unutterable, but not inexpressible, for their +glaring eyes, and lengthened jaws, and open mouths were the material +embodiment of surprise. In fact, the entire population sat on the +surrounding banks and heights nearly the whole night, with their hands +and chins resting on their knees, listening and gazing in silent +admiration at the proceedings of the Norsemen, as a vast audience might +witness the entertainments of an amphitheatre. + +The utmost hospitality was of course extended by the Norsemen to their +three visitors, who partook of the food set before them with much +relish. Fortunately some of the men who had been left to guard the arms +still possessed a few trinkets and pieces of bright cloth, so that +Karlsefin was again enabled to gratify his new friends with a few more +presents. + +"Snorro," said Karlsefin, who sat beside Whitepow in front of the fire +with the child on his knee, "are you glad to see your father again?" + +"Iss," said Snorro, responding _slightly_ to the tender embrace which he +received. + +We are afraid that truth requires us to state, that Snorro had not quite +reached the age of reciprocal attachment--at least in regard to men. Of +course we do not pretend to know anything about the mysterious feelings +which he was reported to entertain towards his mother and nurse! All we +can say is, that up to this point in his history the affections of that +first-born of Vinland appeared to centre chiefly in his stomach--who fed +him best he loved most! It is but simple justice to add, however, that +Olaf was, in Snorro's eye, an exception to the rule. We really believe +that if Olaf had starved and beaten him during the first half of a day, +by way of experiment, Snorro would have clung to him and loved him +throughout the other half! + +"Come hither, Olaf, take this bit of cloth in your hand, and present it +to that little boy," said Karlsefin, pointing to Powlet. "He seems fond +of Snorro, and deserves something." + +"Fond of him!" exclaimed Olaf, laughing, as he presented the cloth +according to orders, and then returned to Snorro's side. "You should +have seen the way he made Snorro laugh one day by painting my face." + +Here Olaf went into a minute account of the operation referred to, and +told it with so much humour that the Norsemen threw back their wild +heads and shook their shaggy beards in fits of uproarious laughter, +which awakened the echoes of the opposite cliffs, and caused the natives +to think, no doubt, that the very rocks were merry. + +After this Krake told a story and sang a rollicking song, and of course +Hake was made to sing, which he readily did, giving them one of his +native airs with such deep pathos, that the very savages--unused though +they were to music--could not refrain from venting a murmur of +admiration, which rose on the night air like a mysterious throb from the +hearts of the dark concourse. + +Immediately after Hake's song the old chief and his friends took their +leave. The sentinels were now changed and doubled, the fire was +extinguished, each Norseman lay down with his hand on his sword-hilt, +and his shield above him, and the vast multitude of savages melted away +to their respective places of repose. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY FOUR. + +THE BURNING ON THE FORTRESS--A THREATENED FIGHT ENDS IN A FEAST, WHICH +LEADS TO FRIENDSHIP--HAPPY REUNION AND PROPOSED DESERTION. + +Next morning, according to arrangement, the Norsemen were up and away by +daybreak; but they did not start off alone. A much larger fleet than +they had bargained for accompanied them. Karlsefin, however, made no +objection, partly because objection would have been unavailing, and +partly because the natives were so genuinely well-disposed towards him, +that he felt assured there was no reason to distrust them or to fear +their numbers. + +Little did Karlsefin think, as they proceeded happily and leisurely down +the stream at that time, the urgent need there was for haste, or the +dire extremity to which his friends at Leifsgaard had been reduced. +Knowing, of course, nothing about this, they descended by easy stages +and encamped in good time at night, in order to have their fires lighted +and food cooked before daylight had quite disappeared, so that they +might have the more time to sit chatting by the light of the camp-fires +and enjoying the fine summer weather. + +On the other hand, had Leif only known how soon his friends were to +return, he might have held the fortress longer than he did, by +continuing his desperate sallies to check the raising of the pile that +was meant to burn him out; but not being aware of this, and finding that +the necessity for constant vigilance and frequent sallies was wearing +out his men, he resolved to abandon the castle to its fate and take to +the ship. + +Watching his opportunity, he had everything portable collected, and, +during the darkest hour of a dark night, quietly issued from the little +fortress, descended to the beach, and got on board the _Snake_, with all +the women and men, without the savages being aware of the movement. + +Once on board, he fortified the vessel as well as he could, and hung the +shields round the bulwarks. + +Curiously enough, the savages had fixed on that very night for setting +fire to their pile of timber, which by that time towered to a height +that made it almost equal to the fortress it was about to consume. At +grey dawn the torch was applied to it. At the very same hour Karlsefin +and his men, accompanied by their savage friends, launched their canoes +and left the encampment of the previous night. + +The leader of the fleet had purposely encamped when not very far from +the settlement, preferring, with such a large and unexpected party, +rather to arrive in the morning than at night. + +Great then was the surprise of the Norsemen when, soon after starting, +they saw a dense cloud of smoke rising in the far distance, and deep was +their anxiety when they observed that this cloud not only spread abroad +and increased in density, but appeared to float exactly over the place +where the settlement lay. + +"Give way, lads! push on! There is something wrong at the gaard," +shouted Karlsefin when he became thoroughly alive to the fact. + +There was little necessity for urging the men. Each man became an +impulsive volcano and drove his paddle into the water with such force +and fury that the canoes almost leaped out of the river as well as over +it. + +Meanwhile the sun rose in splendour, and with it rose the mighty flames +of the bonfire, which soon caught the neighbouring trees and licked them +up as if they had been stubble. Such intense heat could not be long +withstood. The wooden fortress was soon in flames, and then arose a +yell of triumph from the savages, which sent dismay to the hearts of +those who were approaching, and overawed the little band that still lay +undiscovered on board the _Snake_. + +But when it was ascertained that there was no one in the fortress, a cry +of fury followed the shout of triumph, and the whole band, at once +suspecting that their enemies had taken to their vessel, rushed down to +the shores of the lake. + +There they found the Norsemen ready to receive them; but they found more +than they had expected, for, just then, Karlsefin and his men swept +round the point above the bay with a tremendous cheer, and were followed +by a continuous stream of the canoes of their savage friends whom they +had outstripped in the mad race. + +Karlsefin did not wait to ascertain how affairs stood. Enough for him +that the village seemed to be in flames. Observing, as he passed, that +his comrades and the women were safe on board the _Snake_, he ran the +canoes high and dry on the beach and leaped ashore. Drawing quickly up +into a compact line, the Norsemen rushed with wild shout upon the foe. +The natives did not await the onset. Surprise alone had kept them +waiting there as long as they did. With one consent, and a hideous +yell, they turned and fled like autumn leaves before the wind. + +Returning to the friendly savages, who had looked on at all this in some +surprise and with no little concern, Karlsefin looked very sternly at +them, pointed to the woods into which his enemies had vanished, shook +his fist, and otherwise attempted by signs to indicate his displeasure, +and to advise the instant interference of the friendly savages in the +way of bringing about peaceful relations. + +The natives were intelligent enough and prompt in action. A party of +them at once started off to the woods, while Karlsefin went on board the +_Snake_, where he found Leif and his friends right glad to meet him, and +the women, in a state of the wildest delight, almost devouring Olaf and +Snorro, who had been sent direct to the vessel when the men landed to +attack the savages. + +"'Tis good for the eyes to see thy sweet face, Gudrid," he said, giving +his wife a hearty kiss, "and I am quite sure that Snorro agrees with me +in that." + +"He does, he does," cried Gudrid, hugging the child, who clung round her +neck with a tenacity that he had never before exhibited, having learned, +no doubt, that "absence makes the heart grow fonder." + +"Oh! I am so happy, and so thankful. My sweet bairn! Where did you +find him? How did you rescue him? I felt _sure_ you would do it. How +did he look when he saw you? and--" + +"Hold, Gudrid," cried Karlsefin, laughing, "joy has upset thy judgment. +I can answer but one question at a time." + +Gudrid made no reply; indeed she did not seem to expect an answer to her +queries, for she had turned again to Snorro and Olaf, whom she +overwhelmed with embraces, endearing epithets, and questions, in all +which she was ably assisted by Bertha, Astrid, and Thora. Even +Freydissa became soft for once; kissed Olaf and Snorro several times in +a passionate manner, and was unusually gracious to Thorward. + +"Ye came in the nick of time," said Leif, as he and his friends retired +to the poop for a brief consultation. + +"So it would seem," said Biarne, "but it was more by good fortune than +good planning, for I left you weak-handed; and if good luck had not +brought us here just at the time we did, methinks there would have been +heavy hearts among us." + +"A higher Power than good luck brought us hither in time," said +Karlsefin. + +"That is true," said Leif, with a nod and an earnest look at his friend. + +"I doubt it not," returned Biarne, "and the same Power doubtless led me +to start off with a reinforcement in time to help you in the hour of +need, Karlsefin. But it is my advice now that we go ashore and put the +huts in a state of defence as quickly as may be." + +"That is just my opinion," replied Karlsefin, "for it may be that the +friendly natives will find it easier to be converted into foes than to +turn our enemies into friends. What is your advice, Leif?" + +"That we land and do as Biarne suggests without delay." + +"And what if these villains come down in such overwhelming numbers--as +they now can easily do--that they shall carry all before them and drive +us into the lake?" asked Thorward. + +"Why, man," cried Biarne, with a touch of ire, "if I did not know thee +well I would say that thou wert timid." + +"Knowing me well; then, as ye say," returned Thorward, "and reserving +the matter of timidity for future discussion, what reply have ye to make +to my question?" + +"That we must make up our minds to be drowned, like Freydissa's cat," +replied Biarne. + +"Nay, not quite that," said Leif, with a smile; "we can at least have +the comfort of leaving our bones on the land to mingle with those of as +many savages as we can slay." + +"The thought of that would prove a great comfort to the women, no doubt, +when they were carried off by the savages," returned Thorward, with a +touch of sarcasm in his tone. + +"I see what you mean," said Karlsefin; "that we should have the _Snake_ +ready to fall back on if we chance to be beaten; but, to say truth, the +idea of being beaten by such miserable savages never entered my head." + +"The consideration of your head's thickness, then," said Thorward, +"would be an additional element of comfort, no doubt, to the women in +case of things going against us." + +At this Karlsefin laughed, and asked Thorward what he would advise. + +"My advice is," said he, "that we not only get the _Snake_ ready for a +long voyage, but that we haul round my ship also,--which by good fortune +is here just now--and get her ready. There is no need to put our goods +and chattels on board, for if things went ill with us we could no doubt +keep the savages at bay long enough to accomplish that by means of +placing Biarne at the post of danger with orders to die rather than give +in; but I would leave the women and children on board at any rate to +keep them out of harm's way--" + +"And it is _my_ advice," cried Freydissa, coming up at the moment, "that +ye set about it at once without more talk, else the women and children +will have to set you the example." + +There was a general laugh at the tone and manner in which this was said, +and the four chiefs left the poop to carry out their plans. Meanwhile +an immense concourse of natives assembled on the neighbouring heights, +and for a long time carried on a discussion, which, to judge from the +violence of their gesticulations, must have been pretty hot. At last +their meeting came to an abrupt close, and a large band was seen to +separate from the rest and move down towards the hamlet. + +Before they reached it the Norsemen had manned the defences and awaited +them. + +"They come on a peaceful errand, I think," said Karlsefin, who stood at +the principal opening. "At least it seems to me that they carry no +arms. What say you, Hake? Your eyes are sharp." + +"They are unarmed," replied Hake. + +This was found to be the case; and when they had approached to within a +long bow-shot of the defences, all doubt as to their intention was +removed by their holding up their hands and making other peaceful +demonstrations. + +Judging it wise to meet such advances promptly and without suspicion, +Karlsefin at once selected a number of his stoutest men, and causing +them to lay aside their arms, issued forth to meet the savages. There +was, as on a former occasion, a great deal of gesticulation and talking +with the eyes, the upshot of which was, that the brown men and the white +men vowed eternal friendship, and agreed to inaugurate the happy +commencement thereof with a feast--a sort of picnic on a grand scale--in +which food was to be supplied by both parties, arms were to be left at +home on both sides, and the scene of operations was to be a plot of open +ground near to, but outside, the hamlet. + +It is easy to record all this briefly, but it must not therefore be +supposed that it was easy of arrangement, on the part of the high +contracting parties, whose tongues were unavoidably useless in the +consultation. + +Krake proved himself to be the most eloquent speaker in sign-language, +and the manner in which he made his meaning intelligible to the savages +was worthy of philosophic study. It is, however, quite beyond the +powers of description; a great deal of it consisting not only of signs +which might indeed be described, but of sounds--guttural and otherwise-- +which could not be spelt. We are constrained, therefore, to leave it to +the reader's imagination. + +At the feast an immense quantity of venison and salmon was consumed, as +you may easily believe, and a great number of speeches were made by both +parties--the men of each side approving and applauding their own +speakers, and listening to those of the other side with as much +solemnity of attention as if they understood every word. + +There were two points of great interest connected with this feast, which +we must not omit to mention. One was, the unexpected arrival, in the +middle of it, of the old chief, Whitepow, in a canoe, with Utway and a +few of his principal men, and his grandson Powlet. These were hailed by +both parties with great delight, because they formed an additional bond +of union between them. + +It had been arranged by Karlsefin, for the sake of security, that the +savages and Norsemen should not intermingle, but that they should sit in +two distinct groups opposite to each other. Whitepow, however, ignorant +of, or indifferent to such arrangements, passed over at once to the +Norsemen on his arrival, and went through the ceremony, which he had so +recently acquired, of shaking hands all round. Powlet also followed his +example, and so did Utway. They then sat down, and the latter did good +service in the cause of peace by making an enthusiastic speech, which +the Norsemen could see, from his pantomimic motions, related to his own +good treatment at their hands in time past. + +Powlet also unwittingly aided in the same good cause, by running up to +Olaf and bestowing on him a variety of attentions, which were all +expressive of good-will and joy at meeting with him again. He also +shouted the name of Snorro several times with great energy, but Olaf +could only reply by shaking his head and pointing towards the hamlet +where Snorro and the women had been left under a strong and trusty +guard. + +The other point of interest to which we have alluded was, that a number +of the savages became particularly earnest and eager, when the eating +was concluded, in their endeavours to impress something on their new +friends, which they could not for a long time be made to understand even +by the most graphic and energetic signs. + +"I fear, Krake, that you have eaten too much, or by some other means +have spoilt your powers of interpretation," said Leif with a laugh, as +the puzzled interpreter shook his head for the fifth time at an +energetic young savage with a red spot on his chin, and a blue stripe on +his nose, who had been gesticulating--we might almost say agonising-- +before him for some time. + +"'Tis beyond my powers entirely," said Krake. "Try it again, Bluenose," +he added, turning once more to the savage with resolute intensity of +concentration; "drive about your limbs and looks a little harder. I'll +make ye out if it's in the power of man." + +Thus adjured, the young savage opened his mouth wide, pointed with his +finger down his throat, then up at the sky, spread both hands abroad in +a vague manner, and exclaimed "ho!" as though to say, "that's plain +enough, surely!" + +"Oh, for shame! Is it eaten too much ye have? Is that what ye want to +say?" + +That was evidently not what he wanted to say, for the poor savage looked +round with quite a disconsolate aspect. + +"Come hither, Powlet," cried Biarne; "you're a smart boy; see if you can +make the matter somewhat plainer." + +Powlet at all events understood his name, and Biarne's beckoning finger, +for he rose and went to him. Biarne confronted him with the young +savage, and told the two to talk with each other by means of signs, +which consisted in his touching the lips of both and thrusting their +heads together. + +The young savage smiled intelligently and spoke to Powlet, who thereupon +turned to Biarne, and, rolling his eyes for a few seconds, uttered a low +wail. + +"Sure it isn't pains you're troubled with?" asked Krake, in a voice of +pity. + +"I do believe it must be that they refer to some one whom we have +wounded during the fight," suggested Leif, "and that they think we have +him concealed in the hamlet." + +"It seems to me," said Thorward, "that if they were troubled about a +wounded or missing comrade, they would have asked for him sooner." + +"That is true," replied Leif. "I wish we knew what it is they would +communicate, for they appear to be very anxious about it." + +As he spoke, a tall savage, with an unusually grave countenance, stalked +from among his fellows, thrust Powlet and the young man whom Krake had +styled Bluenose aside, and seated himself on the ground in imitation of +the free-and-easy manner of the Norsemen. Suddenly his face lighted up. +He clapped both hands to his chest and breathed hard, then raised his +hands aloft, looked enthusiastically up at the sky, rolled his eyes in a +fearful manner, opened his mouth wide, and gave utterance to a series of +indescribable howls. Checking himself in the midst of one of these, he +suddenly resumed his grave aspect, looked straight at Krake, and said +"Ho!" + +That he thought he had hit the mark, and conveyed the meaning of himself +and his friends precisely, was made evident by the other savages, who +nodded their heads emphatically, and exclaimed "Ho!" with earnestness. + +"H'm! 'tis easy to say `Ho!'" replied Krake, more perplexed than ever, +"and if `Ho' would be a satisfactory answer, I'd give ye as much as ye +liked of that; but I can't make head or tail of what it is ye would be +at." + +"Stay," exclaimed Hake, stepping quickly forward, "I think I know what +they want." + +Saying this, he looked earnestly at the grave savage, and ran over one +or two notes of a song. + +No words in any language could convey such a powerful meaning as did the +beam of intelligence and delight which overspread the faces of these +sons of the wilderness. The "ho! ho! hos!" and noddings were repeated +with such energy, that Krake advised them to "stop that, lest their +heads should come off altogether!" + +"I thought so," said Hake, turning away from them; "they want you to +give them a song, Krake." + +"They shall have that, and welcome," cried the jovial Norseman, striking +up the "Danish Kings" at once, with all the fire of his nature. + +The natives sat in rapt solemnity, and when the Norsemen joined +laughingly in the chorus, they allowed a faint smile to play for a +moment on their faces, and murmured their satisfaction to each other +when the song was done. But it was evident that they wanted something +more, for they did not seem quite satisfied until one of their number +rose, and going up to Hake touched his lips with his finger. + +"Ha! I thought so!" exclaimed Krake in contempt. "It's bad taste ye +have to want a song from _him_ after hearing _me_! But what else could +we expect from ye?" + +Hake willingly complied with their wish, and it then became evident that +the savages had gained their point at last, for they listened with +half-closed eyes, and more than half-opened mouths, while he was +singing, and heaved a deep sigh when he had finished. + +Thus pleasantly was the feast concluded, and thus they sealed their +friendship. + +But there was something still more satisfactory in store for the +Norsemen, for it was soon afterwards discovered that the savages +possessed a large quantity of beautiful furs, with which, of course, +they were willing to part for the merest trifle, in the shape of a shred +of brilliant cloth or an ornamental bauble. + +This was not only fortunate, as affording an opportunity for the +Norsemen to procure full and valuable cargoes for both their ships, but +as creating a busy and interesting occupation, which would prevent the +natives from growing weary of inaction, and, perhaps, falling into those +forms of mischief which proverbially lie ready to idle hands. + +"It seems to me, friends," said Leif one evening, shortly after the +feast just described, while he was seated in the chief hall, polishing +his iron headpiece, and occasionally watching the active hands of Gudrid +and Thora as they busied themselves about domestic affairs, while Bertha +sat beside him dandling Snorro on her knee,--"It seems to me that we +have got together such a rich cargo that the sooner we send our ships to +Greenland the better. They can then return with fresh supplies of such +things as are needed in good time. For myself, I will go with the +ships, and overlook the loading of them in Greenland." + +"Oh! may I go with you?" exclaimed Bertha, looking up suddenly with much +eagerness. + +Hake, who was seated at the lower end of the hall, busily engaged in +making a bow, paused abruptly in his work, but did not raise his head. + +"I have no objection, if Freydissa has none," answered Leif. + +"Freydissa will be only too glad to get rid of her," replied that +amiable woman, who was engaged in the manufacture of a leathern tunic +for Snorro; "she is tired of milk-and-water." + +"And yet milk-and-water is more likely to agree with you than anything +resembling beer," said Biarne, with a laugh. + +"I should be sorry to leave Vinland," returned Bertha, "but I am very +_very_ anxious to see my dear father again. Besides--I can return +hither." + +Hake's hand was suddenly released, and resumed its occupation. + +"If you go, Leif," asked Karlsefin, "will you return and spend the +winter with us?" + +"I will not promise that," replied Leif with a smile. + +There was silence for some minutes, which was broken at length by a very +small voice saying:-- + +"'Norro go to G'eenland too?" + +Poor Snorro was as regardless of the _S_ in his own name as he was of +the _l_ in Olaf's! + +"'Norro may go, if Gudrid will allow him," answered Leif, patting the +child's curly pate. + +"And O'af too?" added Snorro. + +"Of course _I_ must go if Snorrie goes," cried Olaf who had just entered +the hall. "We could not live separate--could we, Snorrie?" He caught +up the child and placed him on his back in his wonted fashion. "Just +think," he continued, "what would it do in Greenland without O'af to +give it rides and take it out for long walks?" + +"Ay, and go lost with it in the woods," added Biarne. + +Olaf blushed, but replied promptly--"That would be impossible, Biarne, +for there are no woods in Greenland." + +"If Snorro goes so must I," said Thora. "He could not get on without +his nurse." + +"Methinks we had better all go together to Greenland," said Astrid, who +was busy preparing supper. + +"Not bad advice," observed Biarne, somewhat seriously. + +"Do you mean what you say?" asked Karlsefin. + +"I half mean it," replied Biarne. + +There was a pause here. Karlsefin then said--"It seems to me, friends, +that our minds are all jumping together. I have thought for a long time +of leaving Vinland, for it is plain to me that as we stand just now we +cannot make much headway. Many of our men are longing to get back to +their families, some to their sweethearts, and some to their native +land; while, from what you have said, it would seem that none of us are +very anxious to remain." + +"Do not speak for _all_," said Thorward. + +"Well, dost _thou_ wish to stay?" + +"It may be that I do. At any rate, we have had much trouble in coming +hither and settling ourselves, and it would be a pity to lose all our +labours unless we can't help it. There may be others of my way of +thinking in the colony. It is my advice that before we discuss such a +matter we had better call a Thing, [an assembly for discussion] and do +it in an orderly way." + +"By all means," said Karlsefin, "let us discuss the matter for +_decision_ in a Thing; yet our discussing here for amusement is not +disorderly." + +After a little more conversation it was finally arranged that a Thing, +or general assembly of the people, should be called on the following +day, to discuss and decide on the propriety of forsaking Vinland and +returning home. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY FIVE. + +THE FIRST CONGRESS AND THE LAST FAREWELL. + +At the gathering of the Vinland colonists next day a number of able +speeches were made by various individuals; for the Norsemen of old were +accustomed to the free discussion of public affairs, at a time when +nearly all Europe was crushed under the yoke of feudalism. Some of the +speeches were humorous, and some had a good deal of sound about them +without much weight of matter--a peculiarity, by the way, which marks +many of the speeches made in the national and general assemblies of +mankind in the present day, not less, perhaps rather more, than in the +olden time. + +All the men of the colony were entitled to raise their voices in the +council except the thralls, so that the brothers Hake and Heika took no +part in the discussion. These two therefore held a private +confabulation of their own on the margin of the lake. + +Thorward was among the first speakers at the assembly. + +"It is my opinion," he said, in the tone of a man who expects to have +his opinion opposed, "that we have not yet given Vinland a fair trial. +We are only just beginning to discover the value of the land. Ye know +now that it is not a small island, as was at first supposed, but a vast +country of unknown extent. Who knows but that it may be as large as +Norway? This lake and river on which we dwell do not owe their birth to +an insignificant country; any man with half the vision of one eye +remaining may see that! The woods supply all that man can desire; the +waters swarm with fish; the climate is delightful; our ships are even +now loaded to the bulwarks with costly furs, and the natives are +friendly. What would ye more? It seems to me that we might, if we +chose, lay the foundation of a new nation that would rival Iceland, +perchance equal old Norway itself, if we take advantage of the great +opportunities that have fallen to our hands. But if we get frightened +at the yell of every savage that makes his appearance, or grow weary of +good, vigorous, hard work, and begin to sigh like children for home, +then there is small chance of our doing anything, and it will doubtless +be the fate of a bolder race of men to people this land at some future +time." + +There was a good deal of applause from some of the people when Thorward +finished this speech, which was uttered with great decision, but it was +observable that those who thought with him, though noisy, were not +numerous. + +The moment Thorward sat down Krake started up and said somewhat +warmly--"'Tis all very well for Thorward to speak in this way, and ask +`What would ye more?' seeing that he has got in his house a handsome and +sweet-tempered wife; but I will tell him of _something more_ that I +want, and that I haven't got just now, and am not likely to get as long +as I remain in Vinland. There is a comely little woman in Iceland, who +was born in that best of countries, Ireland, and who forsook the land, +and her father and mother, and kith and kin, all for the sake of a +red-headed thrall--for he was no better at that time--called Krake. +Now, _I_ want that sweet little Irishwoman! Moreover, there's a stout +curly-headed boy in Iceland who's an elegant chip of the ancient tree, +and the born image of his mother--I want that curly-headed boy! Then +there are six other curly-headed boys in Iceland--only that three of +them are girls, and the youngest had the curls in prospect when I saw it +last, bein' as bare on the head as the palm of my hand--all of them +descending in size, one after another, from the first curly-headed boy-- +I want these. Besides which there is a sweet little hut in Iceland at +the edge of a swamp, with the spouting waters not far off, and the +boilin' waters quite handy to cook your dinner without firin', and a +lovely prospect of the burnin' hill behind--I want all that; and I want +to know how Thorward would feel if he wanted all that and couldn't get +it, and was advised to go on wantin' it, and if he couldn't keep himself +easy, to try his best to keep as easy as he could!" + +There was some laughter and great applause at this point. + +"Moreover," continued Krake, with increasing energy, "it don't give me a +scrap of comfort to be told that this is a vast country, full of all +that's desirable and the best of livin', when I can't enjoy it along +with my sweet little Kathleen and the curly-headed boys and girls before +mentioned. What does Krake care for stuffing his own ugly carcase full +when mayhap the wife and bairns are dyin' for want--anyhow dyin' to see +their husband an' father? And what does Krake care to be the beginning +of a new nation? No more than he does to be the middle of it, and if +left to himself he'd far sooner be the end of it by not beginning it at +all! As for being frightened by the yells of savages, it's not worth my +while to mention _that_, but when Thorward talks about beginning to sigh +like children for home, he misses his mark entirely. It's not _sighing_ +I am for home, but roaring, bellowing, howling for it in my wearied +spirit, and it's my opinion, comrades, as I gaze round upon your +speaking faces, that there's a good many here howling along with me." + +There could be no doubt that Krake's sentiments were largely entertained +and appreciated, for his speech was followed by prolonged and +enthusiastic applause, in which the Norsemen not only raised their +voices, but rattled their arms on their shields by way of emphasis. +Thorward smiled grimly and shrugged his shoulders, but made no reply. + +After several others had spoken in various strains--a few in favour of +Thorward's opinion, but many more in sympathy with Krake,--Leif made a +short speech, advising immediate return to Greenland, Biarne followed +suit, and Karlsefin wound up with a few remarks, in which he urged, +among other things, that although the savages were friendly just then, +it was not likely they would remain so very long, and in the event of a +quarrel it was certain, considering their great numbers, that the infant +colony would be kept in perpetual hot water, if not actual warfare. He +suggested, moreover, that the proper way to establish a colony, that +would have some chance to survive and flourish, would be to organise it +thoroughly in Iceland or Norway, and induce so many married men with +their families to emigrate, that they would be able to _feel_ at home in +the new land, and thus _wish_ to remain. He concluded by saying that +those who now desired to remain in Vinland might join together and +devote their energies to the getting up of such a band of colonists if +so disposed. For his own part, since the majority were evidently in +favour of returning home, he was free to confess that he had no taste +for colonising. The ocean was _his_ home, and when that failed him he +hoped that God might permit him to end his days and lay his bones in +Iceland. + +It was finally agreed that the country should be abandoned, and that, +having made up their minds, they should set about preparations without +delay. + +We have said that the Scottish brothers had gone to the margin of the +lake to hold a little consultation by themselves, while the affairs of +the nation were being settled in the grand parliament. + +"What think you? Will these men of Iceland decide to return home or to +remain here?" said Hake, seating himself on a bank of wild-flowers, +which he began to pluck and scatter with an absent air. + +"They will decide to forsake Vinland," answered Heika. + +"You appear to be very sure, brother." + +"I am; because I have been watching the men for some time past, and +occasionally leading them on to talk about the matter." + +"Which way do you hope they will decide?" asked Hake. + +"I hope they will leave." + +"Do you? For my part I care but little. It seems to me that we have as +small a chance of escaping from Greenland as from this land." + +"Brother, ye think in this way because you are content to remain where +Bertha dwells. If Bertha were with Emma in bonny Scotland, your wits +would be sharp enough to perceive that the voyage from Vinland to +Scotland, with an unknown sea between, would be a more hazardous venture +than a voyage from Greenland to Scotland, with Iceland between." + +"That may be true, brother, but methinks my wits are sharp enough to +perceive that neither voyage concerns us, seeing that we have no ship, +and are not likely to succeed in persuading a whale to carry us over." + +"Nevertheless," replied Heika, "I mean to go over to Scotland this +summer if I can." + +Hake looked earnestly in his brother's face. + +"From your tones and words," said he, "I know that you have some plan in +your head." + +"That have I," rejoined Heika firmly, yet with a look of +sadness.--"Listen, Hake: the thought that I shall never more see Emma or +my father is more than I can bear. I will now make the effort to escape +from Greenland--for well assured am I that we shall soon be there +again--or die in the attempt. Of what value is a thrall's life? The +plan that I have in my head is this. You know that when in Greenland we +were often sent out beyond the fiord to fish and to hunt the walrus and +the seal--sometimes in large, sometimes in small, boats. The boats on +Eric's fiord are numerous now. The absence of one for a time would not +be much noticed. There is a man there whose life I saved not long +before we set sail for Vinland. He has a good boat, which I will +borrow, take it round to the western skerries, to which our men seldom +go, and there quietly fit it out for a long voyage. When a fitting time +arrives I will set sail for Scotland." + +Hake shook his head. + +"What wild thoughts are these, brother? Who ever heard of a man +crossing the ocean in a small boat?" + +"The thing may be done," replied Heika. "It is risky, no doubt; but is +not everything more or less risky? Besides, I had rather die than +remain in thraldom." + +He paused, and Hake gazed at the ground in silence. + +"I see," he continued sadly, "you do not like my project, and will not +aid me in the enterprise. After all, how could I expect that you would +be willing to forsake Bertha and face so great a danger?" + +Hake still continued to gaze in silence, and with a strangely perplexed +air, at the ground. + +"Well, well, Hake," resumed the other, in a tone of reproach, "I did not +expect that ye would go with me on this venture, but truly I had counted +on your sympathy and counsel as well as your aid." + +"Ye do wrong me," cried Hake, suddenly starting up and seizing his +brother's hand; "I not only sympathise with you, but I will go with you. +It is not easy all at once to make up one's mind on a point of such +importance. Forsake Bertha I never will as long as one drop of Scottish +blood flows in my veins, for I know that she loves me, though her sense +of duty keeps her aloof--for which I love her all the more. +Nevertheless, I will leave her for a time. I will make this venture +with you. If we perish, we perish. If we succeed I will return to +Greenland with a force that will either induce or compel the surrender +of my bride." + +"Thou art a bold lover," said Heika, smiling. "What! wilt thou carry +her off whether she will or no?" + +"Not so; but I will carry her off whether Leif or Karlsefin, or Biarne +or Thorward, or all Greenland put together, will or no!" + +"Nay, brother, that may not be. It were the maddest venture of all. I +will run this risk alone." + +For some time the brothers disputed upon this point and held out against +each other pretty stoutly. At length Heika reluctantly gave in, and it +was finally agreed that Hake should join him in the proposed attempt to +regain his liberty. + +It did not take long to make the necessary arrangements for leaving +Vinland. The little colony had not struck its roots very deeply into +the soil. They were easily torn out without damage to the feelings of +any one, for little Snorro, as Krake said, was the only creature that +had to bid farewell to his _native_ land--always excepting some of the +cattle and chickens--and he was too young to take it much to heart. + +In a few weeks the _Snake_, and Thorward's ship, the _Dragon_, were +loaded with everything that was of value in the colony, including much +even of the rude furniture of the huts. + +Before leaving, Karlsefin resolved to give a last grand feast to the +savages. He therefore called them together and explained, as he best +could, that he and his friends were going to leave them, but that +perhaps some of them might return again with large supplies of the gay +cloth and ornaments they were so fond of, and he recommended them in the +meantime to make as large a collection of furs as they could, in order +to be ready to trade when the white men returned. He then spread before +them the most sumptuous feast the land could provide, including a large +quantity of dairy produce, which the savages regarded as the most +luxurious of fare. + +After the feast he presented Whitepow, Utway, and Powlet with a large +quantity of bright-coloured cloth and a few silver and iron ornaments, +to be distributed among the members of the tribe as they should see fit +after helping themselves. He also gave them a few cattle and domestic +fowls, after which, weighing anchors, putting out the oars, and hoisting +their sails, the Norsemen bade farewell to Leifsgaard. As they swept +round the point which shut it out from view, they gave vent to one +vigorous parting cheer, which was replied to by the savages with a +feeble imitation and a waving of arms. + +Dropping down the river, they passed the spit of sand where the first +night in Vinland had been spent so pleasantly; caught an offshore breeze +that carried them swiftly beyond the island betwixt which and the shore +they had captured the whale, and finally leaped out upon the swell of +the great ocean. + +"Aha! now am I at home," exclaimed Karlsefin, with heightened colour and +sparkling eyes, as he stood at the helm, and glanced from the bulging +sail to the heaving swell, where Thorward's _Dragon_ was bending over to +the breeze about a cable's length to leeward,--"Now am I at home once +more!" + +"So am not I," murmured poor Bertha, whose white face betrayed the +miserable emotions--or commotions--within. + +All the women, we may remark, had expressed a desire to keep together +during the voyage, hence they had embarked in the _Snake_, which was a +better sea-boat than Thorward's vessel. + +"Of course _you_ are not at home. You are never contented or at home +anywhere!" cried Freydissa sharply. + +Hake wished with all his heart that Bertha was at home in Scotland, and +that her home was his; and Snorro, who was seated on Olaf's knee, said-- + +"Never mind, Bert'a, oos be a tome soon." + +There was a general laugh at this consolatory remark; even Bertha smiled +faintly as she patted Snorro's head, while Astrid and Thora--not to +mention Gudrid--agreed between themselves that he was the dearest, +sweetest, and in every way the most delightful Vinlander that had ever +been born. + +"Of that there can be no doubt," said Leif, with a laugh, "since he is +the only white Vinlander that ever _was_ born." + +But although the party assembled on the poop indulged at first in a few +humorous remarks, they soon became silent and sad, for they were fast +leaving behind them a spot which, with all its drawbacks, had been a +pleasant and happy home for upwards of three years. + +As they stood leaning on the rails that guarded the poop, and gazed +regretfully on the lessening hills, each recalled many pleasant or +stirring incidents which had occurred there, incidents which would +remain--however far or long that land might be left behind--for ever +engraven on their memories. And, long after twilight and distance had +concealed the coast from view, the Norsemen continued to strain their +vision towards the horizon, mentally bidding a long and last farewell to +Vinland. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY SIX. + +CHANGES IN BRATTALID--THE SCOTS CONTINUE TO PLOT AND PLAN. + +Greenland again! Flatface standing on the wharf at Brattalid; Anders +beside him; groups of Norse men, women, and children, and Skraelingers, +around and scattered along the bay. + +What a commotion there was in the colony, to be sure, when it was +discovered that two large ships were sailing up the fiord; and what a +commotion it created in the breasts of those on board these ships when +it was discovered that two other large ships were already at anchor in +the harbour! + +It is not necessary to detain the reader with the details of question +and reply, by which the truth was at last elicited on both sides. +Suffice it to say that the two ships were found to be merchant-vessels +from Iceland, and that, among other colonists, they had brought out +several men whose purpose was to teach and plant the new religion. +Already a small building had been set up, with a short tower on the +roof, which the Norsemen were told was a church, and in which some of +the services of the Christian religion were performed. Elsewhere +several new houses had been built, and everywhere there were signs of +increasing population and prosperity. + +Leif was half pleased, half disappointed at all this. It was gratifying +to find things prospering so well, but it was not pleasant to see the +old place so greatly changed, and to have much of the old home-feeling +done away. + +However, little was said on the subject. The Vinland colonists were too +busy at first, meeting with relations and old companions, and being +introduced to new friends, to say or think much about the matter. After +a few days they became reconciled to the change, and settled down into a +regular busy life. + +One evening Heika went to the house of his friend Edwinsson, who owned +the boat that he wished to become possessed of. He found that the man +was not at home, but there was a serving-woman in the house. + +"Edwinsson no longer lives here," said the girl. "He has gone to live +with old Haraldson and manage his boats, for the old man is not able for +that work now." + +"Do you mean Bertha's father?" asked Heika. + +"Yes; Haraldson is Bertha's father." + +Heika went at once to search for his friend. By the way he chanced to +meet with his brother. + +"Come, Hake," said he, "I want you to go with me to find Edwinsson." + +"With all my heart," said Hake. + +They soon came to old Haraldson's house, which lay at the extreme west +of Brattalid; and when Heika opened the door, there he saw the old man +seated in a large chair, propped up with eider-down pillows. Bertha was +seated on a stool at his feet holding one of his hands. + +"Come in, Heika," she cried, springing up and hasting forward with +pleasure. "I have been trying to tell dear father about the whale you +killed in Vinland." + +She stopped abruptly on observing that Hake was behind his brother. +Recovering herself quickly, however, she welcomed him also with a slight +blush. + +"I want you, Heika," she continued, "to tell the story to my father." + +"Ay, sit down here, young man, and tell it me," said Haraldson, in a +tremulous voice. "I love to hear anything about Vinland, especially +what pleases Bertha. Dear Bertha! I have become very frail since she +went away--very frail; and it has been a weary time--a weary time. But +come, tell me about the whale." + +"Gladly would I do that," said Heika; "but I have business with your man +Edwinsson--business which I want to put out of hands at once. But Hake +will tell the story of the whale. He is a better sagaman than I." + +"Let Hake tell it, then," returned the old man. "You will find +Edwinsson somewhere about among my boats." + +Hake gladly sat down beside Bertha, and began the story of the whale, +while his brother went down to the beach, where he found his friend. + +"Edwinsson," said Heika, after some conversation had passed between +them, "you have a good boat near Leif's wharf. Will you lend it to me?" + +"Right willingly," replied his friend. + +"But I am bound on an excursion that may chance to end in the wreck of +the boat," said Heika. "Will you hold me responsible if I lose it?" + +"'Twill be difficult to hold thee responsible," returned Edwinsson, +laughing, "if ye lose your life along with it. But that matters not. I +gift thee the boat if thou wilt have it. I count it a small gift to the +man who saved my life." + +"Thanks, Edwinsson--thanks. I accept the gift, and, if my venture is +successful, I shall try to let you share the benefit in some way or +other." + +"Hast discovered a new fishing-ground, Heika? What venture do ye +intend?" asked the other. + +"That I will keep secret just now," said Heika, laughing carelessly. "I +don't want to be followed at first. Ye shall know all about it soon. +But hearken, friend, make no mention of it. One does not like to be +laughed at if one fails, you know." + +So saying, Heika went off to Leif's wharf, loosed the boat which he +found there, hoisted the sail, and dropped down with the tide to the +mouth of the fiord. Here a light breeze was blowing, under the +influence of which he soon ran round the point of land that divided +Ericsfiord from Heriulfness. In the course of another hour he reached +the western skerries. + +The skerries or islets in question were little better than bare rocks, +which lay about fifty yards from the mainland, along which they formed a +sort of breakwater for a distance of nearly a quarter of a mile. Within +this breakwater there were several narrow and well-sheltered inlets. +Into one of these Heika ran his boat, and made it fast in a place which +was so well overshadowed by rocks, that the boat could neither be seen +from the land nor from the sea. + +On the landward side this inlet could be reached by a path, which, +though it appeared somewhat rugged, was nevertheless easy to traverse. +Up this path Heika hastened after making the boat fast, intending to +return to Brattalid by land. The distance over land was much shorter +than by water, so that he could soon reach Leif's house, and his brief +absence would attract no attention. + +Just as the Scot issued from behind the rocks which concealed the path +to the inlet, he was suddenly bereft almost of the power to move by the +unexpected sight of Leif himself advancing towards him! + +Poor Heika's heart died within him. He felt that all his long-cherished +and deeply-laid plans were crushed, just as they were about to be +carried into effect, and a feeling of fierce despair prompted him, for a +moment, to commit some wild deed of violence, but he observed that +Leif's head was bent forward and his eyes rested on the ground, as he +advanced slowly, like one who meditates. Heika drew swiftly back behind +the rock, from the shelter of which he had barely passed, and breathed +freely again when Leif passed by, without showing any symptom of having +observed him. Waiting till he had sauntered beyond the next turn in the +path, he started at his utmost speed, and was soon beyond the reach of +Leif's eyes, and back in Brattalid with a relieved mind. + +Had the Scot waited to observe the motions of his master after passing +the turn in the path above mentioned, he would not have experienced so +much mental relief; for no sooner had Leif got behind a small but thick +bush than he turned abruptly, raised his head with an intelligent smile, +lay down behind the bush, and looked quietly through its foliage. He +saw Heika issue from behind the rock, observed his cautious glances from +side to side, and, with something like a chuckle, witnessed his rapid +flight in the direction of the settlement. + +"Hem! something i' the wind," muttered Leif, rising and walking towards +the spot whence his thrall had issued. + +He found the rugged path, descended to the inlet, discovered the boat, +and stood looking at it with a perplexed air for full ten minutes. +Thereafter he shook his head once or twice, smiled in a grave manner, +and slowly sauntered home absorbed in meditation. + +"Hake," whispered Heika to his brother that night, as they sat down +together in the little sleeping-closet off Leif's hall, that had been +allotted to their use, "all my hopes and plans were on the point of +being ruined to-day." + +"Ruined! brother. How was that?" + +Heika related to him all that had occurred at the inlet near the western +skerries. + +"Art thou sure he saw thee not?" asked Hake earnestly. + +"There can be no doubt of that," replied Heika, "for he had no cause to +suspect that anything was wrong; and if he had seen me as I first stood +before him, motionless with surprise, he would doubtless have hailed me. +No, no; something was working very hard in his brain, for he passed on +without the least sign of having seen me." + +"That is well, brother, yet I do not feel easy, for it is well-known +that Leif is a shrewd man, with great command over his feelings. But +now, tell me how best I shall aid you in this enterprise." + +"That is best done by using your bow well, for we shall require a large +supply of dried meat for the voyage, and we must work diligently as well +as secretly during our few hours of leisure, if we would get ready in +time to sail before the rough winds of autumn set in. There are some +tight casks in Leif's old store which I mean to take possession of, at +the last, for water. Our service will more than pay for these and any +other trifles we may find it needful to appropriate." + +Hake thought in his heart that the enterprise was a wild and foolish +one, but, having promised to engage in it, he resolved not to cast the +slightest hindrance in the way, or to say a single word of +discouragement. He therefore approved of all that Heika suggested, and +said that he would give his aid most vigorously. + +"Moreover," he continued, "I have had some consolation to-day which will +spur me on, for I have got Bertha to admit that she loves me, and to +promise that if I can obtain my freedom she will wed me. She even gave +me to understand that she would wed me as a thrall, if only Leif and +Karlsefin would give their consent. But that shall not be. Bertha +shall never be a thrall's bride. I will return and claim her, as I have +said." + +Heika made no reply, but continued to gaze at the floor in silence. + +"Methinks ye are perplexed by something, brother," said Hake. + +"I am thinking," replied Heika, "that it is a pity we cannot use those +curious marks made on skins, wherewith, we are told, men can communicate +one with another when they are absent from each other." + +"What causes the regret just now?" + +"I grudge to quit Leif without a parting word," returned Heika, looking +at his brother with peculiar earnestness; "it seems so ungrateful, so +unkind to one who has ever treated us well." + +"I think with you in that, brother," said Hake. + +"It would be so easy too," continued Heika, "to have some method of +letting him know what I think, if we could only agree about the signs or +signals beforehand." + +Hake laughed softly. + +"That would not be easy; for we could scarcely go to him and say, `Leif, +when you see these particular marks on a certain stone, you are to +understand that we take leave of you for ever with hearty good-will!' I +fear that his suspicions might be aroused thereby." + +"Nay, but I only express regret that we have not some such mode of +intercourse," returned Heika, smiling. "Ye know the sign of the split +arrow which tells of war. Why might we not multiply such signs? For +instance, _by laying a billet of firewood across a man's bed_, one might +signify that he bade him farewell with tender affection and goodwill!" + +"Why, brother," said Hake, laughing, "ye look at me as earnestly as if +you had said something smart; whereas I regard your idea as but a clumsy +one. A billet of wood laid across your friend's bed might more fitly +suggest that you wanted to knock out his brains, or damage his skin, or +burn him alive!" + +Heika laughed heartily, and said that he feared he had nothing of the +spirit of the skald about him, and that his power of invention was not +great. + +"But I have more news to give thee, brother, besides that regarding +Bertha," said Hake. "Do you know there is a countryman of ours on board +of one of the ships that brought out the men of the new religion, and he +has but lately seen our father and Emma?" + +Heika started and laid his hand on his brother's arm, while he gazed +earnestly into his face. + +"It is ill jesting on such a subject," he said somewhat sternly. + +"So think I, brother; therefore I recommend you not to jest," returned +Hake gravely. + +"Nay, but is it true?" + +"Ay, true as that the sky is over our heads. I have had a long talk +with him, and when he found I was a countryman he gave me a hug that +made my ribs bend. His name is Sawneysson, a very giant of a man, with +hair that might have grown on the back of a Greenland bear, only that it +is red instead of white. He told me that he knew our father well by +sight, and last saw him taking a ramble on Dunedin hill, whither he had +walked from our village on the Forth, which shows that the old man's +vigour has improved. Emma was with him too, so Sawneysson said, looking +beautiful, but somewhat sad." + +"How knew he her name?" asked Heika. + +"He knew it not," replied Hake. "He did but say that a fair maiden +walked with our father, and I knew at once from his description that it +was Emma. But you can inquire for yourself at his own mouth, for this +countryman of ours is an enthusiastic fellow, and fond of talking about +home." + +"Brother," said Heika, with a sad but earnest look, "I must give this +man the cold shoulder." + +"Nay, then, disappointment must have changed thee much," said Hake, in +surprise, "for that is the last thing I had expected thee to say." + +"It is not disappointment but caution that makes me speak and think as I +do. If we seem to be too eager about our native land it may tend to +make Leif more watchful of us, which of all things would be the greatest +misfortune that could befall us just at this time." + +"There is something in that," returned Hake; "but will it not suffice to +exercise a little caution and self-restraint, without giving our +countryman the cold shoulder?" + +"I know not," replied Heika, with a troubled air; "but I would that he +had not turned up just now, though I confess it gladdens me to hear of +our father and Emma.--Now, Hake, we must to bed if we would be up +betimes to secure a little leisure for the carrying out of our +enterprise." + +Without further conversation the brothers threw off their coats and +shoes, and lay down together with the rest of their clothing on, so as +to be ready for an early start. The shield and helmet of each hung on +the wall just over the bed, and their two swords leaned against the bed +itself, within reach of their hands, for thus guardedly did men deem it +necessary to take their rest in the warlike days of old. + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY SEVEN. + +DISAPPOINTMENT TERMINATES IN UNLOOKED-FOR SUCCESS, AND THE SAGA COMES TO +AN END. + +During some weeks after the events narrated in the last chapter, the +Scottish brothers continued quietly, stealthily, and steadily to collect +provisions and all things necessary for the projected voyage across the +Atlantic. + +During the same period the general business of the settlement was +prosecuted with activity. The Christian missionaries not only +instructed the people in the new faith, and baptised those that +believed, but assisted and guided them in the building of huts and +houses, the planning of wharves and the laying out of townships; [see +Note at end of Chapter] while the crews of the two recently arrived +ships, having found it necessary to make up their minds to winter in +Greenland, busied themselves in collecting fats, oil, skins, feathers, +etcetera, to be packed and got ready for shipment in the following +spring. + +Karlsefin also made preparations for a voyage in spring to Iceland, and +Thorward, Biarne, Krake, and the other Vinland heroes assisted in that +work, or in some other of the multifarious duties that had to be +attended to in the colony, while Olaf undertook the responsible duty of +superintending the education, mental and physical, of that rampant +little Vinlander, Snorro, the son of Karlsefin. + +Leif Ericsson exercised a sort of general superintendence of the whole +colony. It seemed to be tacitly agreed on and admitted that he was the +national chief or governor, and as no one was disposed to dispute his +claim to that position all was peace and harmony. + +Nevertheless there was something unusual in Leif's manner at that time +which rather perplexed his friends, and quite puzzled Anders, his +major-domo. + +That free and easy individual could not understand the dreamy moods into +which his master fell, still less could he comprehend the gleams of +quiet humour and expressions of intense seriousness, with other +contradictory appearances, which occasionally manifested themselves in +Leif's visage and demeanour. It was plain that there was much on his +mind, and that much of that was gay as well as grave. Anders made +several attempts to find out what was the matter, but was met at one +time with grave evasion, at another with quiet jocularity, which left +him as wise as before. + +Towards the Scottish brothers Leif maintained an unvarying aspect of +reserve, which filled them with uneasiness; but with the female members +of his household, and the children, he was all gentleness, and often +playful. + +"Leif," said Karlsefin to him one day, "it appears to me that something +weighs on your mind, or else ye have left some of your wits in Vinland." + +"Think ye not that the cares of such a large and growing colony are +sufficient to account for any new wrinkles that may appear on my brow?" +replied Leif, with a peculiar smile, and a glance from the corner of his +eye. + +"Well, I daresay that might account for it, and yet things are swimming +on so well that these cares do not seem to be much increased." + +"Sometimes domestic cares trouble a man more than public ones, +Karlsefin. Look at thy friend Thorward, now. 'Tis little that he would +care for a mountain of outside troubles on his broad shoulders if he +might only drop them when he crossed the threshold of his own door." + +"That is true," returned the other; "if a man have not peace in his own +house, there is no peace for him on earth. Nevertheless my friend +Thorward is not in such a bad case. Freydissa has improved vastly of +late, and Thorward has also grown more amiable and less contradictions-- +add to which, he and she love each other dearly. But, Leif, there can +be no domestic troubles in your case, for your household is well +ordered." + +"Thank God there are none," said Leif seriously. It was the first time +that Leif had used that expression, and his friend heard it with some +surprise and pleasure, but said nothing. + +"Still," continued Leif, "I am not destitute of troubles. Has not that +thrall Hake overturned the peace of my sweet kinswoman Bertha? The girl +loves the thrall--I can see that, as plain as I can see the vane on +yonder mast-head--and there is no cure for love!" + +Karlsefin looked earnestly at his friend as if about to speak, but +observing the stern frown on Leif's countenance, he forbore. + +In a minute or so Karlsefin remarked quietly that Hake was a faithful +thrall. + +"I'm not so sure of that as ye seem to be," returned Leif, with +increasing sternness, "but, whether faithful or not, no thrall shall +ever wed Bertha." + +"What is that you say about Bertha?" asked Biarne, coming up just then. + +"Nothing of moment," replied Leif. "What news bring you, Biarne? for +that ye bring news is plain by the glance of your eye." + +"My eye is an incorrigible tell-tale," cried Biarne, laughing. +"However, it has not much to tell at present. Only that you are about +to receive a visit from some old friends, and that Anders will have to +keep his kettles full for some time to come. A band of Skraelingers +are--. But here they come to speak for themselves." + +At that moment a troop of the Greenland savages came round the point-- +the identical point where they had received such a terrible shock some +years before--with Flatface dancing joyously in front of them. + +Flatface had heard of their coming, had gone out to meet them, had found +several of his relations among them, and was now returning, scarce able +to contain himself with delight, as he made their mouths water by +dilating at great length on the delicious things contained in Anders's +capacious kettles. + +While Leif and the others went to meet the Skraelingers, Heika and his +brother sat in their own sleeping-closet, talking in a low tone, and +making the final arrangements for their flight. + +"Now are ye sure that all is on board--nothing omitted?" asked Hake, +"for it will be hard to obtain anything once we are out on the sea, and +we can't well return to fetch what we have forgotten." + +"All is ready," answered Heika sadly. "I cannot tell how much it +grieves me to go away in this fashion; but freedom must be regained at +any price. Now remember, meet me exactly when the moon shows its upper +edge above the sea to-night. Not later, and not sooner, for the longer +ye can remain about the hall the less likely will any one be to inquire +after _me_." + +"I will be sure not to fail you; but, Heika, is that not a little too +late? The flood-tide will be past, and if there is any sea on, it will +be ill passing the skerries, many of which are but little covered, even +at high water." + +"Trust me, Hake; it will not be too late. Be sure that ye come no +sooner--else evil may ensue." + +"My heart sinks when I think of Bertha," said Hake, with a deep sigh. +"It will seem so cold, so hard, so unaccountable, to leave her without +one word, one farewell." + +"Think better of it, brother," said Heika eagerly; "I am prepared to +start alone even now!" + +"Never!" exclaimed Hake, flushing,--"What? shall I draw back like a +coward at the last moment, after pledging my word to go? and shall I +leave you to face this enterprise alone? Nay, Heika, we have suffered +for many years together, we shall triumph now together--or perish." + +"My poor brother," said Heika, grasping Hake's hand, and kissing it with +deep feeling.--"But go now to the hall, and leave me; I hear them laying +the tables for supper. The window is easily removed; I will hasten at +once and get things ready. Take good care not to re-enter this closet +after leaving it, for the carls are moving about the hall, and may +chance to observe that it is empty. Be circumspect, brother." + +They squeezed hands again, and Hake went into the hall, where he mingled +with the house-carls, and chatted carelessly about the events of the +day. + +The instant he was gone Heika rose and removed the parchment window, +took a billet of firewood and laid it across the bed, then, leaping out, +he walked smartly towards the west end of the village. + +It was beginning to grow dark, and few of the people were about. To +those whom he passed Heika nodded familiarly, but did not stop. The +moment he had rounded the cliff which hid Brattalid from view, he ran +westward at full speed. + +Meanwhile supper was laid in the hall, and all were awaiting the +entrance of the master of the house and Karlsefin, but there was no +appearance of either. After a quarter of an hour had passed, and they +were beginning to wonder what had become of them, the door opened and +Biarne entered, saying that Leif had sent him to say that as he had +business which would keep him out late, they were not to wait supper for +him. + +Hake began to feel somewhat uneasy at this, and when supper was finished +he resolved to leave the house a little before the appointed time. For +that purpose he entered the sleeping-closet, intending to pass out by +the window. + +The first thing that caught his eye was the billet of firewood lying +_across the bed_! His heart almost stood still at the sight, for this, +coupled with Heika's display of deep feeling, and their recent +conversation about signs, caused the truth to flash upon him. + +With one bound he passed through the window and flew westward like the +wind-round the point, over the ridge, and down towards the appointed +rendezvous at the skerries. + +But, to return to Heika. When he neared the inlet he changed his pace +to a rapid walk, and glanced cautiously from side to side, to make quite +sure that he was not observed by any one who might chance to have +wandered in that direction. + +Now, it is a well-known fact in the affairs of this world, that many +strange things occur in a most unaccountable manner. Who can tell how +it was, or why it was that, just a few minutes before Heika approached +the inlet from the landward side, a small boat entered it from the +seaward side, out of which stepped Leif Ericsson and Karlsefin? They +drew their boat into a corner in deep shadow, and then, going to another +corner, also in deep shadow, sat down on a ledge of rock without +uttering a single word. + +They had never been in that inlet before; had never seen it, probably +never thought of it before, yet there they were, quietly seated in it-- +and, just in the nick of time! + +From the place where they sat neither their own boat nor Leif's could be +seen--only the landward opening of the inlet. + +Presently approaching footsteps were heard. The two friends rose. A +moment later and Heika stood before them. He stopped abruptly on +beholding them, and his eyes blazed with astonishment, rage, and +despair. Suddenly he looked round as if in search of a weapon, or of a +way of escape. + +"Be wise, lad," said Leif, kindly yet very gravely; "no evil will come +of it if ye are wise, and take your misfortunes like a man." + +Heika was subdued by the gentle tone. He crossed his arms on his +heaving chest, and stood erect before them with his head slightly +drooped, and a look of profound sadness, rather than disappointment, on +his countenance. + +"Come hither, Heika," said Leif, pointing seaward, "I have somewhat to +show thee." + +They went down the beach till they stood beside the boat, which was +ready for sea. + +"This is a strange sight," he continued; "here is an excellent boat, +well found, well loaded, well busked in every way for a long voyage. +Knowest thou aught in regard to it, Heika?" + +"I know," answered the Scot, bitterly, "that if ye had come hither only +half-an-hour later, that boat would have been on its way with me to +Scotland." + +"What, with you _alone_?" + +"Ay--with me alone." + +"That is strange," said Leif, somewhat perplexed; "I had fancied that +you brothers loved each other passing well; but I suppose that a man who +can be guilty of ingratitude is not to be much depended on in the matter +of affection." + +Heika winced at these words--not that the charge of ingratitude affected +him, but he could not submit calmly to the unjust supposition that in +his contemplated flight he had been actuated by selfish indifference to +his brother. At the same time he would not condescend to give any +explanation of his conduct. Drawing himself up, he looked Leif full in +the face. + +"Norseman," he said, "small is the gratitude I owe to thee. 'Tis true, +ye have treated me and my brother kindly since we came hither, and for +that I owe thee thanks, and would gladly have paid this debt before +leaving, had such been consistent with flight; but kindness, however +great, is not a worthy price for liberty, and when King Olaf Tryggvisson +sent me to thee, I made no promise to sell my liberty at such a price. +But in regard to Hake--" + +"Ay, in regard to Hake, go on; why dost thou stop?" said Leif, in a +stern tone. "There is some truth in what ye say about gratitude; but +what of Hake?" + +The Scot still remained silent, with his lips compressed, and dropped +his eyes sternly on the ground. + +"This seems to me a bad business," said Karlsefin, who had hitherto +listened with an expression of anxiety and disappointment gradually +deepening on his countenance. "I had thought better of thee, Heika. +Surely Hake's longing to be free and in his own native land must be to +the full as strong as thine. I am puzzled, moreover, for two were +better than one in the mad voyage ye thought to undertake." + +Heika smiled at this. + +"Truly," he said, "my brother loves his native land and freedom, +nevertheless he prefers bondage to freedom, and Greenland to his native +land. And yet would he fain have sacrificed his preference, and +resigned his bondage out of love to me, if I would have allowed him." + +"Resigned his bondage, Heika!" exclaimed Leif. "Ye speak in riddles, +man; what mean you?" + +Instead of replying the Scot looked at Leif with an intelligent smile, +and held up his forefinger as if to call attention. At the same moment +the sound as if of some one running at full speed was heard faintly in +the distance. + +Leif and Karlsefin looked at the Scot in surprise. + +"It is my brother," he said, sadly. + +In a few seconds the steps were close at hand. Leif seized Karlsefin by +the arm, and dragged him swiftly under the deep shadow of the cliffs +just as Hake came through the narrow opening with such a rush that on +seeing Heika he could not avoid plunging violently into his extended +arms. + +"Was this right in thee, brother?" he cried, laying his hand on Heika's +shoulder, on recovering himself; "was it wise to treat me thus like a +child?" + +"It was kindly meant," said Heika, much perplexed as to how he should +act in existing circumstances. + +"Kindly meant!" exclaimed Hake, vehemently. "Ay, well do I know that, +yet it was not wisely kind to forsake me after promising to take me with +you, when ye knew that I did but leave Bertha for a time, and meant to +come back and win or demand her from--." + +"Hush! brother, hush!" cried Heika, laying his hand on the other's +mouth. "Whatever I thought or meant to do matters little now, for I +have found it impossible to undertake this voyage after all." + +"Impossible!" echoed Hake; "why, what craven spirit has come over thee? +Is not the boat ready? am not _I_ ready, and is not the opportunity +favourable?" + +"All is ready, no doubt," replied Heika, hesitating, "but--" + +"But the truth is," cried Leif, as he and Karlsefin issued from their +place of concealment, laughing heartily, "the truth is, that the +opportunity is _not_ favourable, for I have some objection to either of +you leaving me at present--though the objection is not so strong but +that it might give way if ye desired it greatly. Come hither, all of +you." + +He went a few steps towards the boat, and pointing to it, said--"Tell +me, Hake, for thou art not a bad counsellor at need, dost think that +vessel there is a sufficiently large one to venture a voyage in it on +these northern seas at this time of year?" + +"It is large enough for men who would be free," replied Hake moodily, +for his astonishment on first beholding his master had given place to +deep mortification, now that he perceived his brother's hopes and plans +were frustrated. + +"Nay, as to being free," returned Leif, with a laugh, "thy brother +hinted not long ago something about thy preference for thraldom, in +regard to which I now perceive some glimmering of reason; but I ask thee +for a matter-of-fact opinion. Dost think there would be much risk in +the voyage thy brother contemplated?" + +"There would be some risk, doubtless, yet not so much but that we would +have run it for the sake of freedom." + +"H'm! In my opinion it would have been a mad venture," rejoined Leif. +"What say you, Karlsefin?" + +"A useless venture, as well as mad," he replied; "for death, not +freedom, would have been the end of it." + +"So I think," returned Leif, "and that is my only objection to your +undertaking it, Hake. Nevertheless if you and Heika are still willing +to venture, ye may do so. There lies the boat; a fair wind is blowing +outside; get on board, shove off, hoist the sail and away to bonny +Scotland if you will, for _I grant you freedom to go_!" + +"It is ill to jest with thralls," said Heika, looking sternly at his +master. + +"Nay, I do not jest--nor are ye thralls," replied Leif, assuming a look +and tone of unwonted seriousness. "Give me your attention, friends; and +thou, Karlsefin, take note of what I say, for I care not to talk much on +this subject until my mind is more clear upon it. My opinion is that +this new religion which we hear so much of just now, is _true_. It is +of God--not of man, and I believe that Jesus Christ, my Lord, has come +in the flesh to save His people from their sins. Many things have led +me to this opinion, in regard to which I will not speak. I have thought +and heard much for some years past, and woefully have I been staggered, +as well as helped on, by the men who have been sent to Greenland with +the Good News. Some have, by their conduct squaring with their +profession, led me to believe. Others have, by their conduct belying +their profession, hindered me. But the Lord Himself has led me into a +certain measure of light; and there is one law of His in particular, +which just now comes home to me with much power, namely +this--`Whatsoever ye would that men should do unto you, do ye even so +unto them.' This law, I am persuaded, is of God. Long have I lived, +and never before have I seen it acted on till these Christians came +amongst us. They do not, indeed, always practise as they teach; but +they are imperfect, therefore they cannot practise _fully_ as they +teach, because they teach _perfection_. This law I shall henceforth +follow as I best can. I follow it to-day. If I were in thraldom to +_you_, Heika, just now, I would wish you to set me free, therefore I now +set you and your brother free. The rule is very simple of application. +It only wants a willing spirit. And let me add--ye have to thank the +Lord, not me, for your freedom." + +The brothers stood speechless with surprise on hearing this, but +Karlsefin grasped Leif's hand and said very earnestly--"Ye have done +well, brother. Long have I thought to urge thee to this, and frequently +have I asked of Him that it might be as it has turned out. Now, my +prayer is answered. But what say Heika and Hake to this?" + +"Never mind what they say," returned Leif brusquely. "Doubtless their +thoughts interfere with their speech at present. And hark 'ee, all; as +I said before, I desire to have no further talk at present on this +point. Ye are welcome to tell whom ye please what I have said, and what +I have done, and why I have done it--there let the matter rest. So now, +Heika and Hake," he added, in a gay tone, "I mean what I say. There +lies the boat, and ye are free to go if it please you. Only, if ye will +accept my advice you will make up your minds to spend this winter in +Greenland as my guests, and in spring there will be better weather and a +more fitting craft to carry you over the sea to Scotland. Meanwhile +Hake will have ample opportunity to woo, win, and wed--without +demanding--the fair Bertha!" + +Need we say that the brothers gladly accepted this generous invitation, +and endeavoured, in spite of Leif's prohibition, to express their +gratitude in a few earnest though broken sentences. + +Great was the surprise that night in Brattalid, when it was made known +that Leif Ericsson had given freedom to his thralls out of regard to the +Christian religion. Leif afterwards told his friends that it was out of +regard to the Founder of that religion, but it was long before many of +the people could see a distinction in that. Numerous were the +theological discussions, too, which this act of emancipation called +forth in every household, and great was the joy which it created in one +or two hearts. + +To say nothing of the young Scots themselves, it caused the heart of +timid little Bertha to sing for joy, while Gudrid, Astrid, and Thora +rejoiced sympathetically, and looked forward with pleasant anticipation +to the approaching marriage. Even Freydissa opened out in a new light +on the occasion, and congratulated her handmaiden heartily, telling her +with real sincerity that marriage was the only thing she was fit for! + +But it was Olaf who displayed the greatest amount of feeling on the +occasion, and it was Snorro on whom he expended himself! + +On the morning after the great event, he hoisted Snorro on his back with +his wonted care and tenderness, and hurried off with him to the solitude +of the sea-shore--for, alas! there were no umbrageous solitudes in +Greenland. There, not far from the spot where Flatface and his friends +had once been made to wriggle their coat-tails with terror, he set +Snorro down, and, sitting on a rock beside him, said-- + +"Now, old man, it is going to have a talk with me." + +"Iss," replied Snorro, very contentedly. + +"Does it know what has happened to Hake and Heika?" + +Snorro shook his head. + +"Well, my father has set them both free." + +"Bof f'ee?" repeated Snorro, with a puzzled look. + +"Yes, both." + +"W'at's _f'ee_?" asked Snorro. + +Olaf was greatly perplexed, for he knew not how to convey an idea of the +meaning of that word to his little friend. He made various attempts, +however, by means of simple illustrations and words, to explain it, but +without success--as was made plain by Snorro's usually intelligent +countenance remaining a perfect blank. + +At last he seized the child by both wrists and held him fast for a few +seconds. + +"Snorro," he said, "you are _not_ free while I hold you. Now," he +added, releasing the wrists, "you _are_ free." + +Snorro's countenance was no longer blank, but, on the contrary, +extremely perplexed. + +"Leif," he said, "no' hold Heika an' Hake by e _hands_!" + +"No," replied Olaf, "but he holds them by the spirit." + +"W'at's spiwit?" asked Snorro. + +Olaf was in despair! + +"Well, well," he cried, after stroking his chin and pulling his nose, +and knuckling his forehead in the vain hope of hitting on some other +mode of explaining his meaning; "it don't matter, old man. They are +free, and that has made them very happy; and oh! I am very glad, +because I am so fond of Hake. Don't you remember how he came to save us +from the Skraelingers, and nearly did it too? And he is going to be +married to Bertha. Isn't that nice? It knows what married means, don't +it?" + +"No," said Snorro. + +"Well, no matter; it's what seems to make everybody very happy; and +Bertha is very happy, and so am I, for I'm fond of Bertha, as well as of +Hake; and so is Snorro, isn't he?" + +"Iss," replied Snorro, with a very decided nod. + +"Well, that's all very pleasant," continued Olaf, running on with the +subject until it led him into another subject, which led him into a +third and fourth, and so on, with the ever-varying moods of his gay and +fanciful mind, until he was led in spirit to Vinland, where he and +Snorro remained lost in the woods, perfectly contented and happy, for +the remainder of the day. + +And now, patient reader, we must lead you in spirit away from the scenes +on which we have dwelt so long, across the wide ocean to Scotland. + +There, on the heights of a lion-like hill, stand Heika and Hake. A +precipitous crag rises behind them. In front towers a rock, from which +Edwin's castle frowns down on the huts of an embryo city. The +undulating woodland between resounds with the notes of the huntsman's +horn. Away in the distance lie the clear waters of the fiord of Forth, +and the background of Scotia's highland hills mingling with the sky. + +The brothers stand in rapt and silent admiration of the scene, as well +they may, for it is surpassingly beautiful. But they do not stand +alone. Bertha leans on Hake's arm, and a tall girl with dark hair leans +on Heika's. Beside them stands a fine-looking though somewhat delicate +old man; whose benignant gaze seems to be more attracted by the young +people than the scenery. + +Need we say that this is the Scottish Earl, the father of our +fleet-footed thralls, and that the dark-haired girl is Emma? We will +not violate your sense of propriety, gentle reader, by talking of Mrs +Heika; nor will we venture to make reference to the little Heikas left +at home! + +But these are not all the party. Karlsefin, Biarne, and Thorward are +there--on a visit to the Earl--with Gudrid and Freydissa; and away on +the fiord they can see their two Norse galleys towering like quaint +giants at rest among the small craft that ply and skim about there. + +Shall we listen to what our friends say? We think not. Too long +already have we caused them to break the silence which they have +maintained for the last eight hundred years. Let us rather bid their +shades depart with a kind farewell. + +But before the memory of them is quite gone, let us say a word or two in +conclusion. + +Whether the Norsemen ever returned again to Vinland is a matter of +uncertainty, for the saga is silent on that point; and it is to be +feared that Snorro, the first American, did not return to take +possession of his native land, for when the great continent was +re-discovered about five hundred years later, only "red-skins" were +found there; and the Pilgrim Fathers make no mention of having met with +descendants of any colony of white men. + +What ultimately became of Snorro and Olaf is, we regret to say, unknown. +This, however, is certain, that Karlsefin, according to his +oft-expressed intention, retired to Iceland, where he dwelt happily with +Gudrid, Leif, Biarne, and Thorward for many years. It is therefore +probable that Snorro and Olaf took to a seafaring life, which was almost +the only life open to enterprising men in those days. If they did, they +distinguished themselves--there can be no doubt whatever upon that +point. + +As to the other personages who have figured in our tale, we can only +surmise--at least hope--that they lived long and happily, for the saga +relates nothing as to the end of their respective careers. But of this +we are quite sure, that wherever they went, or however long they lived, +they never failed to retain a lively recollection of that romantic +period of their lives when they sojourned in the pleasant groves of +Vinland--that mighty continent which, all unsuspected by these men of +old, was destined, in the course of time, to play such a grand and +important part in the world's history. + +Thus ends all that we have got to tell of the adventures of the Norsemen +in the West, and the Discovery of America before Columbus. + +THE END. + +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +Note. An important Christian colony existed in Greenland for nearly 400 +years--from some time in the tenth to near the end of the fourteenth +century,--a colony in which, in the fourteenth century, there were 190 +townships and a town called Garda, in which were a cathedral, bishop's +seat, and twelve or thirteen churches, besides other Christian +establishments, with a regular succession of bishops for their +superintendence, of whom seventeen are named in the sagas. This colony, +strange to say, was obliterated, no one knew how or when, and its very +existence was forgotten by the civilised world. It was chronicled, +however, in the Icelandic sagas and brought to light by antiquaries of +the highest authority. The statistical details given by the sagas have +been corroborated by the actual discovery in Greenland, in the +eighteenth and nineteenth centuries, of vast ecclesiastical and other +buildings. These are facts which do not admit of reasonable doubt--so +writes Samuel Laing in his translation of "The Heimskringla, or +Chronicle of the Kings of Norway," volume one, page 141. + + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's The Norsemen in the West, by R.M. Ballantyne + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE NORSEMEN IN THE WEST *** + +***** This file should be named 21753.txt or 21753.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/2/1/7/5/21753/ + +Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |